EZEKIEL

 

and YHWH’s

 

 Judgment

 

 

for the

 

Good News

 

PEOPLE

 

 

 

VOLUME XXXV

 

The Future?

 

 

EZEKIEL and YHWH’s

 

 

Judgment for the

 

 

 Good News People

 

 

 

 

Volume XXXV--The Future?

 

 

 

 

 

by

 

an unworthy servant

 

 

 

 

 

 

And you shall know the truth,

 

and the truth will make you free.

 

(John 8:32)

 

 

Common Law Copyright, 2003 & 2005 CE, an unworthy servant, Calder, Idaho.  The author claims his Right of exclusive ownership and control of this publication, the fruit of his labor, as a matter of Intellectual Property protected by the Laws of YHWH and as guaranteed by the US Constitution for the United States.  Permission is granted to quote provided appropriate credit is cited together with the Publisher’s web site name and postal mailing address––WWW.age-end.com PO Box 473, Calder, ID 83808, USA. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Contents

 

 

 

Volume XXXV--The Future? 

 

 

CHAPTER OR APPENDIX                                                       PAGE

 

 

      -                  Cover Page                                                                                                         1

 

      -                  Title Page                                                                                                             2

 

      -                  Contents                                                                                                              3

 

      -                  Publisher’s Preface                                                                                           4

 

 

Part IIIII--Further Addendum 

 

      C                 The Dilemma                                                                                                       5

 

      D                 The Building Crisis                                                                                          10

 

      E                 Possible Chronology of the Age End                                                           90

SHEERIT YISRAEL

PO Box 473

Calder, Idaho 83808, USA

 

 

Publisher’s Preface

 

Greetings!  The following presentation is volume thirty-five of a 36-volume production of some 6,000 pages on “Ezekiel and YHWH’s Judgment for the Good News People,” all of which is on the Internet at the www.age-end.com web site. 

 

This overall effort provides an interpretation of the Good News message in the New Testament, its linkage to the book of Ezekiel, and an application of both to the age-end prophecies relating to certain nations and peoples now out in the world.  In order for this single volume to be understood and comprehended, it is imperative that the study be read from its beginning--from page one of volume one. 

 

Anyone trying to read this volume or the study’s 6,000 pages at any mid-point will end up in a state of confusion without having read and digested the preceding material.  It is crucially important that this work be read in sequence from its beginning--otherwise, the reader will almost certainly end up missing the essence of the message! 

 

The effort was originally set on a Macintosh computer with Microsoft Word 6.0.1.  It was set in Helvetica, 12-point type (18 pt on chapter headings); single line spacings; and margins:  left 1.2”, right 0.8”, top 0.7”, bottom 0.8” and footer 0.6” (for page numbers). 

 

For further information on obtaining this study in 18 computer floppy disks (IBM-formatted, high density, 2HD, 1.44 MB, 3 1/2 inches); in a single CD-Rom; or in hard copies (when the Internet or a compatible computer is not available); please write the publisher at the above address and send a stamped, self-addressed, long (legal-size), return envelope. 

 

With a CD-Rom or computer floppy disks, the study is readable on Macintosh (systems 5.0 and later) or IBM/compatible (with Microsoft Word-Windows) personal computers.  May The Great CREATOR and SOVEREIGN OF THE UNIVERSE bless you as you study His word to learn His will and to obey Him.  Shalom (peace) to you and yours! 

 

an unworthy servant, Hanukkah 2003 CE

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Appendix C--The Dilemma

 

 

Ezekiel 7:14 

 

As pointed out in previous chapters herein, the writer Yechezkel laid out the future of the House of Yisrael nations (the US, Britain, Canada, Australia, New Zealand, etc).  When the prophet Yechezkel started his prophecies, he immediately conveyed the coming destruction of the House of Yisrael (in chapters 4-7). 

 

When WWIII finally erupts over Yisrael (and it may be in the making right now with the situation in the Middle East), the point is reached that when the trumpet of war is sounded no one goes out to fight (Ezek 7:14).  This is an amazing prophecy and especially when one looks at the character of the United States.  Before 2000, theoretically, some US persons would go out to fight. 

 

This writer was born in 1934 and grew up in WWII when the US ruled supreme militarily.  Patriotism was strong and millions of American men were quite willing to die for this nation. 

 

In 1951-1952, this writer was in Korea.  Me and numbers of other young Americans would have gladly died for the US.  In 1967-1968, this writer was in Vietnam.  But then, there was some question about how many people were willing to die for America.  Since Vietnam, each succeeding war only brings up more questions and fewer and fewer people who would die for this nation. 

 

Frankly, in the modern United States, at the start of 2003, this writer knows of no one who would go out to fight and die for America (it is doubtful that any of those who died in Afghanistan or Iraq “willingly” died for the US).  Conceivably, there might be a few individuals who will say that they are willing to die for America.  But these words have to remain very questionable in the real world. 

 

Actually today, America’s military is largely staffed with paid mercenaries (yes, many people in the services are there simply because of the payroll).  In virtually all cases of so-called American allies, the allies are bought and paid for by US dollars.  

 

In Afghanistan, not only did the US buy allies, but even many or all of the Northern Alliance soldiers were paid mercenaries on the US payroll.  As noted earlier, the US sent CIA agents into Iraq during the US war on Iraq to buy off the various tribal chiefs (to get them to turn against Saddam and support the US). 

 

What will happen, if and when, the US dollar is finally recognized as being worthless (as it is right now)?  What is there in America to pay off and bribe foreign powers to be allies or to hire foreign mercenaries? 

 

 

America For Sale 

 

This writer read somewhere that if the dollar collapses (because American political leaders have flooded the world with dollar bills to buy consumer goods and/or as payoffs and bribes to various nations for support or to allow those nations to be controlled by the US plutocrats), the US will have to start selling off much of her military hardware and certainly technology. 

 

In the real world, the sale of US military technology has been going on for years because of the plutocrats, who own that technology; and it is profitable for them to sell that technology to whomsoever can pay the bill.  Hence, in the 1990s, there was a flow of US technology to China. 

 

But this thing will reach an incredible height when the dollar collapses.  Then, everything America has will be up for sale.  This will mean that US aircraft carriers, destroyers, submarines, guns, nuclear bombs, etc will be on the block for sale. 

 

So, with the lack of patriotism and the demoralization of the American people (because of the prevailing Sabbatian influence), will anyone go out to fight when WWIII finally erupts on the global scene?  Frankly, this writer doubts it.  Ezekiel 7:14 is about to be fulfilled. 

 

What this amounts to is the fact that the House of Yisrael (starting with the US and Canada) is about to be judged by YHWH for her gross sins and depravity.  The prophet Yechezkel laid out this condition of the Israelite people and the coming judgment for sin some 2,600 years ago.  That day now seems to be upon us.  We are about to be judged for sin and evil. 

 

 

My Sins, Revisited 

 

As an old man now, this writer can look back on my life of sin, evil, gross ignorance and stupidity.  i have done much wrong over the years and it has brought enormous hurt, punishment and trouble upon me and others. 

 

i have given up or passed up much happiness and joy in this life simply because i acted in defiance of YHWH’s mitzwot (just as is now true with the United States and the other House of Yisrael nations).  If i could have known or would have just obeyed some important things in life, my old age could be very different. 

 

While i have been grossly evil and wicked, it is truth and verity that some or much of it was due simply to ignorance and stupidity on my part.  If i would have just known and understood the implications of things that i did wrong as a boy or young man, my life today would manifestly be different.  But the truth is that i didn’t know because i was never properly taught about the truths i needed. 

 

Ultimately, everybody was to blame for my losses in life (although much of the blame has to be placed on me).  My parents, relatives, friends and associates all failed me.  And for sure, the exposure i had to Christian sun worship was an absolute joke and waste of time and energy--plus, the sun worship charlatans taught me many works of evil and neglected the works of truth and righteousness. 

 

As my father died when i was young, the case can be made that he didn’t have an opportunity to teach me what i needed.  But even before he died, he still failed to teach me things that i needed to know--and so did everyone else i knew of or had contact with as i grew up. 

 

Pathetic, evil Christianity was the worst of all because it was so sorry that i grew up with no respect, appreciation, knowledge or understanding of the Scriptures (which i needed so badly). 

 

The amazing thing is that today, as i am aware of how i was not taught and instructed in the things i needed, i must go on record and say that i too failed my son as well when he was growing up.  And i am completely assured that my son failed his children as well. 

 

 

We All Are Guilty 

 

Not only did all of these failures come to me and my loved ones, but they are manifestly apparent in all of society.  Everybody falls into place and fails themselves, their children, their rea neighbors next door, their relatives and friends and on and on.  It just seems that we all are locked in stupidity and/or ignorance (actually ignorance because if we really knew and understood, we would change). 

 

While reflecting upon my terrible sins over my life, the thought came to me that much of the generic American population is also guilty of many of the same types of sins.  And it isn’t just the average person on the street who is a gross sinner.  All of the American and worldly leaderships are in the same category. 

 

In thinking about the huge array of lies and deception which George W. Bush and his team of evil helpers (like Powell, Rumsfeld, Rice, etc) have heaped upon so-called humanity, i realized that i too have been guilty in my former days of many of the same types of lies, deceits and evil.  Yes, it is very easy for any one of us to become a liar (no wonder the Book says that all men are liars). 

 

It would be very hypocritical of me to condemn Slick Clinton, George W. Bush and the other worldly leaders for their lies, their deceits, their evil and their wretchedness while ignoring my own lies, deceits, evil and wretchedness. 

 

Therefore, my sins have been laid out from time to time in this publication (or otherwise, i would be a hypocrite for condemning their sins while ignoring my own).  i am ashamed of my sins and it is not easy for me to have to publicly confess them before others.  i would be more pleased to simply ignore them and go about my business of condemning the sins of others. 

 

If there is one difference between my huge works of evil and wickedness, it lies in the vein that many and hopefully all of my shortcomings are in the past tense.  They are things charged to my account in past days.  Conversely, the daily lies, deceits, evil and depravity of George W. Bush, Bill “Slick” Clinton and the others are current and are presently happening. 

 

Hopefully, George W. Bush, George H. W. Bush, Slick Clinton, Butch Reno, John Ashcroft, Donald Rumsfeld, Colin Powell, Condi Rice, Saddam Hussein, Osama bin Laden, and other leaders will all one day repent of their sins and evil and change from the wicked and depraved paths that they are traveling.  But this option seems out of the question in the immediate days ahead.   

 

 

Destruction 

 

Like the prophet Hosea wrote to the sheep of the lost House of Yisrael, YHWH’s people will be destroyed for lack of knowledge.  And that’s the truth.  If we could just grasp and understand how important knowledge is (and obviously, the attendant obedience) from the Book, all of our lives could be considerably different.  But we don’t know and don’t want to know. 

 

It seems that we all are locked in our world of ignorance and confusion.  And we aren’t interested in changing anything.  We like the status quo of evil and wretchedness.  We think our tickets are punched and that we need nothing further (other than more money, idols, gods and so forth). 

 

If we could just wake up and appreciate how much we need truth and righteousness from the Scriptures, the apathy and don’t care would end.  We would get passionate and spend some money, time, effort and work to find out really what the Book does say.  Instead of worrying about and spending money on vain idolatries, we would start worrying about and spending money on truth and righteousness. 

 

 

Vendyl Jones, Revisited

 

The previously quoted Feb 2003 “Vendyl Jones Institutes Researcher” (p. 2) concluded that conditions in the state of Israel and the world situation had reached the point of decadence and to a dismal point of desperation.  Jones concluded that the religion of Esau had declared a war against the religion of Yakov and all other religions of the world.  Before this war ends, one side will annihilate the other side. 

 

Seemingly, Jones was writing from the perspective of a war between the Muslims (as Esau) against Judaism and the other worldly religions (to presumably include Christianity).  While his words are interesting, they can use a little clarification or commentary. 

 

Assuredly, there is a war of sorts going on with the major religions of the world.  The immediate manmade solution will arrive on stage when the present ecumenical movement or toleration focus achieves some success, and when the world’s religions come together under some configuration with the pope as the world’s pastor (as discussed earlier herein). 

 

Ultimately, YHWH YESHUA will return with His true religion--the real religion of Avraham, Yitzhak and Yisrael.  It will displace all of the world’s religions--including the present forms of Judaism (as meritorious as some forms of Judaism are--like the Ultra Orthodox).  For sure, Christendom has been weighed in the balances and found wanting.  Christianity is doomed! 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Appendix D--The Building Crisis

 

 

EVENTS AND THEIR DATES 

 

Firm Date                            Possible Date 

Hebrew      Christian        Hebrew        Christian          Event (Scriptures)

 

 

                                                                     1464 BCE         A terrible comet called Typhon was seen in Ethiopia and Egypt during the Israelite Exodus (per William F. Dankenbring, “Prophecy Flash,” Aug 1994, p. 3, quoting Pliny and Velikovsky). 

 

                                                                     690 BCE           The Assyrians concluded their conquest of the House of Yisrael in Samaria (II Kg 18:10).  This started a mark-down of 2,520 years of punishment on the House of Yisrael. 

 

                                                                     682 BCE           The Assyrians conquered the House of Yehudah, other than the area of Jerusalem (II Kg 18:13).  Did this event signal a countdown of 2,520 years of punishment on some part of the House of Yehudah? 

 

                     7 BCE                                                               The possible star of Yakov (the sign of The MESSIAH) was seen on earth.  It was a conjunction of Jupiter and Saturn in the constellation of Pisces, which happened three times in 7 BCE--May, Oct and Dec (Num 24:17; Matt 2:1-2--outlined in a former chapter). 

 

                                                                     5 BCE               Every five years, the Romans conducted a census.  It was extended to include the whole Roman Empire in 5 BCE (“Is Christianity a Fraud?  A Preliminary Assessment of the Conder Thesis,” p. 19).  This seems to be the year that YESHUA was born (Lu 2:1). 

 

                     March, 5 BCE                                                  A sign of a great hairy star and a smaller star in tangent was seen in the East for 2 1/2 months by Chinese and Korean astrologers (per Dr Mark Kitcher).  Was this the sign which the wise men of the East followed to reach Bethlehem and to pay homage to the new KING? 

 

                                               10/01/?         Mar 18, 5 BCE The probable date of YESHUA’s birth. 

 

                     Sep 11, 3 BCE                                                 Saturn went into a conjunction with the star Regulus in the constellation of Leo, the Lion. 

 

                     Feb 17, 2 BCE                                                 Saturn and Regulus were in conjunction once more. 

 

                                                                     Aviv, 2 BCE      Yosef, Miryam and YESHUA evidently returned from Egypt to Palestine.  After a possible brief transit to the Galilee, they likely went at once to the Temple in Jerusalem for Miryam to complete her purification (Lu 2:22-39).  Thereupon, both Shimon and Anna recognized YESHUA as The MESSIAH--in the context that Yisrael was then looking for the fulfillment of Daniel 9:24-26.  Afterwards, the family went to the Galilee. 

 

                     May 8, 2 BCE                                                   Saturn and Regulus were in conjunction a third time. 

 

                     66 CE                                                                A significant comet was seen from Jerusalem for a year (per Josephus, “Wars of the Jews,” VI, 3). 

 

09/05/?        70 CE                                                                Jerusalem and the Temple were destroyed by the Romans. 

 

                     Oct 27, 312 CE                                                Constantine’s victory occurred at the Battle of Milvian Bridge outside Rome--allegedly, under the sign of the Christian Cross.  This paved the way for Constantine to become emperor. 

 

                     313 CE                                                              Constantine’s Edict of Toleration granted “Christians and to all others full liberty of following that religion which each may choose.”  Constantine followed up with various acts to favor Christians in employment, taxation, military service, government service, etc all of which made Christianity the de facto religion of the Roman Empire. 

 

                     Mar 7, 321 CE                                                  Constantine’s famous Sunday edict was decreed to require all Roman citizens to rest on Sunday, the venerable day of the sun. 

 

                     325 CE                                                              Catholic Council of Nicea established Easter to replace the Scriptural Passover. 

 

                                                                     364 CE              Catholic Council of Laodicea decreed that Christians were to work on the Seventh day and not Judaize it with a Sabbath rest (per some authorities, this council act may have occurred in 336 CE). 

 

                                                                                                Roman Emperor Theodosius II (378-398 CE), Constantine’s second successor, declared the Christian religion to be the single state religion of the Roman Empire. 

 

                     395 CE                                                              The Roman Empire was formally divided into Eastern and Western legs. 

 

                     397 CE                                                              Catholic Council of Carthage gave official ratification of the acceptance of the 27 books of the New Testament.  

 

                     1537-1540                                                        Construction started on the walls and gates of Old Jerusalem (per “Encyclopaedia Judaica,” v. 9, p. 1426-1435).  This period might be the start point of an important mark off of 483 years to end in 2020-2023 CE. 

 

                                                                     1574                  Possible end of the ante-typical Great Tribulation in Britain (under Elizabeth I). 

 

                     1603                                                                  Divided House of Yisrael kingdom united under James I for the first time in perhaps 2,300 years. 

 

                     May 15, 1607  01/03/?                                    Establishment of Yosef Yisrael (Ephraim and Manasseh) in the new world at Jamestown (this was a Julian calendar date.  The actual Gregory date was about May 25th). 

 

                     Jun 10 1610      28/03/?                                 The Jamestown colony was abandoned.  Survivors were in the process of leaving when the new Governor De La Warr arrived with new settlers and supplies (this is a Julian date.  The actual Gregory date is Jun 20, 1610). 

 

                                                                     1611                  End of 1,290 years of abomination of desolation of Constantine’s enforcement of Sunday worship in 321 CE. 

 

                                                                     1611-1612        The publication and distribution of the KJV in 1611-1612 was the start of accountable sin by Yisrael.  Were the OT and NT ante-types of the two witnesses to last 390 or 400 years? 

 

                     1831                                                                  A countdown of 2,520 years of punishment on the House of Yisrael ends (from 690 BCE). 

 

                     1832                                                                  Andy Jackson was elected president of the US (to insure the land grant to the US from the Atlantic to the Pacific). 

 

                     Jun 18, 1837                                                    Eighteen-year old Victoria was crowned queen of Great Britain.  Viscount Melbourne was Prime Minister.  Britain entered her period of greatness under Victoria. 

 

                     1839                                                                  This ends 2,520 years of punishment upon the portion of Yehudah enslaved by the Assyrians. 

 

                                                                     1868-69            68th Jubilee since the Exodus. 

 

                     1869                                                                  Start of serious planning for Jewish Aliyah to Yisrael. 

 

 

1908 

 

                     Jun 30, 1908                                                    Great explosion at Tunguska, Russia.  Could it have been a comet, meteor or asteroid striking the earth? 

 

 

1914 

 

                     Jun 28, 1914                                                    Archduke Francis Ferdinand, heir apparent to the Austro-Hungarian throne, was assassinated at Sarajevo, Serbia by an alleged Serbian nationalist to touch off WWI. 

 

 

1917 

 

                                                                                                Aviv 1--a Sabbath year. 

 

                     Jul 6, 1917                                                       British officer T. E. Lawrence takes command of an Arab army to oust Turkey from Palestine. 

 

                                                                     1917-18            69th Jubilee since the Exodus. 

 

                     Nov 7, 1917                                                      Bolsheviks seize power in Russia. 

 

                     Nov 8, 1917                                                      Arthur James Balfour’s Declaration of British support for a Jewish homeland in Palestine. 

 

?/10/?          Dec 9, 1917                                                      British General Allenby and a Yehudahite army entered and took possession of Jerusalem. 

 

 

1933 

 

                     Mar 1933                                                          The evil Amalekite Franklin Delano Roosevelt became US president to forever alter the destiny of this nation and indeed the world.  Per the wisdom of FDR-- “Nothing just happens in politics.  If something happens you can be sure it was planned that way” (Feb 2003 “Radio Liberty” Newsletter, p. 1). 

 

 

1940 

 

                     1940                                                                  The birth of Constantine II, King of the Hellenes (666 in Hebrew). 

 

 

1961 

 

                     Jan 1961                                                          The Phoenician Edomite John F. Kennedy became the US president.  He adopted a role of Murder, Incorporated as US policy and commenced a future of tyranny and oppression against America’s own people. 

 

                                                                                                Under JFK, political correctness in racial attitudes became important to succeed in the American establishment, as the nation accepted the social ideas of racial amalgamation, feminism and homosexuality as its gods.  America became an unconstitutional dictatorship under FDR (in the context of the so-called great depression and WWII, per Mark Koernke in video, “America in Peril III”).  This paved the way for a complete plutocratic take-over of the US government with the election of Kennedy by the illegal stuffing of the ballot boxes in Chicago in 1960. 

 

                                                                                                With Kennedy, the famous hippie movement of the 1960s developed and eventually spread into the anti-war movement of the 1970s.  Young people knew things were wrong and that their parents and national leaders were a bunch of hypocrites.  The problem with the youngsters was that they were not schooled in YHWH’s Torah and system.  Hence, they had no concept of right and wrong, despite knowing that things were wrong in the nation.  Of course, they were unable to pass along proper values to their children, as they later came upon the scene. 

 

                                                                                                Despite the liberals’ push of evil upon the nation, the Truman and Eisenhower years saw a slowdown in moving forward under the FDR imposed dictatorship (but not really a roll back in terms of the evil created by Roosevelt).  When Kennedy came to power, he revived the motion and turned the guns of government upon politically incorrect people with no further impediments from 1961 forward (even under the Reagan years, although Reagan was not as aggressive on this motion as the others). 

 

                                                                                                Whereas the ruling plutocrats started electing American presidents, certainly in 1912, they perhaps did not literally own them outright until 1961.  Roosevelt was a part of the plutocratic rule so he fully supported it because he believed in it and was a part of it.  Truman and Eisenhower did not necessarily believe in it.  But neither of them chose to do anything to oppose the plutocrats. 

 

                                                                                                Both Kennedy and the later Nixon tried to break free of their servitude (after being elected by the plutocrats), but were destroyed by their secret rulers.  Reagan perhaps was not necessarily a willing subject but he did nothing to really oppose the fat cats or block their control of the US.  Carter was a blind follower of the plutocrats.  Johnson, both Bushes, and Clinton were/are owned outright by the plutocrats (mainly Amalekites). 

 

                                                                                                Starting with Kennedy, the US police powers began increasing dramatically (including substantially more spying, eavesdropping, intimidating, threatening, arresting, trying, murdering, etc of private American citizens for opposition to the new politically correct ideas [social gods] gaining status in Washington).  Soon, the US people lost all sense of honor, integrity, character, etc, as the federal police power began removing personal benefits, liberties and freedoms, formerly available under the US Bill of Rights. 

 

                                                                                                Oppressive central government powers have grown by leaps and bounds since Roosevelt and Kennedy and especially under Bill Clinton and George W. Bush, in preparation for the New World Order.  A strange delusion spread over the land for these last 40 years in which people became filled with apathy, indifference and a could care less attitude about their government and their own very futures (II Thess 2:11). 

 

                                                                                                As mesmerized zombies (by the controlled media), Americans continued to elect scoundrels as government leaders (who have been largely owned by the plutocrats).  As things grew worse and worse over time, many Americans actually supposed that things would get better (under more government and laws).  The rest closed their eyes and were only concerned with selfish pleasures, entertainment and living the so-called “good life.”  The few who dared to speak out were quickly threatened and intimidated and/or arrested and carted off to federal prisons (under some pretext). 

 

 

1966 

 

                                                                                                Aviv 1--a Sabbath year. 

 

                                                                     1966-67            70th Jubilee for the House of Yehudah since the Exodus. 

 

 

1967 

 

                                               01/01/?         1967                  Aviv 1--This should be year one in the Jubilee cycle. 

 

?/03/?          Jun 1967                                                          Six Day War.  Jerusalem was now in the hands of the Jews.  End of 2,520 years of punishment on Yehudah since Jerusalem fell to Babylon in c554 BCE (Joel 3:1).  Start of 40 years of test, trial or mark-down on the Jews and Jerusalem (Ezek 4:6). 

 

                     1967                                                                  A military junta in Greece took over the government and removed Constantine II, King of the Hellenes, who was then exiled. 

 

 

1973 

 

                                               01/01/?         1973                  Aviv 1--This should be year seven in the Jubilee cycle. 

 

                     Aug 8, 1973                                                     Knesset member Binyamin Halevi and Rav Louis Rabinowitz prayed on the Temple Mount in protest of a government ban against such prayers (“The Coming Last Days Temple,” p. 604).  This appears to be the last time in the 20th century that religious Jews prayed on the Mount.  This event could signal a mark off of 30 years that religious access was denied to the Jews and to the arrival of Yechezkel’s 30th year (by inclusive counting). 

 

                                               10/07/?         1973                  The Yom Kippur Arab-Israeli war took place.  This event probably was the last Jewish-Arab war and it completed the mark-off of 2,520 years from the final captivity and enslavement of Yehudah to the Babylonians (as outlined in a prior chapter).

 

 

1978 

 

                                               01/01/?                                    Aviv 1--This should be year twelve in the Jubilee cycle. 

 

                                                                                                Possibly something happened around 1973-1979, perhaps obscure and of a personal nature, to allow the start of a set off of 30 years for an Yechezkel witness if it is to materialize apart from his surviving writings.  The ante-type of this doesn’t tie to a Jubilee either, but it does tie to Darius’ 1st year which happened in an approximate 30th year of a Jubilee.  Maybe, this 30 years’ reference has at least four applications:  one--personally to Yechezkel’s past (like his birth, as Christian scholars believe); second--personally to any present Yechezkel witness; third--to the 30 years that construction was suspended on the Second Temple, as fulfilled in the 1970s when religious Jews were denied access to the Temple Mount and were prevented from starting the reconstruction of the Temple; and four--to the Jubilee cycle of Darius (c455 BCE), which allows the dating prophecies of Haggai, Zekharyah, Ezra, Nechemyah, etc to all be linked to the dating scheme of Yechezkel (Ezek 1:1-2). 

 

 

1979 

 

                     1979                                                                  Egypt became the first Arab state to recognize Israel and establish diplomatic relations. 

 

 

1986 

 

                     Apr 11, 1986                                                    Halley’s Comet came closest to Earth on its orbit. 

 

 

1987 

 

                                                                                                Aviv 1--a Sabbath year. 

 

                     1987                                                                  A significant planetary configuration occurred which was called the “harmonic convergence” by occultic watchers. 

 

 

1988 

 

                                                                     1988                  America’s leadership in the national security establishment came to computer knowledge that a catastrophic event (apparently called an escaton) is about to strike planet earth causing a massive loss of life (per Dr Rod Lewis in video on “Shackles of the New World Order”).  Dr Lewis calls 1988 and 1989 “pivotal years.”  This transition is like going from stability to chaos (which can be demonstrated in a pictogram--like those that started appearing in Britain in crop circles about this time). 

 

 

1989 

 

                                               01/01/?         1989                  The end of 6,000 years of misrule over planet earth by the Adam kind.  The earth now enters a 56 year transitional period to usher in the 1,000-year total rule of righteousness by YHWH YESHUA. 

 

                     Nov 9, 1989                                                      The Berlin Wall came down.  The next two years saw the rapid disintegration of the former Soviet Communist empire in Europe as Germany and most of Eastern Europe supposedly abandoned Communism for democratic capitalism.   By December 25, 1991, the Soviet Union itself was terminated. 

 

 

1993 

 

                     Jan 1993                                                          The US inaugurated the most vile, despicable, dishonest, crooked president in its history--Bill Clinton.  After arriving in Washington, Clinton chose exiled Haitian leader Aristide (a practitioner of Voodoo) as one of his spiritual advisors (May 1999 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 43-44). 

 

                     1993                                                                  The start of an unprecedented, unexpected and incomprehensible time of seven years of prosperity and blessings for the US sometime in 1993 despite the presidency of the most pathetic, evil and corrupt president in American history.  A similar block of prosperity started for Great Britain.  This block of prosperity would seem to parallel the seven years of prosperity upon Egypt during the righteous Yosef’s governorship.  It comes about 3724 years later or 76 Jubilees.  The conclusion of this grant of prosperity will evidently spell trouble for America and Britain. 

 

                     1993                                                                  The Israelis and Palestinians signed a seven-year agreement in Oslo, Norway to outline preliminary steps to lead to a planned, permanent, seven-year, peace pact in 2000. 

 

                     Sep 1993                                                          As noted in former comments, Israeli leader Shimon Peres signed a secret accord with the Pope promising Vatican hegemony over Jerusalem’s Old City by the year 2000 (Aug-Sep 1999 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 79). 

 

                     Sep 1993                                                          Fifteen nations of Europe came together to form a common government with a common parliament, judiciary and council of ministers.  The new European Union (EU) was to focus initially upon economic trade and defense.  It was modeled after the United States and the old Holy Roman Empire (Feb 2001 “Yavoh,” p. 3). 

 

 

1994 

 

                                               01/01/?                                    Aviv 1--a Sabbath year. 

 

                     1994                                                                  Jordan became the second Arab nation to recognize Israel and establish diplomatic relations. 

 

09/05/?        1994                                                                  Shoemaker Levy 9 comet struck Jupiter with  a large fireball--making a significant observation on earth. 

 

 

1995 

 

                     Mar 31, 1995                                                    After ordering in the US military to restore the exiled Aristide to the Haitian presidency, Clinton visited the island where 85% of the Black residents practice Voodoo.  According to the Haiti Observateur, Clinton participated in a Voodoo ceremony at a Voodoo worship site at Aristide’s home called the magic well.  While Clinton has been known as Slick since his Arkansas days, his life certainly became “charmed” after the Voodoo ceremonies.  He could get away with anything and everything and his ostensible Republican opposition cowered in fear of him.  Allegedly, he sold his soul and being to Satan in the Voodoo ceremony.  Whatever, Slick became seemingly invulnerable and a master at deception and evil thereafter (May 1999 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 43-44). 

 

 

1996 

 

                     Apr 11, 1996                                                    The paths of comets Hyakutake and Hale Bopp crossed each other to form an interesting conjunction. 

 

15/07/?        1996                                                                  The Hyakutake Comet was most visible in conjunction with an eclipse of the moon on the first high Sabbath of Sukkot. 

 

 

1997 

 

                     Jan 16, 1997                                                    Panama signed over to Red China the Panama Canal port facilities at Balboa and Cristobel. 

 

15/01/?        1997                                                                  The Hale Bopp comet was very visible during the time of a eclipse of the moon on the first high Sabbath of Unleavened Bread. 

 

                     Apr 11, 1997                                                    The paths of comets Hyakutake and Hale Bopp crossed each other the second time to form an interesting conjunction. 

 

                     1997                                                                  US State Department reports surfaced confirming that various ships had been unloading guns and weapons at certain Mexican ports to supply Communist revolutionaries for use in their continuing warfare against the Mexican government and to destabilize the border regions of the US (June 9, 1997, “Spotlight,” p. 1).  Soon, these Latin revolutionaries will be allied with Russia and China in a coming attack against the US. 

 

                     Dec 7, 1997                                                      Coming trouble for the US was forecasted by Vladimir Zhirinovsky (a leader of the National Unity Party of Russia and chief of a Russian delegation to Iraq) in a radio interview on Radio Baghdad on Dec 7, 1997.  He told the Iraqis that his delegation stood in solidarity with the Iraqi people in their tribulation with the US and that the time would come when the US would be punished for its crimes (Mar-Apr 1998 “Prophecy Club” newsletter, p. 4).  

 

02/10/?        Dec 1997                                                          All of the planets produced a unique planetary alignment like a string of pearls during the 2d to 9th days of Teveth.  The next alignment so close and so visible reportedly doesn’t happen for a hundred years. 

 

 

1998 

 

                                                                     Jan 18, 1998    Matthew Drudge broke the story of Bill Clinton’s sodomite encounters with the probable Amalekite girl Monica Lewinsky.  This seemed like a deadly wound to his political future.  It was to last 390 days. 

 

01/01/?        Mar 28, 1998                                                    Aviv 1.  Year 32 in the Jubilee. 

 

                     Apr 1998                                                           A news report indicated that at least two Cray Supercomputers had been installed in the White House (Jun-Jul 1998 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 35).  No explanations were forthcoming, but the computers were likely installed there for Slick’s use in digging up and compiling dirt on his enemies.  Or alternatively, they were there in preparation for a declaration of a state of emergency and Big Brother’s seizure of power.  Perhaps they would provide a method for Clinton or a later president to compile a dossier on all political enemies who must be arrested if and when Big Brother declares martial law. 

 

                     1998                                                                  A defense report said that the US is unwittingly diminishing its future defense capabilities.  Within four or five years, the US will not have enough skilled people to man its warships, infantry brigades, or fighter planes (“New Beginning,” p. 13, of Jun 1998, quoting a 4-5-98 Defense News Editorial).  Highly trained pilots have been leaving the services in droves. 

 

?/02/?          1998                                                                  Several press stories confirmed that President Slick Clinton approved the transfer of advanced missile guidance systems information, super computers and nuclear technology to Communist China in prior years--evidently in exchange for campaign contributions.  Later, when Chinese missiles are falling upon American cities, some will remember why it is happening. 

 

?/02/?          1998                                                                  Under the leadership of Britain’s Prime Minister Tony Blair, the people of Northern Ireland approved a plan for eventual majority rule which the Phoenician Catholics wanted (despite the opposition of some of them that manifested itself in a bombing in August 1998).  This plan spells ultimate disaster for the Protestant Britons in Northern Ireland. 

 

                     May 1998                                                          Iran is believed to have full nuclear capability (Mar 1998 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 24).  A report by Steve Roden in the “Jerusalem Post” of Apr 18, 1998, went on record that Iran definitely had nuclear warheads.  In late May 1998, both India and Pakistan detonated nuclear bombs.  Since Pakistan has nuclear bombs, Iran and other nearby Muslim states have or will have them as well--very soon. 

 

                     Jul 9, 1998                                                       An Associated Press report noted that a former Soviet agent said that Russian intelligence is gathering information on US leaders for assassination squads in the event of war.  They also plan on blowing up power stations, telephone switching centers, dams, etc using small suitcase nuclear bombs now infiltrated into the US (Sep/Oct 1998 “Prophecy Club” newsletter, p. 6). 

 

                     Jul 13, 1998                                                     A news report mentioned the conclusion of Dan Goure, Deputy Director of Politico-Military Studies at the Centre for Strategic and International Studies in Washington.  He prepared a report on a coming US National Defense Train Wreck which went to the Vice Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff.  Goure said that “everyone knows the ship is sinking, but unlike the Titanic, they are not even ordering people into the lifeboats” (Oct-Nov 1998 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 45-46).  The Clinton administration consistently cut funding for military people and equipment causing a developing crisis in the present situation.  Couple those cuts with the turn to Blacks, women and queers, the US has no defenses. 

 

                     Aug 7, 1998                                                     Two US embassies in Africa were bombed with over 200 people killed.  This appears be the start of a new wave of Muslim terrorism.  News reports acknowledged that an Islamic international network of terrorists had been organized to coordinate and direct terrorism on a global scale.  The US will be the primary target of this effort. 

 

                     1998                                                                  News reports surfaced claiming that the US had been using biological agents against Iraq and Libya for a number of years now.  The US has produced a flesh-eating, disease-carrying fly known as the screw worm which acts quickly against livestock and then spreads to humans.  The fly was released ten years ago on Libya and more recently on Iraq (Jul-Aug 1998 “Jubilee,” p. 5). 

 

                     Aug 13, 1998                                                   Media stories noted the farmers’ plight over the mixed up weather in the summer of 1998.  A serious drought struck the Southwestern US (TX, OK, NM) all the while that floods were occurring in the North-central states (IL, IN, MI).  When some rains came later to Texas, they came in floods.  This strange phenomenon seems to be suggested in Amos 4:7 where YHWH causes it to rain in one city or area while He withholds rain in another city or area. 

 

                     Aug 13, 1998                                                   News reports also outlined the evidence for a grasshopper and insect problem particularly in the Southwestern US while the drought was in process there.  What a tragedy it is that there are no birds to help contain this bug problem.  Why are there no birds--because man has killed almost all of them off through his irresponsible use of deadly pesticides and herbicides.  The 1998 bug problem seems to be child’s play compared to what will likely be on the horizon for Yechezkel’s 31st-33d years. 

 

                     Aug 20, 1998                                                   The US launched a cruise missile attack upon Sudan and Afghanistan in alleged retaliation for two US embassy bombings earlier in Africa (or rather, maybe to divert attention from Slick’s problems over Monica Lewinsky).  US officials said the US could expect further Islamic terrorist attacks and further US retaliation.  Russia sided with the Moslems.  The Sudan attack was supposed to be upon a chemical plant.  As it turned out, it was a medicine factory making laxatives and other medical products.  This mistake hurt the US internationally. 

 

01/07/?        1998                                                                  The Jewish New Year started with Rosh Hashanah.  This one is 5759 which is spelled in Hebrew as “TASHNIT.”  Tashnit has a meaning of “in the days or time of Noah” (Dec 1998 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 85, from remarks on the Internet). 

 

                     Nov 3, 1998                                                      The American people had a chance to take a stand for righteousness, honor and integrity at the mid term elections.  Instead, they showed their support for Slick Clinton and his immorality, dishonor, deceit, lies, cheating, crookedness and treason.  This single expression of support for gross depravity probably is the last straw.  It surely means judgment day from YHWH is coming swiftly on this depraved nation and its evil people.  

 

                     Nov 9, 1998                                                      Red China is building lasers capable of destroying space satellites and already has beam weapons which can damage sensors on space based reconnaissance systems (Nov 9-14, 1998, “Washington Times”).  This capability can destroy the US space based spy program. 

 

                     Nov 23, 1998                                                   Chinese President Jiang Zeman met with Russian President Boris Yeltsin in Moscow and expanded ties and settled border disputes between the two countries.  They both signed a document called a “strategic partnership,” which effectively spelled out their future cooperation and alliance in the establishment of a “multi-polar world” to offset the Western alliance. 

 

                     Dec 21, 1998                                                   The “Washington Post” of Dec 21, 1998, had an article by William M. Arkin on “Bugged by Nukes, Nuked by Bugs” which quoted Deputy Secretary of Defense John Hamre who discussed the possible need for martial law as the year 1999 ended and turned over to 2000 in the context of the Y2K problem.  Thus, Washington has been planning on marital law. 

 

                     Dec 24, 1998                                                   Saddam Hussein told the world that the US and Britain were the “enemies of mankind.”  For certain, the stage has been set for the whole world to oppose and hate the Jewish state of Israel, the US and White British Commonwealth. 

 

                     Dec 29, 1998                                                   The “New York Times” of Dec 29, 1998, had a report by Judith Miller of continuing biological research on germ weapons with 60,000 scientists in Russia, despite a 1972 treaty supposedly limiting such work on arms agents.  They have developed a Marburg virus, a highly contagious germ that kills by attacking every organ and tissue in the body.  Work is also progressing on bio-regulators which are germs that take control of human functions like moods, heart rhythms and sleep patterns.  Their focus is additionally upon compounds which can sharply change a person’s behavior or emotions.  Now, it is clear why over 100 million people can die in the House of Yisrael in a year from disease and epidemics when WWIII strikes. 

 

 

1999

 

                     Jan 8, 1999                                                      News reports confirmed that the US and Britain had been using the UN inspection teams in Iraq for spying and subversion purposes (Jan 8, 2003, “Spokesman-Review,” p. A1).  This revelation will instill more hate in the Moslem world toward the US and Britain. 

 

                     Feb 2, 1999                                                      A large, bright, blue meteor was seen streaking across the US Western skies (Feb 3, 1999, “Spokesman Review”). 

 

                     Feb 12, 1999                                                    The deadly wound to Clinton’s political career was healed when the US Senate acquitted him in his trial.  This day ends the 390 day test upon the United States.  This day also marks another start of 390 days of grace for the US before the arrival of the time of Yakov’s Trouble. 

 

                     Feb 16, 1999                                                    A ring of fire eclipse of the moon occurred over Australia (Feb 17, 1999, “Spokesman-Review,” p. A5). 

 

                     Feb 22, 1999                                                    A rare conjunction occurred of the two brightest planets--Venus and Jupiter. 

 

                     Feb 23, 1999                                                    Venus and Jupiter were no longer in a precise conjunction.  They moved apart, but appeared attached to each other in a tandem arrangement--a very rare astronomical sign. 

 

                     Feb 23, 1999                                                    A Knight Ridder news report on “Space hazards” said that astronomers are discovering increasing potential killer asteroids which could strike earth, causing enormous damage and/or loss of life.  The report said 55 new ones were found in 1998 and large ones are expected to come near earth’s orbit on Feb 23, Mar 2, Mar 18, Mar 26, and Apr 1.  Scientists said that there are perhaps 2,000 of them out there and only 8% are now identified (Feb 23, 1998, “Spokesman-Review,” p. A2). 

 

                     Feb 25, 1999                                                    The US Centers for Disease Control  (CDC) released a video to all public health facilities called “Preparing for the Next Influenza Pandemic.”  The CDC believes that an epidemic will inevitably hit the US and kill 400,000 Americans.  The video tried to make the case for community leaders to vaccinate millions of Americans in a declared “state of national emergency” (Jun 1999 “Idaho Observer,” p. 19). 

 

                     Mar 7, 1999                                                      A quasi-conjunction (where the planets don’t quite touch each other) occurred with Mercury and Jupiter. 

 

                     Mar 11, 1999                                                    A “NY Times” report from Texas noted that a looming state wide drought was projected for the summer of 1999 which would be even more serious than the 1998 drought which devastated Texas crops (Mar 11, 1999, “Spokesman-Review,” p. A4).  By late June 1999, much of the US South was in a significant drought. 

 

                     Mar 11, 1999                                                    An Israeli news report said that German Ambassador Theodor Wallau delivered a formal letter to the Israeli Foreign Ministry reaffirming the position of the European Union’s support for the internationalization of Jerusalem (May-Jun 1999 “Prophecy Club” newsletter, p. 11). 

 

                     Mar 16, 1999                                                    An AP report said that members of the Senate had recognized biological terrorism as a great threat or a greater threat to the US than that posed by the USSR in past years.  They called upon the administration to stockpile anthrax and other vaccines to be made available to the public when needed.  The Pentagon is now inoculating 2.4 million active and reserve military with the anthrax vaccine (Mar 17, 1999, “Spokesman-Review,” p. A4).  A TV news report said that FEMA had ordered 25 million body bags as a contingency for a possible emergency.  

 

01/01/?        Mar 18, 1999                                                    Aviv 1. 

 

01/01/?        Mar 18, 1999                                                    A report from the UN said that the US owes that body $1.7 billion and if she does not pay at least $250 million by Dec, she was to lose her vote in the General Assembly (Mar 18, 1999, “Spokesman-Review”).  The point of this note is that the US is building herself into a confrontational stage with the UN over money--just as America will be likewise at odds with most other nations around the world with her continuing balance of payments deficits (which are growing to unprecedented new highs).  By the way, Congress did appropriate $1 billion in late 1999 to pay some of the arrears and at least temporarily satisfy the UN. 

 

07/01/?        Mar 24, 1999                                                    Clinton launched an air assault against Yugoslavia to allow the plutocrats to take over in the Balkans and for other purposes.  This war was discussed in some detail in prior chapters. 

 

12/01/?        Mar 29, 1999                                                    An Internet computer virus named Melissa was introduced by a computer saboteur.  It did not affect hardware (as is possible), but it was a nuisance virus which caused havoc in E mail.  Its presence and disruption powers also prove how fragile the government and commercial worlds have become.  Another Internet virus damaging hardware surfaced in June 1999 to further complicate matters.  A computer crisis can rapidly cause major problems to give Big Brother an excuse to declare martial law. 

 

13/01/?        Mar 30, 1999                                                    A news article noted that a Russian defector said that the Russian military is preparing for a first strike against the US and that Y2K might could be a trip wire for war (May-Jun 1999 “Prophecy Club” newsletter, p. 3). 

 

30/01/?        Apr 16, 1999                                                    Fed Chairman Alan Greenspan accused the US of efforts to erect trade protectionist barriers which could cause other countries to retaliate (Apr 17, 1999, “Spokesman-Review,” p. A12).  Trade wars and protectionism were alleged to have been the problem behind the great depression of the 1930s.  However, the early pre-20th century US economic power was built on protectionism (which is now out per the new thinking).  The present Babylonian commercial system is run by Amalekite bankers and rulers to a point on the premise of free trade (because it allows international bankers to take a profit on all global commercial transactions).  It also paves the way for a global dictatorship in the production of goods since it allows the plutocrats to diffuse production systems globally into different countries where one country is allowed to produce only one component of a product while another country produces another component.  These sub-assemblies, produced all over the world, can be later brought together in still some other country for final assembly.  This so-called specialization of production allows the plutocrats to exercise control over all countries since no single country has the production capability for a total product.  Each country is dependent upon other countries for her economic survival.  

 

03/02/?        Apr 19, 1999                                                    A unique conjunction and eclipse of a bright star with the moon occurred over the US. 

 

                     Apr 1999                                                           Russia resumed testing high altitude electromagnetic pulse (EMP) weapons which produce an effect similar to nuclear blasts in that they disrupt electronics from computers to cars.  The Pentagon says that the development may be a part of Moscow’s on-going anti-satellite weapons development program.  A recent Russian laser test against a satellite shocked US military officials because it showed how vulnerable US satellites are (Jun 28-Jul 4, 1999, “Washington Times,” p. 17). 

 

                     May 1999                                                          Starting in 1998 and continuing to May 1999, the US space program has faced a successive series of failures in attempts to place spy and communications satellites into orbit.  Some were destroyed and others ended up in incorrect orbits.  NASA commenced a program review to try to determine the why for the recent failures which have cost the US $3.5 billion.  Could this news story have a link to the previous “Washington Times” report on Russian efforts to neutralize US satellites?  Is it possible that recent Russian tests of EMP weapons could be involved? 

 

                     May 4, 1999                                                     A Palestinian state was scheduled to be declared in 1999 with Jerusalem as its capital?  At a rally in Dec 1997 in Nablus, Palestinian leader Yasser Arafat stated that “The Palestinian state is being built daily, and we have decided to proclaim it in May 1999, after the end of the transitional phase.  If anyone doesn’t like it, let him drink the Gaza sea and Dead Sea” (Mar/Apr 1998 “Believer’s Advocate,” p. 15).  This declaration was supposed to happen on May 4th.  But with Israeli elections on May 17th, the Palestinians decided that they would wait until after the elections (actually, they may have decided to wait until sometime later).  The European Union had issued a mandate for Israel to recognize such an independent Palestinian state by May 4, 2000, or face the consequences (May 1999 “Prophetic Observer,” p. 4).  This date also passed. 

 

                     May 11, 1999                                                   Usual solar winds decreased by some 98% on the sun for some reason for one day.  Is this a warning that the sun will have more serious troubles later?  Clearly, the sun is preparing to nova! 

 

13/03/?        May 28, 1999                                                   The Pentagon placed an order for 9,000 Purple Hearts with a Houston firm (May 29, 1999, “Spokesman-Review,” p. A13).  This report confirmed that Slick Clinton planned to continue to use the US military extensively around the world in aggressive armed conflicts. 

 

19/03/?        Jun 3, 1999                                                      For the first time in history, the fifteen countries of the European Union agreed to make Europe a military power with independent command, control and troops-- “Independent, that is, of the United States” (per Fareed Zakaria in an article on “Victory, But at a Price,” in the Jun 14, 1999, “Newsweek,” p. 29).  This motion is clearly in the cards for the age end and particularly when Britain is out of this union.  Surely, the Balkans conflict has played some role in this motion.  It certainly is a giant step forward to the dissolvement of NATO. 

 

25/04/?        Jul 8, 1999                                                       A meteor exploded over New Zealand causing a tremendous sign with a bright blue light. 

 

25/04/?        Jul 8, 1999                                                       A discussion on the Art Bell Coast to Coast AM Radio Talk Show discussed the strange phenomenon of crop circles, especially in England, by two supposed experts who have studied them for years.  The 1999 season has proved to be the most spectacular to date in terms of size (some were over 1,000 feet long) and unique designs--many seem to be symbols found in Jewish Kabbalah sources.  A recent one was of a Menorah with a tri-part base instead of the usual circular stand.  While some of the reported crop circles may be man-made, others apparently are not and particularly where the strands of grain are bent forward into an almost 90% angle; yet not be creased, cracked or damaged.  The grain strand continues to grow with some abnormalities in its bent, warped, swirled condition.  If the strands are young, they produce no fruit.  But if almost grown, the fruit heads receive a new source of energy to make them really grow full and large.  Many feel that the displays represent messages of some sort.  They could involve psychic powers which are inter-acting with the atmospheric heavens in some manner to produce energy which is directed in a ball of fire to strike and/or change the crops of grain in some manner.  If so, could they be demonic involving telepathy powers of fallen angels? 

 

27/04/?        Jul 10, 1999                                                     The Art Bell radio program had a guest on talking about UFOs.  He indicated that 1999 was proving to be most extraordinary to date in terms of number and uniqueness of UFO sightings.  They seem to be coming in from all over the world and especially from the US in volume.  Like the crop circles, could the UFO phenomenon involve the powers of fallen angels? 

 

30/04/?        Jul 13, 1999                                                     Defense analysts told Congress that the Iranians now have an intercontinental missile capable of hitting the US which was apparently subsidized by US taxpayers (Jul 19-25, 1999, “Washington Times,” p. 20).  Couple this event with the reality that Iran also has nuclear, biological and chemical weapons and America is in trouble!  Actually, the Iranians received help from the Russian Space Agency which received some $778 million in US funding from the Clinton administration.  When Iranian missiles are striking US cities, will Americans understand why? 

 

12/05/?        Jul 25, 1999                                                     Woodstock 99 ended in NY with some 250,000 young Americans in attendance for a weekend orgy of free and/or perverted sex (interracial, homosexual and other forms of sodomy), rape, drugs, alcohol, New Age theology, Witchcraft, Satanism, vulgarity, violence, hate, profanity, nudity and hard rock music.  With its closure, the fans went wild to riot, burn, loot and destroy as much property as possible--just before departing.  Truly, Woodstock 99 illustrated the contemporary American culture. 

 

13/05/?        Jul 26, 1999                                                     CBS had a news report that some half of the US Air Force Reserve and Air National Guard pilots are resigning instead of taking the mandatory anthrax shots now being given to all US military people--active and reserve.  Many of these reserve pilots are commercial pilots and they are fearful that the shots can seriously affect their mental and physical conditions so much so as to ground them or cause dangerous flying conditions. 

 

16/05/?        Jul 29, 1999                                                     A news report said that Clinton would build a special underground bunker at the White House in preparation for Y2K.  Later news reports dropped the word bunker and said that Clinton was building a underground command and control center at the White House.  Soon, the controlled media completely dropped the story and said no more about it. 

 

                     Aug 1999                                                          Unprecedented, giant, solar flares have been reported on the sun (discussed on the Art Bell Coast to Coast AM radio talk show of Aug 4, 1999). 

 

                     Aug 1999                                                          China has been flexing her muscles, making threats and obviously preparing to take over Taiwan.  In terms of US policy, Clinton clearly shifted from Taipei to Beijing (“The Washington Times,” p. 22, Aug 2-8, 1999).  Otherwise, China warned her Asian neighbors to not interfere in China’s dealings with Taiwan, hinting vaguely at retaliation if they do so (“The Washington Times,” p. 24, Aug 2-8, 1999).  A news report on Aug 4, 1999, said that China had issued a similar warning to the US. 

 

                     Aug 1999                                                          Rep Floyd Spence, Chairman of the House Armed Services Committee, spoke at the Circle of Friends for American Veterans and said that the nation is being lulled into a false sense of security akin to the period right before Pearl Harbor.  He added that “It’s not a matter of if we’re going to have a war.  It’s where and when” (“US News & World Report,” Aug 9, 1999, p. 8). 

 

                     Aug 9, 1999                                                     According to US House researcher Yossef Bodansky, Muslim terrorist Osama bin Laden is reported to possess 20 nuclear bombs and chemical and biological weapons which he is preparing to launch against the US (“World Tribune,” Aug 9, 1999, quoted in Sep-Oct 1999 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 40). 

 

29/05/?        Aug 11, 1999                                                   Total eclipse of the sun.  This solar eclipse was the last one which will be seen in Europe for the next 79 years so it was very significant and especially for the British Isles. 

 

                     Aug 1999                                                          A Congressional Commission on Military Training and Gender Related Issues compiled a 2,700 page report for the House and Senate Armed Services Committees.  It found that US military recruits were lazy, selfish, undisciplined, lacking morals, challenging every order, decision or rule, having no respect for authority, anti-team in attitude and physically out of shape at the military’s “coed” boot camps.  Per orders from Clinton in 1994, the Armed Services began sexually integrated training with a goal of using both men and women in combat units (already navy warships have both sexes on board and pregnancies have exploded upward).  The recruits themselves blamed the problems on the nation’s declining values and loss of patriotism (Aug 16-22, 1999, “Washington Times,” p. 14). 

 

                     Aug 1999                                                          A Congressional study of coed, military, recruit training found that a majority of military trainers see adultery and fraternization as a significant threat to operational readiness.  Specifically, it is wrecking havoc, harm and unit cohesion, soldier morale and military readiness (Aug 23-29, 1999, “Washington Times,” p. 1).  Despite all of the shortfalls, the sexually integrated training will continue. 

 

                     Aug 13, 1999                                                   The Pentagon announced a new program to require all 1.36 million service personnel to undergo anti-harassment training as a part of new guidelines on homosexuality in the US military (Aug 23-29, 1999, “Washington Times,” p. 23).  The military now follows Clinton’s directive of allowing homosexuals to serve if they keep their homosexuality a private matter. 

 

                     Aug 1999                                                          On retiring from the US Army, Lt. Col. Ralph Zimmerman wrote a farewell note to his Commanding General at Fort Carson, CO.  He said that he had doubts about the constantly changing culture in the army which is becoming more concerned with producing a superficial image of accomplishment, guided by false caring vs. tackling readiness issues with up front leadership and firm solutions.  He added that the army has become a social experiment geared toward diversity (Aug 23-29, 1999, “Washington Times,” p. 15). 

 

05/06/?        Aug 16, 1999                                                   An article on “A declining dollar could mean trouble” in the Aug 16-23, 1999, USNWR (p. 24) said that trouble can come if the presently declining dollar causes foreigners to no longer accept financial paper for real goods and services.  Americans will have to dramatically reduce their consumption of imports or ship more American goods overseas.  Clearly, a dramatic shift in the US economy is on the horizon.  This coming trade crisis has been described in comments heretofore.  It will be one of the prime reasons for the destruction of the US. 

 

07/06/?        Aug 18, 1999                                                   Astronomers have discovered and are tracking the light of a strange object far away in the Northern skies.  During the solar eclipse of a few days earlier, the same or another strange object was seen and photographed in the heavens when the sun was darkened.  A scientist named Richard Hoagland believes the two objects are different.  He says that the first one might be the remains or remnant of comet Lee while the other might be from comet Inky which earth passes through twice a year (in Jun-Jul and early Nov).  Finally, a scientist named Charlie Pylar in North Carolina has discovered one of the same or another object in space moving toward earth by studying ultra low frequency radio sound waves as the earth acts as an antenna to pick up these waves.  All these phenomena were discussed on the Art Bell Coast to Coast AM radio talk show program. 

 

29/05/?        Aug 1999                                                          The summer of 1999 saw a significant drought and heat wave across the Northeastern and Middle Atlantic areas of the US (Washington, DC seemed to be right in the epicenter of the drought).  Climatologists and meteorologists said that this one to date was already one of the worst and most severe in American history.  The heat caused hundreds of deaths.  Will Americans be able to pause and ask if droughts like this one have any connection to the HAARP project in Alaska where US scientists are bombarding the heavens with huge doses of electromagnetic energy to see what will happen?  When a drought causing famine covers the US, will scientists at last begin to understand what can happen when they bombard the earth’s atmosphere and ozone layer with electromagnetic energy?  Can such “brilliant” scientists put two and two together and understand that they and their proud intellects are the problem? 

 

                     Aug 1999                                                          The headlines of the Aug 30-Sep 5, 1999, “Washington Times” (p. 1) said “White House sets plan for frequent U.S. interventions.”  The articles to follow by Rowan Scarborough noted the present so-called trouble spots in Asia (North Korea, Taiwan, Kashmir, etc) and reported the presence of a White House drafted, global strategy plan calling for US military intervention in a variety of trouble spots around the world in the 21st century.  Clinton has had plans for the next several years which can lead the US into a nuclear WWIII. 

 

20/06/?        Aug 30, 1999                                                   The US West (particularly the Southwest) was plagued for the last couple of weeks with bad wild fires which sometimes burned out of control for days.  The situation was so bad that smoke, flames, fumes and so forth were quite prevalent over the Southwest and especially in areas to the East of the fires.  This air pollution was so thick in some areas that the waning full moon appeared to be blood red (discussed on the Art Bell Coast to Coast AM program of Aug 30, 1999). 

 

                     Sep 1999                                                          In Sep 1999, the US Commission on National Security/21st Century released its New World Coming Report.  In noting possible terrorist attacks on US cities, this report said:  “Notable among these new threats is the prospect of an attack on U.S. cities by independent or state-supported terrorists using weapons of mass destruction... the future is contingent.  Human history does not just happen; it is made” (Feb 2003 “Radio Liberty” Newsletter, p. 6).

 

                     Sep 1999                                                          A prominent Muslim leader in Pakistan has called for Moslems worldwide to commit violence against Americans because of America’s actions against Muslim countries (Sep 6, 1999, “Spotlight,” p. 2).  Mufti Nizam-ud-din Shamzai told Reuters that under Islamic law, the shedding of American blood is legal. 

 

                     Sep 1999                                                          The IMF says that the US is a threat to stability with its sky-high stock market and growing debts internationally (Sep 13-19, 1999, “Washington Times,” p. 19). 

 

                     Sep 9, 1999                                                      The CIA said that missile threats to the US are growing as Russia and China continue strategic weapons efforts and North Korea, Iran and Iraq seek long range systems capable of reaching America (“The Washington Times,” Sep 13-19, 1999, p. 3).  The CIA went on to add that the US will face a ICBM threat from one of these powers in the next fifteen years. 

 

01/07/?        Sep 11, 1999                                                   In the Jewish calendar, this is the start of the Jewish year of 5760.  It is supposed to be a year of great mystery and a year of amazing prophetic fulfillment.  Its alphabetic characters can also mean a fateful year of transition (Sep-Oct 1999 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 21).  It is also supposed to be a year in which natural disasters, man-made catastrophes and international conflicts can occur around the world (Jan-Mar 2000 “Petah Tikvah,” p. 52).  Finally, some say it is a year of a new beginning (Mar-Apr 2001 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 14). 

 

                     Oct 1999                                                           The US Army and Navy desertion rates are increasing at a time when the services cannot bring in enough new recruits (Oct 4-10, 1999, “Washington Times,” p. 15). 

 

                     Oct 1999                                                           A US defense report said that China is building up its missile forces in preparation for possible attacks on Taiwan and the US if she should try to come to Taiwan’s aid (Oct 25-31, 1999, “Washington Times,” p. 14).  The Chinese are making preparations to use missiles against US aircraft carriers and US bases in Japan. 

 

                     Oct 1999                                                           A news report from London noted the essence of a number of recent newspaper reports and studies made by senior Chinese military people on how to defeat the West in any coming war (Oct 25-31, 1999, “Washington Times,” p. 24).  They advocate an abandonment of conventional military tactics and instead a dirty war with a concentration upon terrorism, biochemical warfare, environmental damage, and computer viruses and attacks upon the West’s financial institutions (which will be a major blow to the ruling, Amalekite bankers).  

 

                     Oct 1999                                                           Astronomers have found an object in space beyond Pluto which could be a planet (number 10) or a burnt out star which could have been a sister star to our sun.  It is 3 trillion miles away and may be the reason why that there is a warp in the path of comets in our solar system.  (Oct 12, 1999, “Spokesman Review”). 

 

                     Oct 28, 1999                                                     The Arab country of Mauritania became the third Arab state to recognize the state of Israel and establish diplomatic relations (Jan-Mar 2000 “Petah Tikvah,” p. 41).  

 

                     Nov 11, 1999                                                   A Chinese military newspaper reports that China is now preparing to carry out high technology warfare over the Internet and may develop a fourth branch of the armed services devoted to information warfare (Nov 22-28, 1999, “Washington Times,” p. 22).  This cyberspace warfare will target finance, commerce, communications, telecommunications and military affairs.  The focus will address both attacking measures as well as countermeasures to include information-paralyzing software, information blocking software, and information deceptive software.  In May 1999, the FBI sent out a memorandum warning of Chinese origin computer hackers attacking US systems.  Net warfare will be integrated into other Chinese combat operations in the event of war.  Clinton’s sale of super computers to China in 1996 (for alleged campaign contributions) has made this new technology possible. 

 

08/09/?        Nov 15, 1999                                                   The planet Mercury transited the earth and was visible from Australia to North America (from 9:15 to 10:07 PM GMT).  The shortest interval between Mercury transits is seven years.  So this was not a common astronomical phenomenon. 

 

10/09/?        Nov 17, 1999                                                   The earth passed through the Leonid meteor belt which was closest to earth again and perhaps as or much more significant than it was in 1966 or in 1833 (which excited the Second Advent movement so much).  On the Eastern US coast, 1,700 shooting stars an hour were seen.  Earth seems to pass through or near this belt annually.  But it is the heaviest and most significant in a cycle every 33 years.  According to Dr Rod Lewis, this belt was caused by a former comet named Temple-Tuttle (video on “Shackles of the New World Order”). 

 

                     Nov 1999                                                          Astronomers have found an object which seems to be an extrasolar planet some 150 light years away.  This latest find is the first whose orbit crosses its sun’s face as seen from earth (allowing it to be thus seen and evaluated).  There have been 29 such extrasolar planets discovered so far (Nov 22, 1999 “US News & World Report,” p. 12). 

 

21/09/?        Nov 29, 1999                                                   A Catholic-Protestant coalition government took over in Northern Ireland.  There will be two prime ministers--one Catholic and one Protestant.  As a part of this alleged peace treaty, the Irish Republican Army was supposed to lay down its arms in Northern Ireland.  The Catholics never did disarm.  Hence, the Catholics are still armed.  With the withdrawal of British forces, it is now only a question of time before the Catholics take over complete control of the government.  The future fate of the Protestants appears in doubt.  The Phoenician Edomites will soon crush the likely Israelite tribe of Naftali. 

 

                     Nov 1999                                                          US intelligence sources are reportedly worried that the Arab terrorist Osama bin Laden may be planning a major terrorist attack upon US soil (Nov 1999 “Internet Vortex,” p. 7).  Yossef Bodansky, staff director of the Congressional Task Force on Terrorism and Unconventional Warfare, says that there are now rumblings in the Muslim community and that it is like a volcano just before the explosion.  US authorities believe that Bin Laden has chemical weapons.  There is concern that he may strike a target in New York (like the Federal Reserve or the New York Stock Exchange). 

 

                     Nov 1999                                                          US Admiral Dennis Blair, Commander in Chief of the Pacific Command, said in an interview that China has deployed some 500 to 600 missiles opposite Taiwan.  Another news report also indicated that the Chinese deployment seems to include 100 of her newest, short range, CSS 7  missiles capable of carrying nuclear warheads (Nov 29-Dec 5, 1999, “Washington Times,” p. 1, 22). 

 

                     Nov 1999                                                          China has developed and is deploying a revolutionary new anti-aircraft, early-warning, radar, defense system which will detect US stealth airplanes (Dec 6, 1999, “Newsweek,” p. 4).  US Defense officials are concerned because US forces would be very vulnerable if they are called upon to defend Taiwan.  China earlier threatened to shoot down American airplanes and sink US aircraft carriers if the US tries to aid Taiwan.  

 

                     Dec 14,1999                                                    The US formally turned the Panama Canal over to the Panamanian government which, in turn, effectively turned it and the former port facilities and US military installations in Panama over to Red China--per agreements Panama has with China.  Apparently, Red China will operate the canal though it theoretically is under Panamanian control. 

 

                     Dec 20, 1999                                                   Red China took possession of the former Portuguese colony of Macao as Portugal surrendered it per a negotiated agreement (Dec 27-Jan 2, 2000, “Washington Times,” p. 24). 

 

15/10/?        Dec 22, 1999                                                   This full moon was one of the largest and brightest in over 100 years (per Bob Lutz, weatherman, on the “KGA Morning News Express”).  It was significant because of not only being the full moon, but also because the full moon coincided with the moon’s perigee for the month. 

 

                     Late Dec 1999                                                 Britain’s Defense Minister told a US Congressional Committee that the European Union and France were progressively breaking up NATO and with the acquiescence of Britain’s Labor Party government (Feb 14, 2000, “Spotlight,” p. 10). 

 

                     1999                                                                  In a strange foreign policy shift, the Clinton administration silently and secretly named Taiwan a hostile security threat to the US, as revealed in an internal Justice Department memo made public in mid 2000 (Jul 2000 “Philadelphia Trumpet,” p. 14).  The memo named 13 nations which were designated to be priorities for US intelligence and counterintelligence efforts (including Russia, Red China, North Korea, Cuba, Yugoslavia, Vietnam, Serbia controlled Bosnia, Syria, Iraq, Iran, Libya and Sudan). 

 

                     Dec 31, 1999                                                   In preparation for Y2K, many leaders in the US and other countries went into underground bankers which had been set up as command centers.  Was this an ante-typical fulfillment of Revelation 6:15-16? 

 

                     Dec 31, 1999                                                   The US government and the controlled media began a campaign in late December to “warn” or “hype up” the gullible public with threats of terrorist activities against the US property overseas or against Americans and American property in the US.  An Algerian man was arrested with bomb making material coming into the US from Canada.  The notorious Osama bin Laden was alleged to be the man behind the threat (although there is some question about his status, as discussed in a prior chapter.  He has been a paid CIA agent and his construction company continues to get major US construction contracts in the Middle East, for whatever reason).  The Jan 1, 2000, “Newsweek” (p. 11), which came out in late December, had a full story on the threat and a picture of Osama to further excite the people.  

 

                     Dec 31, 1999                                                   Boris Yeltsin resigned as President of Russia.  He was succeeded temporarily by Prime Minister Vladimir Putin.  Russian presidential elections were held on March 26, 2000.  On this change, Colonel Stanislav Lunev wrote “If the West throws its support behind Putin for the coming presidential elections and he wins, the next Russian president will be a person like Yeltsin, without principle, who has strong anti-American sentiments and is preparing Russia for war against the U.S. and its allies” (Jan 2000 “Internet Vortex,” p. 24). 

 

 

2000 

 

                     Jan 2000                                                          Scientists at NASA and the Space Telescope Science Institute of Baltimore, MD now project that the current period of sun spot activity (including solar winds and flares) will peak in 2000 (Jul 1999 “Prophetic Observer,” p. 2).  It could disrupt communications, weather and other activities on earth.  Satellites could be particularly vulnerable.  If the outbreak is bad, what will it do to earth’s magnetic field?  At least, one communications satellite and the total US intelligence satellite system went down on Jan 1, 2000 (requiring three or more days to be corrected), either from the sunspots or from Y2K which otherwise largely fizzled out. 

 

                     2000                                                                  Plans were drafted in Oct 1999 to increase the power of the EU president to allow his office to run an expanded group of commissioners as if it was a sovereign government (Jan/Feb 2000 “Prophecy Club” newsletter, p. 5). 

 

                     Jan 14, 2000                                                    The Dow Jones stock market industrial average topped out at 11,722.98. 

 

15/11/?        Jan 21, 2000                                                    Total (blood red) eclipse of the moon across North America. 

 

18/11/?        Jan 24, 2000                                                    The Jan 24, 2000, “Spotlight” (p. 1) had a story by Mike Blair on “Clinton Orders Huge ‘Anti-Iraq’ Buildup” which noted that the US has started sending a large number of new military forces and units to Kuwait to possibly prepare for another Iraq war--per intelligence sources.  A brigade size headquarters has been established there to provide command and control. 

 

                     Feb 1, 2000                                                      The Pentagon published a study which said that China is preparing for war.  The study involved 600 translations of internal Chinese writings by 200 authors (Feb 7-13, 2000, “Washington Times,” p. 22).  It reveals China’s strategy to defeat a superior foe, using both military and nonmilitary deception and covert action.  The Chinese distrust the US and blame America for intentionally bombing their embassy in Belgrade in the US assault upon Serbia in 1999.  Former Chinese leader Deng Xiaoping set the current strategy for dealing with their US enemy-- “bide our time and build up our capabilities.”  

 

                     Feb 2, 2000                                                      CIA Director George Tenet told Congress that growing tensions between China and Taiwan could lead to a regional flare-up in the coming months (Feb 7-13, 2000, “Washington Times,” p. 17). 

 

                     Feb 7, 2000                                                      The Mar-Apr 2000 “Philadelphia Trumpet” (p. 4) gives the latest data on reported US debt.  Despite Clinton’s talk about budget surpluses, the federal debt went up $130 billion in 1999 and another $37 billion already in FY 2000. 

 

                     Feb 7, 2000                                                      The Feb 7, 2000, “Spotlight” (p. 3) had a story by Mike Blair on “Experts Fear Chicom Military Attack on Taiwan” which indicated that many China watchers have concluded that the Red Chinese are making preparations for a military attack on Taiwan--probably in 2001-2007 at serious signs of US weakness.  Taiwan will either be blackmailed into capitulating to Beijing or she will be militarily crushed.  China has had an enormous increase in her military by buying attack submarines, aircraft carriers, destroyers, etc from Russia and by buying or stealing nuclear, missile and computer technology from the US (much of it from campaign contributions to Clinton).  If the military option is pursued, the Chinese do not expect any trouble from the US paper tiger. 

 

                     Feb 15, 2000                                                    In a presidential debate, Republican candidate John McCain said that if he was elected, he would arm and train forces to overthrow certain “rogue governments” in the Middle East.  He added that “Until those governments are overthrown, they will pose a threat to U.S. national security because protecting Israel is in our national strategic interest” (“Spotlight,” Mar 6, 2000, p. 1).  While all candidates have not spoken similar words, that view is certainly held by them because of the power of the Amalekite bankers/masters over the US.  Now that McCain has formally laid it on the table, a US president may decide to use this tactic if he has any problems in his administration and/or any threats to his presidency.  Surely, something will provoke Big Brother to make more attacks and assaults in the Middle East if he has a chance.  The US president could take off on McCain’s words and use them as an excuse to start more conflicts there which will finally see the destruction and end of the US.  Per US authorities, the following Muslim states are all considered to be rogue governments--Iraq, Iran, Libya, Syria, Afghanistan, the Sudan and even Lebanon. 

 

                     Feb 21, 2000                                                    “Spotlight” of Feb 21, 2000 had a story by Mike Blair on “Chinese Planning ‘Dirty War’ with United States” (p. 5) which said that Chinese leaders have indicated that they will use biochemical terror weapons against the US to damage the environment.  They say that they are prepared to do whatever is necessary to bring down the US economy. 

 

01/01/?                                                        Mar 7, 2000      This marks the end of a 390 day period of grace (by inclusive counting) following the Slick Clinton acquittal in the Senate on Feb 12, 1999.  This date also commences another mark off of 390 days. 

 

01/01/?                                                        Mar 7, 2000      Aviv 1--an intercalcary year. 

 

                     Mar 10, 2000  04/01/?                                    The US stock markets hit an all time high.  The NASDAQ topped out at 5048 and the Dow Jones Industrial average was not far from its January high of almost 12,000 (actually at 11,722.98 points, as noted earlier). 

 

                     Mar 11, 2000                                                    The Chinese on Taiwan voted in a pro-independence president.  Red China has declared that she will not allow Taiwan to have independence.  This event spells absolute trouble down the road. 

 

                     Mar 20, 2000                                                    The Red Chinese are establishing a base of operations in the Bahama Islands, 60 miles off of the US East coast (Mar 20, 2000, “Spotlight,” p. 4). 

 

                     Mar 20, 2000                                                    Per the Chinese news agency, Red China has been developing a new class of pulse energy weapons which can take out ships and airplanes by destroying their electronic systems (Mar 20, 2000, “Spotlight,” p. 1).  As an aircraft carrier fleet comes under saturated attacks by satellite guided missiles, its entire combat effectiveness can be paralyzed by paralyzing its electronic equipment.  Then a comparatively backward naval vessel or aircraft will be able to attack the target as a conventional target and destroy it. 

 

                     Mar 20, 2000                                                    India, likewise, is spending huge sums of money to build up its armed forces (Mar 20, 2000, “Spotlight,” p. 19).  American military analysts are concerned because if India should ally with some of America’s opponents in a future conflict, she will be a power to reckon with. 

 

                     Mar 20, 2000                                                    Israeli Air Force pilots and US Navy flyers from the US carrier, the USS Theodore Roosevelt, took part in a joint air exercise in the Negev desert earlier this year.  In the exercise, the Israelis shot down 220 US Navy F-14s and F-18s while only losing 20 of their F-16s (Mar 20, 2000, “Spotlight,” p. 2).  The outcome was so stunning that US authorities and the controlled US media kept the story secret in American papers.  The “Jerusalem Post” in Israel reported it. 

 

14/01/?        Mar 20, 2000                                                    A fireball (a meteor or meteorite) streaked across the Southwestern US skies on Passover night. 

 

                     Mar 2000                                                          The US Army’s Rock Island Arsenal is making experiments with non toxic bullets for use in the US military (instead of lead bullets, as has been the practice).  In a “Spotlight” story on “China Angling to be Principal U.S. Ammo Provider” in the Apr 3, 2000, issue (p. 1, 3), Mike Blair reported that the US government is now considering buying tungsten, small arms ammunition from Communist China for use within the US military.  A second “Spotlight” article by Blair on “China Making Bullets on U.S. Soil” (p. 3) noted that already the Chinese are connected with a plant in Adelanto, CA which is making tungsten shells for US customers.  There is also talk of buying some US tungsten shells from Israeli sources.  Israel would buy the tungsten from China and produce the shells for export to the US.  The point of these stories is that work is underway right now to terminate the US production of small arms ammunition and place it with Communist China.  In a future war, the US military will be dependent upon China for ammunition.  If China is involved in a conflict with the US, what will the US military then do for shells? 

 

                     Apr 14, 2000                         10/02/?              Possible start of the coming financial and economic collapse of Ephraim Yisrael.  The Dow dropped over 600 points on Apr 14, 2000.  But this fall was contained on Apr 17th--evidently, when the combined forces of the Fed and Treasury in their market control unit entered the market to stop its plunge.  But the NASDAQ stock market high was reached on March 10, 2000, and the Dow Jones high was reached in January 2000. 

 

                     Apr 18, 2000                                                    A recent TV report (on the 700 Club) said that the US Army’s helicopter fleet is in trouble.  A full 40% of Army helicopters are permanently grounded.  Many others are outdated or worn out.  Spare parts are in short supply and training for pilots is below requirements.  The Army says $100 billion is needed to correct the deficiencies (Apr 20, 2000, “Staff and Sword Ministry” newsletter, p. 27). 

 

                     May 2000                                                          China is now the number two nation in the world in gross national product--just behind the US (May 2000 “End Time News,” p. 2). 

 

                     May 2000                                                          The May-Jun 2000 “Prophecy Flash” (p. 22) had a news report from Hong Kong which quoted General Chi Haotian, Defense Minister of China.  He said that because of “changes in the world situation and the United States’ hegemonic strategy for creating monopolarity, war is inevitable.  We cannot avoid it.  The issue is that the Chinese armed forces must control the initiative in the war.  We must be prepared to fight for one year, two years, three years, or even longer.” 

 

                     May 3, 2000                                                     The “I Love You” Internet virus came out of Manila via the E-mail to adversely affect computers all over the world--destroying data in hard drives and ultimately causing $10 billion in damages (per news reports). 

 

                     May 3, 2000                                                     According to a Reuters report, some significant fractures of the continental shelf have been discovered off the coast of NC and VA (discussed on May 3, 2000, Coast to Coast program with Mike Siegal).  There is some speculation on what might happen if volcanoes erupted there.  Some believe volcanoes could cause a tidal wave along the coast (although this possibility was disputed by a caller on the program). 

 

                     May 5, 2000                                                     Planetary alignment of Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter and Saturn plus the moon in the constellations Aries/Taurus.  As noted earlier, some persons saw this alignment (with the sun, earth or some other seventh light) as a fulfillment of the seven lights in Revelation 1:12. 

 

                     May 9, 2000                                                     A news report in the May-Jun 2000 “Prophecy Flash” (p. 76) said that negotiations between Israel and the PLO are much further advanced than has been made public.  According to the article, Jerusalem will remain under Israeli jurisdiction, but with active PA participation in the municipal management of the city’s Arab population.  The PA parliament will be located in Abu Dis, with “security corridors” under PA authority allowing access to the holy sites.  Also, 80-90% of Judea, Samaria and Gaza will be given to the PA, and one possibility discussed by Barak and Arafat is that Israel rent back some of these lands to allow Jews to continue to live in established communities and the de facto Israeli rule (which means the US will pay the rent charges along with all or most all of  the other costs). 

 

                     May 9, 2000                                                     Because of the position of Mercury vis-à-vis the sun and the earth, the planet Mercury appeared as a very bright and unusual orb for two to three hours after darkness on May 9th.  

 

                     May 27-31, 2000                                             A conjunction of Jupiter and Saturn occurred in the constellation of Pisces, which could be the star of Yakov (Num 24:17; Matt 2:1-2). 

 

                     Jun 2000                                                          Los Alamos Laboratory reported that two computer hard drives were missing for six weeks which contained information on nuclear bombs and their triggering devices from around the world.  Several days later, they were mysteriously found behind a copier in a room which had been searched twice before.   Still later news reports said that the hard drives may have been missing for six months.  Did someone make a copy of the data on the drives?  Probably yes! 

 

                     Jun 2000                                                          Gen Eric Shineski, Chief of Staff of the US Army, reports that suicide is a problem in the Army--primarily with White males in the upper enlisted ranks (Jul 3, 2000, “Spotlight,” p. 2).  The 1999 suicide rate was 15.5 per 100,000 soldiers.  “Spotlight” asked if the military is demoralized and humiliated by the pro-feminists and color-blind change agents who are reorganizing life according to Karl Marx. 

 

                     Jun 19, 2000                                                    The Los Angeles Lakers beat the Indiana Pistons in a basketball game in LA.  After the game, the fans went wild to loot, destroy and damage cars, buildings and property in downtown LA.  This seems to be a common occurrence now after some US sporting events. 

 

                     Jul 2, 2000                                                       The comet Linear was seen in the heavens over North America (mentioned by Whitley Strieber on the Dreamland program on Jul 2, 2000).  It was visible for most of July and very significant around July 22-25 (per Captain Sky on Coast to Coast AM on July 6, 2000). 

 

15/05/?        Jul 16, 2000                                                     Full eclipse of the moon (with another blood red moon). 

 

                     Aug 4, 2000                                                     Something stirred up right-wing, religious Jews.  They tried to enter the Temple Mount to pray this past week (Aug 11, 2000, “Jerusalem Post,” p. 3). 

 

                     Aug 20, 2000                                                   News reports said that there has been some melting of the ice at the North Pole so that it is now an open stretch of blue water (discussed by Whitley Strieber on the Dreamland radio program, Aug 20, 2000). 

 

                                               ?/06/?                                       Some Jewish religious leaders began making plans and perhaps some preparations to build a synagogue on the Temple Mount. 

 

                     Sep 28, 2000  01/08/?                                   After riots intensified in Palestine between Israelis and Arabs, peace negotiations were held in Paris and Cairo with various parties.  The threat of a unilateral act by the PLO to declare independence may speed up peace negotiations (Arafat said the PLO would act on Sep 13th, but they delayed the date to mid Nov).  As the Arab rioting continued into October, some of the major powers called for a summit to discuss the conflict.  Thus, a final peace treaty must be addressed at some time in the future by the Israelis and the Arabs. 

 

                     Sep 30, 2000                                                   The Jewish new year of 5761 started.  In Hebrew, this one is named “in the days of transition” (Jan-Feb 2001 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 14). 

 

                                                                     Oct 2000           This past summer and fall have been the worst for wildfires in recent history.  Hundreds of fires have burned over 6 million acres of forests--primarily in the Western US.  The smoke from these fires did cover much of the US--so much so that light from the sun and moon was hid in some places, perhaps in an ante-type of Revelation 6:12. 

 

                     Oct 2000                                                           Russian defector Colonel Stanislav Lunev reports that the Chinese have 700,000 troops in the Sudan preparing to enter the civil war there on the side of the Khartoum based radical Islamic regime in its attempts to crush the Sudan People’s Liberation Army, a Christian nationalist group operating in the Southern Sudan (Oct 2000 “Internet Vortex,” p. 25-26).  Supposedly, the Chinese are in the Sudan to protect oil fields and facilities controlled by Chinese companies.  A related news report said that China has dispatched 1.2 million crack troops to the Panama Canal, supposedly to “protect it” (Jan-Feb 2001 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 38). 

 

                     Oct 6, 2000     09/08/?                                    In late Sep, the people of Yugoslavia held a national election.  The official government position was that no candidate won an absolute majority and a run off election would be scheduled on Oct 8th.  The opposition to Yugoslav President Slobodan Milosevic began protesting during early Oct.  On Oct 5th, riots broke out and the Parliament building was set on fire.  What was not covered in the controlled media was the role of the CIA and US money in fomenting this trouble in an effort to bring Milosevic down.  Under pressure from CIA money, plutocrats in the West and internal dissension, Milosevic caved in and the opposition under Vojislav Kostunica took over the Yugoslavian presidency. 

 

                     Oct 12, 2000   15/08/?                                    On this date, oil futures exploded upward to $37 a barrel (which is a ten year high).  A US Navy destroyer was bombed in Yemen and serious problems broke out in Palestine when the Arabs murdered some Jewish soldiers and Israel retaliated with helicopter gunship attacks. 

 

                     Oct 12, 2000   15/08/?                                    On schedule, the stock market nose-dived on this date.  The Dow Jones average fell 379 points.  The stock market highs were reached in early 2000.  In April, there was a significant drop.  But from May to Sep, there was some recovery. 

 

                                               15/08/?         Oct 12, 2000     Fanatical Muslims attacked the tomb of the patriarch Yosef in Shechem in early Oct (modern Nablus).  Over the next few days, they desecrated the tomb and converted it into a Moslem mosque (on or about Bul 15).  The modern descendants of Yosef in the US and Canada did nothing.  Is this the first signs of Yakov’s Trouble for the House of Yisrael? 

 

                     Oct 13, 2000   16/08/?                                    The next day, after the stock market fall, the markets rebounded slightly (evidently, because the US-Amalekite market control unit entered the market to try to re-inflate it).  But from there on forward, the bull market never really recovered or resumed its spiral upward.  Instead, it seemed to want to go down thereafter.  The stock markets had some good days (evidently when the Amalekite managed market control unit was at work); but would soon go down again to hover between 10-11,000 for weeks thereafter (before starting down later in 2001).  With the significance of this day in Yisrael’s history, one must wonder if, indeed, this date marked the first signs or ante-type of the seven years of Yakov’s Trouble for some part of Yisrael--which starts in earnest in Yechezkel’s 30th-33d years and probably ends by Sukkot of Yechezkel’s 37th-39th years. 

 

                     Oct 28, 2000                                                     Per news reports, anti-American violence broke out in Indonesia.  Local groups acted to coerce and force American people present in Indonesia to leave.  Muslim gangs visited hotels in one city and determined if Americans were present.  If so, they were told to leave immediately. 

 

                     Oct 31, 2000                                                     The Israelis have consistently held that only the US could act as a mediator or broker in attaining peace in the Middle East.  A BBC news report said that the Palestinians have now come out and called for peace talks to include the UN, EU and Russia and for a UN peace keeping force for the West Bank.  EU involvement in the Middle East would be profoundly significant. 

 

                     Nov 2000                                                          A Congressional report said that Russia and China have grown closer together recently in order to promote their joint goal of reducing US power and influence around the world (Nov 2000 “Internet Vortex,” p. 22). 

 

                     Nov 2000                                                          A news report based upon remarks of Border Patrol people in California suggests that that some Chinese soldiers are being deployed in Mexico near the US-Mexican border (Nov 20, 2000, “Spotlight,” p. 2).  Federal officials ordered the Border Patrol to keep the matter quiet. 

 

                     Nov 1, 2000                                                      Effective this date, the nation of Iraq will no longer sell oil for US dollars.  Henceforth, Iraqi oil sales will be made in European EUROs.  All Iraqi financial and currency accounts were converted to EUROs this date (per news reports).  The US dollar was down on the financial markets worldwide. 

 

                     Nov 6, 2000                                                      President Clinton signed into law a foreign aid bill of $14.9 billion for FY 2001 (to include $435 million to forgive the debts of certain Third World countries). 

 

                     Nov 9, 2000                                                      President Slick summoned Yasser Arafat and Ehud Barak to Washington for talks.  He had power to summon them because the US gives both governments enormous money each year.  Arafat obeyed and came this day. 

 

                     Nov 10, 2000                                                   Yasser Arafat went to New York and met with the UN Security Council and made a plea for its help to settle the crisis in the Middle East.  The PLO repeated its earlier plea for an international summit and meditorial force made up of the UN, EU, US and Russia and then went on to add China, Egypt and Jordan to the mix. 

 

                     Nov 15, 2000                                                   Yasser Arafat and the PLO have announced (during their statement on the matter) that they would declare a Palestinian state on November 15th if peace is not achieved earlier.  This date was qualified in early November when Arafat stated that the PLO retains the right to declare a Palestinian state whenever it wants to. 

 

                     Nov 17, 2000                                                   The earth once more passed through the Leonid meteor belt.  Just like last year, it was significant again (1,000 shooting stars were seen per hour).  As noted earlier, the heaviest presence of the Leonids can be seen for a couple of years or so. 

 

                     Nov 17, 2000                                                   US President Bill Clinton visited Vietnam.  First, he called upon Hanoi and next, he went to Ho Chi Min City (the former Saigon).  Supposedly, Clinton made his trip to promote US-Vietnam trade.  For sure, the draft dodger Clinton (during the US-Vietnam War) did receive a hero’s welcome from the Vietnamese.  Accordingly, Clinton paid homage to Ho Chi Min, who led Vietnam when it defeated the US in the Vietnam war of the 1960s and 1970s. 

 

                     Nov 20, 2000                                                   The European Union approved an EU military rapid reaction force of 100,000 soldiers plus supporting aircraft.  It will be a separate force from NATO.  This will likely be the start of an EU army (that will provide the muscle to a UN military power). 

 

                     Nov 21, 2000                                                   Democrat counties in Florida disallowed and did not count 1,500 votes from US military people on the basis that they were not postmarked (US military post offices do not always post mark mail--especially ships at sea).  Allegedly, this action was taken since most military people voted for Bush.  This event upset a lot of military people and moral plummeted. 

 

                     Nov 26, 2000                                                   A news report said that the sun has been producing enormous solar flares and storms (per Whitley Strieber, Nov 19, 2000, “Dreamland” program).  Could these storms be affecting radio transmissions on earth?  This writer’s AM reception has been terrible for the last several weeks. 

 

                     Dec 7, 2000    10/10/?                                    European Union leaders started a summit at Nice, France.  A new Treaty of Europe was negotiated by the EU (the Treaty of Nice) which will provide for more centralized EU power and complete European integration--European taxation, common army, single police force, European legal and court system etc (Aug 2000 “Philadelphia Trumpet,” p. 28).  All of this may not happen immediately.  Some may be deferred and happen later when the worldwide financial crisis strikes and Europe unifies under an interim leader before the Beast assumes power.  Could this event the beginning of the transfer of national powers of the European states to the larger EU?  Is this part of the overthrowing of kingdoms mentioned by Haggai (Hag 2:22)? 

 

                     Dec 7, 2000    10/10/?                                    On or about Dec 1, 2000, Egypt’s Chief Moslem cleric ruled that the economic importation of US or Israeli goods was a great sin (Dec 8, 2000, “Jerusalem Post,” p. 4).  The clerics called for an economic boycott of US and Israeli goods.  By late next week (around Dec 7th), the boycott had spread throughout the Muslim world (reported on a NPR news report on Dec 11, 2000).  Will this boycott lay the groundwork for a trade war between the US and the Muslim states?  Will it precipitate another Arab oil embargo?  Shortly thereafter, OPEC did approve a cut in oil production which could be significant. 

 

                     Dec 8, 2000                                                      The Russian Parliament voted to reinstate the former USSR national anthem. 

 

                     Dec 11, 2000                                                   A US commission, led by former Senator George Mitchell, arrived in Israel to investigate the Israeli-Palestinian conflict. 

 

                     Dec 19, 2000                                                   Europe announced that it will build a new and larger Airbus to compete with the Boeing 747 aircraft.  News reports suggested that this event could lay the groundwork for a trade war. 

 

                     Dec 25, 2000                                                   Partial eclipse of the sun over North America.  The next one like this on the pagan Christmas will not happen for another 307 years. 

 

                     Dec 31, 2000                                                   The US stock markets were down in 2000.  The Dow Jones industrial average fell 6.2% and the high flying NASDAQ fell 40%.  The year ended with over a three trillion dollar market loss.  The first signs of trouble came as early as Aviv 2000 (March and April), but it recovered and resumed down on the 15th day of the 8th month and continued thereafter. 

 

                     Dec 31, 2000                                                   The US economy started down in the last quarter of 2000.  The US economic boom, which started in 1993, is now over. 

 

 

2001 

 

                     Jan 17, 2001                                                    Rolling power outages started in the state of California.  The two major electric companies there are broke and on the verge of bankruptcy.  The Governor declared a state of emergency as the outages continued off and on thereafter. 

 

                     Feb 16, 2001                                                    The Bush administration launched a bombing attack against Saddam and Iraq to ostensibly show them that George W. means business and will aggressively move against them in the future. 

 

                     Feb 21, 2001                                                    Sheik Irked Saber, the Muslim Mufti of Jerusalem, announced that Muslims throughout the ages agree that the Western Wall (now in Israeli hands) is solely and wholly Muslim property and that Jews have no right to any of it (May-Jun 2001 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 37). 

 

                     Feb 28, 2001                                                    A 6.8 earthquake struck Seattle causing $2 billion in damage and injuring some 410 persons.  There was one reported death by a man who had a heart attack. 

 

                     Mar 2001                                                          Red China will make hundreds of thousands of black berets to be worn by members of the US Army to help their self esteem (Mar 26, 2001, “Spotlight,” p. 2).  Apparently, a hold was put on this effort in the summer of 2001, but only after the US bought 618,000 of these berets, which now are of little or no value (Aug 20, 2001, “American Free Press,” p. 2). 

 

                     Mar 12, 2001                                                    The stock market dived.  The Dow-Jones Industrials fell 436 points to 10,208.  The NASDAQ fell 129 points to 1,923.  The NASDAQ had fallen 60% since its high a year ago.  A market analyst on NPR the next day said that there is fear among some analysts that the dollar will plummet. 

 

                     Mar 13, 2001                                                    Russian President Vladimir Putin and Iranian President Mohamed Khatami signed a new military cooperation and security pact in Moscow.  Thus, this action declares former Russian-US agreements on not supplying Iran with arms as null and void.  Russia is already allied with Iraq--which only leaves the question of the last horn in the foursome--that of Greece or Syria (which Russia has ties with). 

 

                     Mar 16, 2001                                                    The stock markets ended down for the past week with a loss of a trillion dollars (is this another case of the breaking of Yisrael’s pride--Lev 26:19).  The Dow-Jones fell almost 821 points.  OPEC announced that they would cut oil production by 4% or a million barrels a day starting April 1, 2001.  The result is expected to drive oil/gas prices up substantially and create shortages. 

 

                     Mar 20, 2001                                                    In the month of March 2001, a civil war has accelerated between Albanian Muslims and the government of Macedonia.  Macedonia has called up military units to try to restore order in the nation.  If this thing continues, will Russia eventually intercede on behalf of her Orthodox allies in Macedonia? 

 

                                                                     Mar 22, 2001    The US expelled 50 Russian diplomats for alleged spying (following the recent discovery of a Russian spy in the FBI, as discussed earlier).  The Russians retaliated and expelled 50 American diplomats for alleged spying. 

 

                     Mar 23, 2001                                                    The Spokane, WA “Spokesman-Review” of Mar 23, 2001, had a front page story and headline which read-- “Russia, China relations turning cold under Bush.”  Trouble now seems to be on the horizon for the so-called super powers. 

 

28/13/?        Mar 23, 2001                                                    Some 27 leading Rabbonim and multitudes of religious Jews from throughout Israel assembled at the Western Wall for a proclamation that the new year (this could be a reference to the year starting in the fall, although it could refer to the religious year starting Aviv 1) will be the time of Yakov’s Trouble. 

 

29/13/?        Mar 24, 2001                                                    The stock markets have continued their declines.  At the end of the Scriptural year, the Dow was down to 9500 and the NASDAQ was just over 1800.  Five trillion dollars have been lost from the 2000 highs. 

 

01/01/?                                                        Mar 25, 2001    Aviv 1--a Sabbath year and year 35 in the Jubilee. 

 

                     Mar 30, 2001                                                    California Gas and Electric company filed for bankruptcy (the largest US utility to ever so do).  Utility rates went up a few days earlier by 42-46% and there are promises of another 40% increase.  By the time summer gets here, California utility rates may have doubled. 

 

07/01/?        Mar 31, 2001                                                    The Yugoslavia government arrested former President Milosevic to appease the EU and the US (which threatened to cut off 15 million dollars in annual aid if action was not taken to try Milosevic at the Hague over his alleged “crimes against humanity” in the Balkans).  If there ever was a contrived media set up, it was this arrest (which was much like the fraudulent set-up on the fall of Communism in the old Soviet Union and the supposed demise of Gorbachev). 

 

                                               08/01/?         Apr 1, 2001       From Mar 7, 2000, this is the end of the second mark off of 390 days on the US since the Slick Clinton acquittal. 

 

08/01/?        Apr 1, 2001                                                       A large, US Navy, prop, EP-3E Aries II, spy plane out of Okinawa was flying in the South China Sea near China.  Two Chinese jets intercepted it and flew nearby.  There was a physical mid air contact between the spy plane and one of the jets.  The jet crashed into the ocean (with the loss of the Chinese pilot) and the US plane was damaged and set down upon a nearby Chinese island (Hainan Island) close to the coast.  The Chinese claimed that the large US plane violated Chinese air space and deliberately veered into the smaller jet to cause it to crash while the US claimed that her plane was flying in international waters and that the contact was an accidental event.  In any case, this event has proven to be a very serious one involving the two so-called super powers.  China detained the 24 man US crew and the large plane while the US demanded that the plane and crew be returned.  The confrontation accelerated because the Chinese demanded that the US apologize and discontinue these spy flights.  At once, the US said she would not apologize. 

 

09/01/?        Apr 2, 2001                                                       Though the current cycle of sunspots and solar flares probably peaked out last year, the more significant flares occur as the cycle is playing out--as mentioned by a solar scientist on the Coast to Coast AM radio program on Apr 2, 2001.  The largest solar flare (a mega flare) in recorded history occurred on Apr 2, 2001--as a result of the present surge which intensified on Mar 29, 2001.  One sunspot was fourteen times larger than planet earth.  During the last several afternoons, these flares have produced the so-called Northern lights and a blood red colored haze over some parts of the earth.  Art Bell said that at 10:15 PM on Mar 30, 2001, there was a blood red haze at night over Southern Nevada from a large solar flare that day.  These solar flares have disrupted communications and radio reception.  Something is happening to the sun.  Is it preparing to nova? 

 

10/01/?        Apr 3, 2001                                                       So far, some $5.3 trillion has been lost in the stock market fall to date.  Wall Street analysts confirmed that the US stock markets are in a bear market. 

 

10/01/?        Apr 3, 2001                                                       While the overall trend of this market has been down for the last year, the Fed and the US Treasury have periodically rushed in to spend billions of Federal Reserve notes to either save this market or at least spread the collapse out over time so that the fall is not immediate or drastic (in other words, to bring on a soft landing).  It is unclear how many hundreds of billions or trillions of Federal Reserve notes that Alan Greenspan has spent to help his Amalekite cousins to steal and plunder billions from this market decline.  When the truth is eventually known, it will be a shock to the gullible tax payers who have been putting this money up.  Yes, when Greenspan spends Federal Reserve notes, the US taxpayers pay for it--either in immediate taxation or later in inflation.  Obviously, when these billions of dollars (spent by Greenspan) come home to the US (along with the other trillions in the purchase of consumer goods and in US give-aways to benefit the internationalist plutocrats, a crisis will result with an inflationary bust). 

 

                                                                     Apr 9, 2001       “The Weekly Standard” assessed the status of the 24 Americans being held by the Chinese.  The Standard called it-- “a national humiliation.”  These words bring to mind the beginning of the seven times of punishment on Yisrael as involving the breaking of Yisrael’s pride (Lev 26:19). 

 

                     Apr 11, 2001                                                    The US and China reached an agreement for the release of the 24 crew members of the US plane held on Hainan Island.  The US Ambassador to China delivered an official document which used a Chinese word which expresses deep sorrow and regret and a form of an apology (although the US spin was that it was not exactly an apology).  However, the Chinese newspapers cited the word and called it an apology (surely, the Chinese understood the meaning of the word involved).  The US made some other secret promises to get the crew back.  Possibly, the questions of future spy flights and the US sales of military equipment to Taiwan were involved.  “Spotlight” of Apr 23, 2001 (p. 1), suggests that the Bush Administration promised the Chinese free trade and admission into the World Trade Organization for the release of the American crew. 

 

                     Apr 13, 2001                                                    Argentina announced that she would peg her currency one half to the dollar and one half to the EURO.  Formally, it was tied 100% to the dollar. 

 

                     May 2001                                                          An international team of astronomers have discovered that two distant stars some 200 light years from earth have planets in orbit around them (Iyyar 5761, “Jerusalem Prayer Mandate”). 

 

                     May 2001                                                          Retired Admiral Thomas H. Moorer, former Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, told the May 2001 issue of Internet Vortex (p. 4)  that the Chinese are preparing for ultimate war with the US.  He added that China considers the United States as her number one enemy. 

 

                     May 2, 2001    09/02/?                                    China agreed that the US can have her plane on Hainan Island (if the US disassembles it for removal, instead of flying it out).  The Chinese have finished inspecting it.  Apparently, the US agreed to pay China compensation (the US later paid $34,000--Sep 2001 “American Sentinel,” p. 7) and may limit the sales of military weapons to Taiwan.  With the earlier apology, it was a Chinese victory. 

 

                     May 11, 2001                                                   The “Washington Times” confirmed that China would test its DF-31 long range nuclear attack missile.  US intelligence people believe that the DF-31 was built, in part, from stolen technology from the US during the Clinton years (Jun 2001 “American Sentinel,” p. 4).  For sure, whatever China didn’t steal, she bought legally by campaign contributions to Clinton. 

 

                     May 15, 2001                                                   The California Utility Commission approved an electric rate increase of 7 to 80% to take effect on June 1st.  Rolling power outages have been occurring and more are promised in the future. 

 

                                                                     May 15, 2001   The international commission on peace in the Middle East, headed by former Senator George Mitchell, released its recommendations--which called for the Israelis and Palestinians to stop the violence, for Israel to stop building settlements on the West Bank and Gaza and the Palestinians to arrest Arab terrorists (Jun 1, 2001, “The Week,” p. 2). 

 

                     Jun 4, 2001                                                      US Secretary of Defense Rumsfeld spoke to US Air Force people in Turkey and said that China is militarily tied to and helping Iraq in her efforts to oppose and block US air efforts to patrol the so-called no-fly zone in Iraq. 

 

                     Jun 12, 2001                                                    The “NY Times” reported upon the surge of interest in the Black reparations effort to give each US Black person $10,000 or more because his ancestors were in slavery.  This motion is growing among all Blacks--to include Negro professionals and scholars.  The Jul 2001 “American Sentinel” (p. 3) said that the move is supported by the so-called need for “social harmony” (either the government succumbs to the extortion or Blacks will commence systematic rioting, looting and violence on a large scale). 

 

                     Jun 14, 2001                                                    The “NY Times” reported that the past spring saw an outbreak of crickets and grasshoppers in Utah (Sep-Oct 2001 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 30).  Warm winters are helping to enhance the infestation.  Next year could be much worse. 

 

                     Jun 22, 2001                                                    Mars has been closest to earth since 1989.  It has been very bright in the skies for some days now. 

 

                     Jun 28, 2001                                                    The Yugoslavia government turned Milosevic over to an international tribunal at the Hague to try him for so-called war crimes.  In return, millions of dollars of Western aid will now be given to Yugoslavia. 

 

                     Jun 2001                                                          The US is definitely in a recession (Mar-Apr 2002 “Philadelphia Trumpet,” p. 5). 

 

                     Jul 2001                                                            An article on “Another Communist Nation on U.S. Doorstep?” in the Jul 2001 “Internet Vortex” (p. 21) suggested that it’s only a matter of time before Venezuelan president Hugo Chavez declares his nation a Communist country. 

 

                     Jul 5, 2001                                                       The US, with Chinese authorization, disassembled her spy plane on Hainan Island and shipped it back to a US airbase in Japan, via chartered Russian cargo planes (Jul 9, 2001, “Newsweek,” p. 21).  At least one news report said that the Chinese sent the US a bill for $1 million for the whole issue.  For sure, the US did make one payment of $34,000 (as noted earlier, Sep 2001 “American Sentinel,” p. 7).  The US also agreed that China could become a member of the World Trade Organization. 

 

                     Jul 9, 2001                                                       The UN opened an eleven-day conference in New York on the need to disarm people worldwide (Jul-Aug 2001 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 54). 

 

                     Jul 16, 2001                                                     China’s President Jiang Zemin traveled to Moscow where he and Russian President Vladimir Putin signed a new Russian-Chinese peace or friendship treaty (which possibly resembles the Axis pact signed by Germany, Japan and Italy in 1941--Feb 2001 “Internet Vortex,” p. 2).  Both presidents spoke out and condemned the US plans to build an anti-missile defense system.  Christopher Ruddy suggests that both countries (and their friends In North Korea, Iran, etc) will not stand idly by as the US builds the antimissile defense system (Feb 2001, “Internet Vortex,” p. 5).  For sure, China is preparing for war with America.  Will the anti-ballistics missile treaty speed up a confrontation?   

 

                     Jul 16, 2001                                                     President Bush announced a plan to grant amnesty to three million illegal Mexicans in America.  When granted, these three million can bring into the US another 10 million or so Mexicans legally as family members.  America has done this before--the last time in 1986.  Every time millions of illegals are made legal, it is only a question of another few years when millions of more illegals will be here and a future politician will repeat the process of legalizing their presence. 

 

                     Jul 17, 2001                                                     An FBI internal review disclosed that the agency has had 454 of their guns (including machine guns) stolen and a loss of 180 or so of small computers (one with classified information).  One of the FBI’s stolen guns was used in a homicide.  The Congress said it would investigate. 

 

29/04/?        Jul 20, 2001                                                     In relation to earth, the orbit of Mars appeared to go into a retrograde movement (backwards).  This strange astronomical event occurred in 1948, 1967 and 1973--during previous Arab-Israeli wars (Apr-Jun 2001 “Hebrew Roots,” p. 33).  A CIA report said that the Israelis are preparing to invade the Palestinian lands, arrest leaders and impose marital law upon them if there are any further terrorist attacks in Israel. 

 

03/05/?        Jul 23, 2001                                                     The night of Jul 23-24, 2001, a huge meteorite shower occurred across the Northeastern US skies. 

 

                     Aug 4, 2001                                                     Russia and North Korea signed a peace and cooperation pact. 

 

23/05/?        Aug 12, 2001                                                   Earth passed through the Perseids meteor belt with a huge meteorite shower across the US. 

 

13/06/?        Sep 1, 2001                                                      An AP report said that Osama bin Laden had urged Islamic activists to prepare in Afghanistan for Jihad or holy war (Sep 2001 “JPM News & Prayer Requests,” p. 1). 

 

23/06/?        Sep 11, 2001                                                   Alleged Muslim terrorists struck in the US by hijacking four US commercial airliners.  Two planes were crashed into the double towers of the World Trade Center in New York.  Another plane was crashed into the Pentagon and the fourth one was crashed in a rural area of Pennsylvania.  The World Trade Center and part of the Pentagon were destroyed.  Some 3000 people were killed.  The “San Francisco Chronicle” said “America’s charmed existence has come to an end.  The day we always dreaded, but never really expected, has arrived” and William Safire, in the “NY Times,” responded by saying “Impossible, unthinkable, inconceivable” (Sep 21, 2001, “The Week,” p. 3-4).  The next week, the US stock markets fell dramatically (the Dow to 8235 and the NASDAQ to 1423, losing some $1.4 trillion, the worst week in stock market history). 

 

23/06/?        Sep 11, 2001                                                   This attack was allegedly directed by Osama bin Laden and his al Qaeda agents, allegedly trained in Afghanistan.  A question persists on why Bin Laden (who worked for the US in past days) turned against his former US allies, employers and paymasters in the recent terrorist attacks upon the US.  One suggestion has it that he and the ruling US plutocrats had a falling out and the CIA began an effort to assassinate him (like the Clinton missile attack upon some Afghanistan nomads in 1998, supposedly in an effort to kill Bin Laden).  However, the better option is that Mossad agents, infiltrated into al Qaeda and other Muslim terrorist groups, actually planned and set the 9-11 attacks up.  The participating Arabs were set up as patsies and cannon fodder.  With the promises of wine, women and song in the afterlife for Muslim suicide attackers, it would have been easy for secret Mossad agents to induce them to carry the attacks off.  Surely, even the stupid Muslim leadership believed that they were carrying the attack off; when, in fact, it was strictly a Mossad operation (which served and benefited the Amalekite bankers/masters more than the Muslim haters of America). 

 

26/06/?        Sep 14, 2001                                                   President Bush announced US plans to open a war on terrorism around the world.  To proceed with this war, America began establishing a coalition of nations who supposedly would join in the war.  Most of the so-called coalition nations were dictatorships which were already on the US payroll or which were promised huge infusions of new US cash to become an ally.  When these pay offs are made to the dictators, it is understood that each of them and their close associates can steal part or all of the money to sock away in Swiss bank accounts.  When a rainy day comes and the dictator is kicked out of power, he will have huge bank accounts in foreign banks to fall back upon.  The new dictator who takes over can link in with the plutocrats and then begin stealing new money.  Russia seemingly joined in the coalition, along with the former US enemies in Afghanistan (the Northern Alliance, which were Soviet allies in the preceding USSR war in Afghanistan). The US armed, financed and supported Bin Laden and the Taliban against the Soviets and the Northern Alliance.  Now, the US has turned on her former allies and joined forces with her former enemies. 

 

27/07/?        Oct 15, 2001                                                     A 63 year old NC man died this week from anthrax.  Anthrax spores were found where he worked at the “Star” in Boca Raton, FL.  The next several weeks saw a surge of anthrax reports (of both the inhaleable and skin kinds) surfacing in FL, NJ, NY, MD and Washington, DC.  Several people died and more were sick.  Antibiotics were administered to thousands as anthrax spores were found in almost all US government offices in Washington, at numerous post offices and at the major media outlets (NBC, ABC, CBS, etc).  The US mail was severely affected. 

 

09/08/?        Oct 26, 2001                                                     Congress passed and the President signed a new “anti-terrorism” bill which granted sweeping new spy authorizations to federal law enforcement people.  While Muslim terrorists were clearly a part of this focus, news analysts pointed out that the bill will also address “neo-nazis and White Supremacists.”  Later, the president signed an EO to authorize military tribunals to arrest, try and execute “suspected” terrorists--evidently anywhere, including in the US.  By late Nov, over 1000 people had been arrested and were being detained and held incommunicado without a hearing before a US court, without a lawyer and without the benefit of habeas corpus.  Since Sep 11th, US officials have been using torture upon “suspected” terrorists to obtain information and presumably confessions. 

 

                     Nov 12, 2001                                                   Astronomers discovered a new comet on Nov 12, 2000, which may have a future impact on earth (per a news report on the Art Bell Coast to Coast AM radio program on Mar 2, 2001). 

 

26/08/?        Nov 12, 2001                                                   American Airlines flight 587 out of New York crashed in the Queens neighborhood.  Some 260 people on board, plus five on the ground, were killed.  Was the cause mechanical, sabotage or a missile or what?  The official cover-up board (NTSB) quickly dismissed the terrorist options and began alleging mechanical failure from turbulence. 

 

03/09/?        Nov 18, 2001                                                   Earth passed through the Leonids meteor belt.  This time, it was really significant with 15,000 shooting meteorites per hour (as pointed out in a prior chapter). 

 

01/10/?        Dec 16, 2001                                                   National Football League fans in Cleveland, Ohio rioted and went wild following a local Browns’ game.  The fans tried to tear the stadium apart and threw bottles and everything possible at the referees. 

 

02/10/?        Dec 17, 2001                                                   Again, National Football League fans in New Orleans didn’t like a call in a game and rioted to throw bottles, debris, etc on to the field.  The game had to be suspended while the playing field was cleared. 

 

16/10/?        Dec 31, 2001                                                   The Feb 2002 “American Sentinel” (p. 8) quoted “Washington Times” reporter Bill Gertz that the USS Aircraft Carrier John F. Kennedy (set to go to the Persian Gulf) was found to be in sorry shape in Dec.  An inspection showed that the ship’s four aircraft elevators were inoperative, two of four catapults were barely working, major topside corrosion, dangerous electrical wiring deficiencies throughout the ship, major fuel system leaks, two shaft seals with unacceptably large leaks and unreliable propulsion power plants. 

 

16/10/?        Dec 31, 2001                                                   A news report in the Feb 11, 2002, “American Free Press” (p. 2) said that US boy soldiers can no longer wear nail polish or dye their hair blue or fire engine red.  Girl soldieretts can have braided hair or something called cornrows.  Pantyhose is optional.  And yes, the Army is also supposed to be capable of fighting a war. 

 

 

2002 

 

17/10/?        Jan 1, 2002                                                      The EURO became the common currency of the European Union.  Now, it is the currency used on the street by the people in all nations in the union except Britain and Denmark. 

 

                     Jan 21, 2002                                                    A new study says that some 54% of US active-duty soldiers are too fat.  Five years ago, the overweight figure was at 50%.  A combination of excess weight and tangled pantyhose could affect combat readiness (Jan 21, 2002, “American Free Press,” p. 2). 

 

                     Feb 14, 2002                                                    London’s “Guardian” paper said that the Bush Administration is planning an attack/invasion on Iraq later in 2002 that will involve 200,000 troops.  The Russians warned the US to not start new fights (May-Jun 2002 “Prophecy Club” newsletter, p. 5-6). 

 

                     Feb 28, 2002                                                    The full moon of Adar was one of the largest, brightest and most visible of full moons in the last several months and in the rest of 2002.  The moon was extremely close to earth in its orbit. 

 

                     Mar 10, 2002                                                    National Security Advisor Condoleezza Rice said on NBC that “the only way to deter adversaries from using weapons of mass destruction is to be clear that it would be met with a devastating response (May-Jun 2002 “Prophecy Club” newsletter, p. 4).  These words suggest that the US would use nuclear weapons without much provocation. 

 

01/01/?                                                        Mar 14, 2002    Aviv 1, an intercalcary year and the 36th year in the Jubilee. 

 

08/01/?                                                        Mar 21, 2002    The Sep 2002 “Vendyl Jones Research Institutes Researcher” (p. 1) indicates that the (Jewish) Jubilee Year of the Jubilee Calendar starts this date.  It is unclear what this calendar is but it might be something found in Judaism or in the book of Jubilees. 

 

                                               14/01/?         Mar 27, 2002    A new comet (Ikeya-Zheng) at two magnitude was seen in Northern Hemisphere during the Passover week (Mar-Apr 2002 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 88). 

 

                     Apr 20, 2002                                                    The five planets, visible to the naked eye, went into an alignment (Mercury, Venus, Mars, Saturn, and Jupiter) which continued until May 15, 2002.  The crescent moon passed among them (Mar-Apr 2002 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 88). 

 

                                               14/02/?         Apr 26, 2002    This concludes the third mark off of 390 days on the US since the Slick Clinton acquittal.  It started on Apr 1, 2001.   

 

                     Apr 2002                                                           Former Israeli Prime Minister Binyamin Netanyahu told the UPI that Arab suicide bombers may soon target the US (May-Jun 2002 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 40, 42). 

 

                                               01/03/?         May 5, 2002     The 395th anniversary of the settlement at Jamestown.  History books suggest that it happened on May 15, 1607 (or about the 1st day of the 3rd Scriptural month) according to the Julian calendar.  However, the actual dating could have been a few days later depending upon how one may view actions taken to constitute the official settlement date. 

 

23/03/?        May 26, 2003                                                   Eclipse of the moon. 

 

                                               28/03/?         May 31, 2002   The 392d anniversary of the re-establishment of Jamestown, following the decision to abandon it in 1610. 

 

                     Jun 10, 2002                                                    Eclipse of the sun. 

 

14/04/?        Jun 24, 2002                                                    Eclipse of the moon. 

 

                     Jul 27, 2002                                                     A US House Subcommittee on National Security heard the results of the US “Dark Winter” exercise (conducted under federal supervision on June 22-23 by the Center for Strategic and International Studies and the Johns Hopkins Center for Civilian Biodefense Studies).  The mock crisis was designed to test the country’s capacity to deal with an outbreak of smallpox unleashed against several US cities (by any number of countries with such capabilities).  From the “Dark Winter” command bunker at Andrews Air Force Base, the participants established that 13 days from the time the Centers for Disease Control confirm a bio-terror attack, America would be confronted with social pandemonium on a scale unseen in our history (Mar 2003 letter from Lee Bellinger, editor of the “American Sentinel,” p. 1). 

 

                     Sep 2002                                                          NASA convened an international conference, “Workshop on Scientific Requirements for Mitigation of Hazardous Comets and Asteroids,” to consider the problem of comets and asteroids which could strike earth. 

 

23/07/?        Sep 30, 2002                                                   For the quarter ending Sep 30, 2002, bankruptcy filings in the US went up 12% to a record 406,306.  The twelve months total of 1,547,669 also set a record over the 1,492,129 of 2001. 

 

                     Fall 2002                                                          Osama bin Laden stated that “The youths of God are preparing things that would fill your hearts with terror and target your economic lifeline” (per an audiotape broadcasted on al-Jazeera, per the Oct 21, 2002, “Time,” p. 21). 

 

                     Fall 2002                                                          Ayman al-Zawahiri, deputy to Bin Laden, stated that “America and its allies should know their crimes will not go unpunished... Leave the land of Islam” (also per an audiotape broadcasted on al-Jazeera, two days following the Bin Laden tape, per the Oct 21, 2002, “Time,” p. 21). 

 

05/08/?        Oct 11, 2002                                                     A reader’s letter from a woman in Oregon in the “Jerusalem Post” (as quoted in the Jan-Mar 2003 “Petah Tikvah,” p. 41) said that the reader had just returned from a pilgrimage in Palestine with a group of Zionist Christians.  On the last day in Israel, the group went to the Garden Tomb and the reported Golgotha area in East Jerusalem, near the Damascus Gate.  The nearby Arab bus station (next to the hill) was in the process of expanding.  Accordingly, the Arabs were destroying the historic face of the skull on the side of the hill that visibly appears to be Golgotha.  The famous British General, Charles “Chinese” Gordon, (re)discovered or took note of this site in the 1860s.  Accordingly, it became known as “Gordon’s Calvary” to the Protestant world because the face of the skull was incredibly recognizable from the formation of the stones on the side of the hill (Matt 27:33; Mk 15:22; Lu 23:33; Jo 19:17).  The area completely met the Scriptural requirements for the site of YESHUA’s impalement and burial (contrarily, the so-called Catholic site at the Church of the Holy Sepulcher is completely unscriptural; and thus, false).  The writer of this study was in Jerusalem in 1975 and was privileged to behold this face of the skull and almost certain site of YESHUA’s impalement. 

 

05/08/?        Oct 11, 2002                                                     The above cited reader’s letter noted that the “mouth of the skull” was already destroyed when she was there.  The next week, the nose and presumably the rest of the formation would be destroyed.  While it was unclear from the woman’s letter exactly when the Muslim Arabs would complete the destruction of the skull, it is easy to speculate that it would be around the 15th day of the 8th month (which would make it another fantastic indicator of the importance of this date for evil). 

 

05/08/?        Oct 11, 2002                                                     The site of the place of the skull (Gordon’s Calvary) has to be the most profoundly important religious site in the entire NT.  It has stood the test of time for almost 2,000 years.  From the time of General Gordon, in the 1860s, the site has been reverenced and respected by millions of Protestant Christians all over the world.  Yet, the Protestant world sat back and allowed the Muslim Arabs to now destroy the site forever.  What in the world does it take to wake people up?  The woman’s letter to the editor said-- “Someone has to do something.”  The truth is that the Protestant Christian world is so apathetic, indifferent, lethargic and don’t care that it will do nothing. 

 

05/08/?        Oct 11, 2002                                                     The Muslim Arab destruction of the place of the skull brings to mind the situation around the 15th day of the 8th month in 2000 when crazed, fanatical, Muslim Arabs attacked the tomb of the patriarch Yosef in Shechem (as cited earlier).  These workers of evil desecrated the tomb of the progenitor of modern America and Canada and converted it into a Moslem mosque.  The modern descendants of Yosef in the US and Canada did nothing.  Now, virtually the same thing happens again at surely the most important religious site in the Christian Protestant world.  And the leaders in the US and Canada did nothing.  Is this another sign of Yakov’s Trouble for the House of Yisrael?  Of course, starting in the year 2000, and continuing on through 2003, the same fanatical Muslim Arabs have been up under the Temple Mount (another site of fantastic and extraordinary importance to both Christians and Jews) destroying who knows what.  Yet, Christians and Jews have sat back and done nothing. 

 

06/08/?        Oct 12, 2002                                                     Ayatollah Mohsen Mujtahed, personal representative of Iran’s Supreme Leader, referred to three leading American preachers in a sermon in Tabriz, Iran.  He said:  “In our opinion, to kill these three is necessary” (Nov 2002 “Christian Connection,” p. 1, quoting “2002 IranMania.Com” from the net of Oct 12, 2002).  The three Christian sun worshippers (“the reverends” Jerry Falwell, Pat Robertson and Franklin Graham) have come under Muslim indictment for insulting Islam and the Muslim prophet Mohammed. Falwell called Mohammed a terrorist on CBS’s Sixty minutes.  In Feb 2002, Robertson charged that Islam was a religion of violence seeking to “dominate and then, if need be, destroy.”  And in Nov 2001, Graham reported that Islam is “a very evil and wicked religion.”  Question--will the Muslims proceed to kill these three frauds at some point in time?  Certainly, with the fall of the US in WWIII, the answer seems to be yes. 

 

                                               15/08/?         Oct 21, 2002     Just as Adolf Schicklgruber had a bunker to hide out in Berlin in WWII, and just as the US president now has a bunker to hide out in, in Washington, when trouble comes, the US military is building a bunker for Hamid Karzai, the president of Afghanistan (Oct 21, 2002, “Time, p. 22).  It is unclear why Karzai needs a bunker, but there must be a reason for it. 

 

18/08/?        Oct 24, 2002                                                     News reports said that police had arrested two Black men (one a Muslim and the other a possible Muslim, both homosexuals) for shooting and killing a dozen people in the Washington, DC area in the month of October.  The impact of this arrest could have far reaching implications if the US attacks Iraq and the Muslims counterattack.  In that situation, maybe Muslim terrorists will start shooting American people at random.  If this should occur, it would provide a classic fulfillment of Leviticus 26:22-23 in that behemah humanoids could become so dangerous (as terrorists?) that the streets and byways in the House of Yisrael would be largely deserted. 

 

                     Oct 2002                                                           Anders Dam, CEO of Jyske Bank of Copenhagen, Denmark, says:  “The culture of greed is spreading.  We are approaching a chain-letter economy where the first man cheats the next, and actual assets are worth less than the bubbles in the equity markets” (Autumn/Winter 2002 Jyske Bank Private Banking Gazette,” p 3). 

 

                     Oct 2002                                                           James R. Cook, president of Investment Rarities, notes:  “We’re choking on debt.  Three quarters of GDP consists of debt service.  Huge quantities of junk bonds and lesser quality debt instruments are in default, or close to it.  Big corporate names experience downgrades and investors shed the debt of major companies.  Meanwhile, profits can’t improve because of a paralysis in business spending.  Among consumers and corporations, delinquencies and defaults are rising sharply.  A mad rush by the Fed to push out new money and credit exists side by side with the chronic destruction of money and credit from growing numbers of bankruptcies.” 

 

                                                                                                Cook goes on:  “A trillion-dollar budget deficit now looks likely and the line of spongers at the government trough grows longer by the day.  The airline industry comes hat in hand for additional subsidies.  It never dawns on this spoiled nation that we may have to forego airline routes or raise fares.  It’s simpler for the government to pay.  If this keeps up, government finances will hit the wall and the dollar will suffer grievous depreciation.  The government bailouts that would be necessitated by a credit collapse stagger the mind...” 

 

                                                                                                Cook adds:  “The only solution that central banks have to combat a recession is to create money and credit.  They will monitize the government debt (create money to pay the bills) in untold quantities.  If things get tough enough, they will, virtually, throw money at borrowers.  At some point corporate bailouts could be commonplace, with newly created money.  The pathway out of a depression will be massive inflating.  That’s why I believe we’re in for an inflationary depression.  That economic disaster is the worst of all worlds” (Oct 2002 “James Cook Market Update,” p. 6-7).  Cook adds that silver short traders could be short 350 million ounces in comparison with a supply of 125 to 150 million ounces.  A silver crisis could be waiting to explode on the US.  Will this event promote a government confiscation of silver (and gold)?  The government could easily go after silverware, coins, jewelry and you name it. 

 

                     Nov 2002                                                          James Lloyd, editor of the “Christian Media,” wrote:  “Against the backdrop of seething religious fervor, virtually every nation on the planet is teetering on the edge of insolvency.  Seemingly daily stories of near defaults, bank closures, and huge fiscal scandals surround companies and nations as practically everybody is ‘cooking the books’ just to stay solvent.  In America, the fiscal scandals have rocked the stock market so severely the Securities and Exchange Commission appointed a special auditor--until they found the man they selected had been involved in one of the financial deals he was supposed to monitor!” 

 

                                                                                                Lloyd adds:  “As nations have become dependent on each other for trade, each country continually loses ground as the wealthy insiders wield their deceitful power.  The World Bank, relate to the global government of the United Nations, keeps loaning money to countries that are about to collapse into chaos.  The other arm of the world’s money-masters, the International Monetary Fund (IMF), poses as a financial savior by loaning more money to these same nations so they can pay back part of their loans to the World Bank.  This is like borrowing from Peter to pay Paul, and the end is now in sight.  What many don’t know is that as the IMF continues its predatory lending practices, each nation is giving them their Gold reserves as collateral.  Many countries are now pledging their land and other hard assets (such as oil, timber, etc) as collateral (including the US, as noted earlier--ed).  Although the World Bank claims to be functioning in a benevolent fashion to help developing nations, the truth is that they are planning for the global economic collapse--and the inevitable military conflagration it will bring.” 

 

                                                                                                In going on, Lloyd says that “Nothing is as it seems, and very very few people actually know what is really occurring.  Not one of the national governments of the world is being run by moral or righteous leaders--including America.  The secret societies that have plotted behind the scenes for centuries are drawing very near to springing their massive Satanic mousetrap, and the Bible says that hardly anyone will escape the ‘strong delusion’ that is even now upon us.  This economic cauldron has been carefully calculated to yield a global collapse--but in the process, the true monetary masters of the world have quietly acquired significant control of the gold, the land, and the valuable national resources of each nation.”  

 

27/08/?        Nov 2, 2002                                                      Turkey elected a new government from its pro-Islamic Justice party.  This event may turn Turkey away from NATO and Europe into a closer walk with the developing Muslim empire.  For sure, the fat cat bankers will now have some problems in trying to take over Turkey. 

 

03/09/?        Nov 8, 2002                                                      The UN Security Council approved a compromise US resolution on Iraq.  It provided for stringent inspections, set tight deadlines, and warned of serious consequences if Iraq failed to comply (Nov 7, 2002, Spokane Spokesman-Review,” p. A4).  The resolution did not grant any state unilateral authority to enforce the resolution.  Thus, if there was any non-compliance, the matter was to be referred to the UN Security Council for resolution.  The US wanted unilateral authority to commence a war against Iraq for any alleged non-compliance.  The resolution only provided for any alleged non-compliance to be referred to the council.  However, Bush went on record to say that if there was any alleged non-compliance and the UN did not take action, the US would start her (already) planned war against Iraq.  The US and Israel announced joint military exercises for January 2003 (in an apparent suggestion that the US and Israel may go to war against Iraq at that time). 

 

10/09/?        Nov 15, 2002                                                   Jiang Zemin stepped down as principle leader in China.  He was replaced with Hu Jintao, age 59.  Hu is an educated Communist party man who some say is an enigma (Nov 15, 2002, Spokane “Spokesman-Review”,” p. 1). 

 

10/09/?        Nov 15, 2002                                                   The Nov 2002 “Radio Liberty” newsletter (p. 3) quoted an interview with the alleged terrorist leader Mohammed al-Usuquf in “The Asia Times” of Nov 15, 2002.  Al-Usuquf said:  “...September 11 ‘was just the beginning.  It was a way to call the world’s attention to what’s going to happen.’  He then details a plan to destroy the U.S. by ‘attacking the heart of what they consider the most important thing in the world:  money.’  The American economy is an economy of false appearances...  There’s no real economic weight, American GNP is something around $10 trillion, but only 1 percent comes from agriculture, and only 24 percent from industry.  So 75 percent of its GNP comes from services, and most of it is financial speculation...  If U.S. credibility is affected...the U.S. dollar will fall at a tremendous speed, and the whole American economy will collapse.” 

 

10/09/?        Nov 15, 2002                                                   Going on, Mohammed told “The Asia Times” that al Qaeda has seven nuclear bombs and if America attacks Iraq, they will detonate the weapons on US cities.  He added:  “Even if five or 10 cities are chosen at random to be destroyed, it will still be a price to pay.  The problem is that the economic despair will be so great that even if it saves (money) by not using weapons, American liquidity will be near zero, and the U.S. will make more money selling a Nimitz-class aircraft carrier to Turkey or Italy for $5 billion, because they will urgently need to recapitalize.  But it will be too late.  Moreover, what will remain of an American soldier’s morale to fight knowing that his whole family died and his country ceased to exist?  To fight for what?”  As a footnote, “Radio Liberty” said that the above article appeared on “The Asia Time’s” Internet web site exactly two hours before someone (perhaps the CIA?) removed it. 

 

13/09/?        Nov 18, 2002                                                   The Leonids meteor shower occurred.  The estimate is that this was the largest shower until the year 2099.  As noted earlier, it reportedly produced up to 30,000 shooting stars per hour (Jan-Feb 2002 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 24). 

 

20/09/?        Nov 25, 2002                                                   Per a recent poll in Britain, almost half of the public see British Prime Minister Tony Blair as a “lapdog” for US President George W. Bush (Nov 25, 2002, “American Free Press,” p. 2).  This same survey indicated that some one-third of the Brits were undecided about whether Britain should go to war against Iraq or not; and that they see George W. Bush as a greater threat to world peace than Saddam Hussein (ibid, p. 2). 

 

21/09/?        Nov 26, 2002                                                   An AP report said that Russian President Vladimir Putin had brought back the Soviet-era red star as the emblem of the Russian military (Nov 27, 2002, Coeur d’Alene, ID “The Press,” p. A14).  Reportedly, this move is the latest in a series of actions designed to restore Communist symbols.  Will the old style totalitarianism and tyranny of the old USSR return?  Will Communism return in some form? 

 

                     Nov 2002                                                          An AP report said that the first military units to invade Iraq in present Bush plans for an Iraqi war will be called the “Red Horse Forces” (Jan-Feb 2003 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 24).  One must wonder if this designation links in some way to the red horse in Revelation 6:4? 

 

                     Nov 2002                                                          Chinese persons have been illegally infiltrating the United States in droves, and the China Ocean Shipping Company (COSCO) has been unloading containers of something in America (ibid, p. 24).  Reportedly, China has a new agreement with Iraq for whatever that may mean. 

 

                     Nov 2002                                                          Reportedly, there are some 70,000 trained terrorists in the US waiting for orders to strike (ibid, p. 24). 

 

                     Nov 2002                                                          A news item noted that 200 nuclear warheads are missing in the Ukraine, a country suspected of selling high tech arms to Iraq (Jan-Feb 2003 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 29).

 

                     Nov 2002                                                          A news report from the Nov 14, 2002, “WorldNetDaily” said that al Qaeda terrorists have placed seven nuclear bombs in as many US cities and will soon detonate them to cause millions of casualties, massive panic, and destroying the world’s largest economy--the US (ibid, p. 29-30). 

 

                     Dec 2002                                                          The Dec 16 & 23, 2002, “American Free Press” (p. 7) quoted a recently retired Air Force intelligence officer (who worked in the Middle East section of the National Security Agency).  This man said that Middle Eastern terrorists in America are armed with small, Soviet-made, shoulder-fired surface to air missiles which could easily bring American airliners down.  Their range is about two miles or 13,000 feet.  Reportedly, two of these small SA-7 missiles were used in Kenya to almost destroy an El AL jet. 

 

28/09/?        Dec 3, 2002                                                      Francoise Ducros, a top aide to Canadian Prime Minister Jean Chretien resigned under pressure after calling US president George W. Bush a “moron” (Dec 6, 2002, “American Free Press,” p. 2). 

 

29/09/?        Dec 4, 2002                                                      Total eclipse of the sun. 

 

01/10/?        Dec 5, 2002                                                      A front page story in the Dec 5, 2002, Spokane “Spokesman-Review” (p. A1) on a recent survey of people in 27 countries said that the “U.S. image slips abroad.”  The report went on to say that the American Iraq policy has helped to erode support and especially among Muslim countries.  In Egypt, 69% of the respondents viewed the US unfavorably with only 6% favorably.  In Pakistan, the unfavorable level is also at 69%; and in Jordan, the unfavorable figure is at 75%.  These Muslim states are so-called US allies in the war against terrorism.  Each of these nations receive huge money pay-offs from America. 

 

01/10/?        Dec 5, 2002                                                      The 9th Circuit Court of Appeals (in the US West) ruled unanimously that there is no constitutional right for individual Americans to own firearms and that the second amendment to the constitution pertains solely to the right of the states to organize and maintain militias--the National Guard (Dec 6, 2002, Spokane ”Spokesman-Review,” p. A1).  This issue will ultimately go to the US Supreme Court for resolution. 

 

07/10/?        Dec 11, 2002                                                   The Mar 2003 “End Time News” (p. 1) quoted a story from Edmonton, Canada on Dec 11, 2002.  The report concerned a decision handed down by the Court of Queen’s Bench in Saskatchewan on a trial involving a man named Hugh Owens who ran an ad in the Saskatoon Star Phoenix which included four Scriptural citations which condemned homosexuality.  Under the Saskatchewan’s Human Rights Code, Owens and the paper were both found guilty of inciting hatred and were forced to pay damages of 1,500 Canadian dollars to each of three homosexual men who filed the lawsuit. 

 

13/10/?        Dec 17, 2002                                                   US President Bush announced that the US will deploy a missile defense system (Dec 18, 2002, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A2).  The plan is to deploy an initial land based system of ten interceptors in California and Alaska in 2004.  The project is expected to cost $17.5 billion over two years.  Obviously, this plan will upset the Russians and Chinese since it will lead the way to a massive system that could render the Russian and Chinese offensive systems ineffective.  Accordingly, will either or both of these powers react in some way to try to prevent the Bush plans? 

 

15/10/?        Dec 19, 2002                                                   A ring of fire eclipse of the moon occurred. 

 

24/10/?        Dec 28, 2002                                                   Defense Secretary Donald Rumsfeld signed a deployment order to send significant ground forces, combat aircraft and logistics support to the Persian Gulf in a move described as the beginning of the final buildup for a possible war with Iraq (Dec 28, 2002, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A9).  Thereafter, there were almost daily reports of units going to the Middle East or of the call-up of reserve and national guard forces. 

 

27/10/?        Dec 31, 2002                                                   News reports said that finances in 42 US states are in trouble.  Many states are having to cut back on expenditures or raise taxes.  The Jan 6 & 13, 2003, “American Free Press” (p. 11) quoted Senator Max Baucas who has proposed sending $75 billion in aid to the states.  If something is not done, deficits of 25% in state governments may arrive.  California Governor Gray Davis has proposed a $20 billion cut in spending and a $8.3 billion tax increase to deal with his problem (Jan 24, 2003, “The Week,” p. 7).  NY City unveiled a “doomsday” budget which would lay off 10,000 city workers, shut down firehouses, pools and two zoos as Mayor Michael Bloomberg said that “The economy is not coming back” --Apr 16, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review” (p. A2). 

 

                     Dec 2002                                                          The Dec 2002 “Radio Liberty” (p. 6) said that 48 US states have budget deficits.  California, the 5th largest economy in the world, has a $34.5 billion deficit.  Germany’s economy is contracting.  Japan’s economy has collapsed.  Venezuela is paralyzed by general strikes.  Argentina is bankrupt, and Brazil can’t pay its foreign loans.  Since the US guaranteed the loans, tax payers will compensate J. P. Morgan, and other banks, if Brazil defaults. 

 

                     Dec 2002                                                          The same Dec 2002 “Radio Liberty” (p. 6) adds:  “Many major industries have moved, or are moving, their factories to other countries; telemarketing, answering services, and other jobs are going overseas.  The FED, Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac tried to counter the deflationary spiral by infusing $5 trillion into our economy during the past three years.  In July 1999, our ‘total debt’ was $25.695 trillion.”  On Sep 30, 2003, the total US debt was over $32 trillion, and the economy is still contracting. 

 

                     Dec 2002                                                          Michel Sabbat, Latin Patriarch of Jerusalem and the head of the Roman Catholic Church in Israel, said:  “I am calling on all those who are unable to make peace to step down, first the Israeli authorities, because this is in their hands... If Arafat is unable to make peace, of course, let him give the place to another” (Jan 13, 2003, “Jerusalem Report,” p. 53). 

 

                     Dec 2002                                                          On a recent trip to the Middle East, the leftist hypocrite Joe Lieberman (a reported fag who claims to be an Orthodox Jew) said that he supports a Palestinian state and that he deplored the terrible humanitarian conditions among the Palestinians on the West Bank (Jan 10, 2003, “Forward,” p. 1).  The “Forward article noted that the remarks were made to establish his credentials as a leader who deals fairly with the Middle East problems.  While liberal Jews had no problem with his words, hawkish and Orthodox Jews were upset. 

 

 

2003  

 

02/11/?        Jan 5, 2003                                                      In an anti-terrorist sweep in London, police found a small quantity of the deadly toxin ricin (Jan 8, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A2).  Six alleged terrorists of North African origin were arrested.  Nicin comes from castor beans.  It can be ground up and sprayed as an aerosol, added to food or drink, or injected into a victim.  Strong doses can cause death (as happened in 1978 when the Bulgarian dissident Georgi Markov was fatally injected with the poison by an assassin). 

 

03/11/?        Jan 6, 2003                                                      A NPR news report said that Saddam Hussein accused some of the UN weapons’ inspectors of spying for the US. 

 

03/11/?        Jan 6, 2003                                                      Saddam Hussein also criticized the US as being “wicked assistants of Satan” and of being a “small midget” pursuing “reckless policies of greed and expansionism” (Jan 7, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. 2). 

 

05/11/?        Jan 8, 2003                                                      The US Circuit Court in Richmond, Virginia held that the Bush administration could hold US citizens captured in the Middle East in prison indefinitely, incommunicado and without benefit of a lawyer.  Attorney General Ashcroft said:  “Preserving the president’s authority is crucial to protect our nation from the unprincipled, unconventional, and savage enemy we face” (Jan 9, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A1). 

 

05/11/?        Jan 8, 2003                                                      A confidential UN document on “Likely Humanitarian Scenarios,” on the fall out of a US war on Iraq, became public (Jan 8, 2002, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A2).  This report suggested that 500,000 Iraqis could be injured and need medical care, another three million may face malnutrition, and 900,000 refugees may flee the country in search of food and shelter.  The report did not estimate the number of possible deaths. 

 

06/11/?        Jan 9, 2003                                                      Leading US water experts warned the Bush people of water shortages and a potential water crisis if the US proceeds without a national water policy (Jan 10, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A4). 

 

07/11/?        Jan 10, 2003                                                    The biggest US military buildup in the Persian Gulf is underway as thousands of US military forces are arriving in Kuwait and other nearby states (Jan 10, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A8).  Plans are underway to deploy some 250,000 troops in the Persian Gulf area for the planned war against Iraq (Jan 13, 2003, “Time,” p. 15). 

 

13/11/?        Jan 16, 2003                                                    The Democrats in the US Congress are pushing for $900 million to be given Africans in emergency relief to buy food, provide disaster assistance and fight AIDS (Jan 17, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A3).  This is in addition to all the other funds that Washington is already sending Black Africa.  Surely, much or all of this $900 million will be sent to Africa as it is very popular to give US money to various Third World nations for some ostensible reason or reasons. 

 

17/11/?        Jan 20, 2003                                                    The Chinese are developing a global naval presence (Jan 20, 2003, “American Free Press,” p. 15).  In recent years, they have purchased a major modern aircraft carrier and numerous other military ships from the Russians.  The carrier, the Vargay, is capable of launching up to 60 jet fighters.  It is five tons lighter than the Theodore Roosevelt, but its flight deck is 999 feet long (which compares with 1092 feet on the Roosevelt). 

 

22/11/?        Jan 25, 2003                                                    A virus-like worm attacked the Internet.  The strategy which computer network managers typically use for security proved inadequate (Jan 27, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A2). 

 

25/11/?        Jan 28, 2003                                                    An Internet generated poll in Europe said that 84% of 300,000 participants considered the US a bigger threat to world peace than Iraq at 8.6% or North Korea at 7.5% (Jan 28, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A4).  Opinion polls around the world showed that people either were opposed to war or wanted the UN inspectors to have more time--70% in Britain, 82% in France, 76% in Germany, 61% in Italy and 85% in Turkey (Feb 3, 2003, “American Free Press,” p. 5).  In Spain, only 2% of the people support the US plans; yet, the Spanish government signed a statement of support for the US. 

 

                     Feb 2003                                                          In an effort to head off war, Saddam Hussein told CBS news reporter Dan Rather that “I am ready...to conduct a direct dialogue, a debate, with your President.  I will say what I want, and he will say what he wants.”  Speaking for the president, White House press secretary Ari Fleischer responded:  “This is not about a debate.  This is about disarmament and complying with the world’s instructions that Iraq disarm” (Mar 10, 2003, “Time,” p. 15). 

 

                     Feb 2003                                                          A news report in the Feb 7, 2003, “The Week” (p. 15) noted that Japan could build its own nuclear weapons within a year.  Whereas in the post WWII age, Japan has not shown any interest in military achievements, such may be changing now and especially in view of the developing nuclear threat from North Korea.  Japan may not sit back long and do nothing about the present threat. 

 

                     Feb 2003                                                          CFR member Richard K. Betts wrote in the Jan/Feb 2003 “Foreign Affairs” magazine-- “Many Americans still take for granted that a war to topple Saddam Hussein can be fought as it was in 1991:  on American terms.  Even when they recognize that the blood price may prove greater than the optimists hope, most still assume it will be paid by the U.S. military or by people in the region. 

 

                                                                                                “Until very late in the game, few Americans focused on the chance that the battlefield could extend back to their own homeland.  Yet, if a U.S. invasion succeeds, Saddam will have no reason to withhold his best parting shot--which could be the use of weapons of mass destruction...inside the United States... Washington has done little to prepare the country for this possibility and seems to have forgotten Bismarck’s characterization of preventive war as ‘suicide from fear of death.’ 

 

                                                                                                “...is an Iraqi counterattack on U.S. soil really plausible?  Hawks argue that Saddam must be eliminated because he may decide to use WMD in the future...even if the United States threatens him with devastating retaliation... If that is true, it certainly follows that he will lash out with anything he has if Washington goes for his jugular and puts his back against the wall.  Yet Washington...seems determined to push him to that wall... If war on Iraq is deemed necessary despite the risk of mass destruction, Washington is dangerously far behind in preparing the home front” (quoted in the Jan 2003 “Radio Liberty,” p. 2). 

 

                     Mar 2003                                                          The Mar 24, 2003, “American Free Press” (p. 1) had a report from both Japan and South Korea that the North Koreans test fired a nuclear-capable, intercontinental ballistic missile which landed in or near the state of Alaska.  The basis of the story was US intelligence reports. 

 

                     Mar 2003                                                          The Center for Immigration Studies reports that there are now an estimated seven million illegal aliens in the US--mainly from Mexico (ibid, p. 2). 

 

                     Mar 2003                                                          A report from the US Air Force Academy said that 54 women students had been raped or sexually assaulted in the area in the last ten years (Mar 8, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A7). 

 

                     Mar 2003                                                          A mysterious respiratory illness (called SARS) surfaced in the Guangdong Province of China, Vietnam and Hong Kong to begin killing and sickening hundreds of people (Mar 15, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A6).  It soon spread to the West (including the US) where fourteen people were killed by March 20, 2003 (Mar 20, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A2).  By Mar 26, 2003, the disease had infected 1,000 people in Canada, 800 (with 31 deaths) in Guangdong (Mar 27, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A3).  The next day, another report said that 1,700 people had been quarantined in Hong Kong and that there had been 53 deaths worldwide from the disease (Mar 28, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A2).  By Apr 15, 2003, the global death toll had passed 150 (Apr 16, 2003, ibid, p. A4).  News reports on May 8, 2003, said that the worldwide death toll from SARS had reached 500. 

 

                     Mar 2003                                                          The latest Bush team estimate is that the US budget deficit for the next decade would be $1.7 trillion (Mar 8, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A2).  In 2001, Bush said it would be $450 billion less.  The FY 2003 budget deficit is now expected to reach $338 billion (up from $287 billion in 2001).  This does not address the cost of the Bush war against Iraq which could cost, as  a minimum, $100 billion--plus the various give aways and bribes made to buy allies (billions of dollars will be going to Israel, Pakistan, Turkey, Jordan, Egypt, and the various Muslim dictatorships which are supporting Bush).  If the war drags on, the cost could go up to $1 trillion (per news reports).  Bush reported a deficit of $158 billion for FY 2002, but Alan Greenspan said that if it was calculated on the basis of accrued expenses, it would be $365 billion (Apr 1, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A2). 

 

                     Mar 2003                                                          The week of Mar 2-8, 2003, just before George W. Bush launched his war against Iraq, saw oil crude prices reach $40 a barrel and gasoline prices at the pump exceed $2.00 a gallon in parts of the US (Mar 14, 2003, “The Week,” p. 39).  Optimists said that prices would come down once the war against Iraq was over.  But pessimists warned that things will get worse in the coming days. 

 

                     Mar 2003                                                          Investment advisor Martin D Weiss says that the Japanese economy hasn’t been in worse shape in 56 years--since the war ended in 1946 and that it will be a nightmare when Japan implodes (per his article on “Panic in the White House,” Mar 2003, p. 9).  This writer must ask here if Japan implodes, will it cause a similar implosion in the US as various nations start cashing in their US securities? 

 

                     Mar 2003                                                          Weiss also addressed the debt of US companies (ibid, p. 11).  He noted that 253 public companies have more debt than assets (with a net minus figure of $10.2 billion).  He also mentioned 662 other companies which are bleeding red ink so much so that they may not survive another year. 

 

                     Mar 2003                                                          Finally, Weiss noted a quote from “The New Yorker” with the words of an oil executive with three decades of experience in the Middle East.  This man said “Now they (Islamic radicals) decide the timing.  If they do a (terrorist) operation in Saudi Arabia, the price of oil will go up $100 a barrel.  Osama bin Laden has predicted that oil will go to $144 a barrel (ibid, p. 15). 

 

                     Mar 2003                                                          The Apr 2003 “NewsMax.com” (p. 4), formerly the “Internet Vortex,” had a story from the US General Accounting Office (GAO) that if nothing is done, some $3.4 trillion will be needed in the next ten years to fix the downfall in Social Security. 

 

                     Mar 2003                                                          The US wanted support from Turkey for her war against Iraq.  Turkey wanted $92 billion.  But the US would only offer $36 billion.  So the Turkish parliament voted the request down. 

 

                     Mar 2003                                                          The Mar 19, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review” (p. A8) had a report on foreign opinions of the US because of the US preparations and plans for a war in Iraq.  This report noted the favorable opinions of the US in various countries in 1999-2000, in 2002 and in March 2003.  Opinion polls showed sharp drops in favorable opinions--to March 2003 lows in Britain (at 48%), France (at 31%), Germany (at 25%), Italy (at 34%), Spain (at 14%), Poland (at 50%), Russia (at 28%) and Turkey at 12%).  In general, the favorable reports were in 1999-2000 and they fell 50% or more by March 2003.  While some people did have these favorable opinions, only fewer persons supported the US war effort (like in Turkey where 12% of the people felt well about the US but only 5% supported the US war plans).  Obviously, favorable respect toward America is plunging rapidly worldwide. 

 

                     Mar 2003                                                          For almost a year, the Bush liars and hypocrites have talked about the Iraqi people wanting freedom, liberation, and free elections, and that the Bush war against Saddam is for those purposes.  Actually, the truth is that if any free and independent polls were taken of the Iraqi people (or of almost all other people in the Middle East except for the Kurds), almost all of them think more highly of Saddam than they do of Bush.  In fact, the US is the most hated nation in almost all of the world (to include Iraq).  As far as free elections, no nation conquered by the US in her various wars of liberation have yet to taste freedom and free elections since WWII.  In all cases (in Grenada, Somalia, Panama, Haiti, Kuwait, Afghanistan, Bosnia, Kosovo, etc), the US has kicked out the old dictators to simply install new dictators.  The only difference in the dictators is that the old ones had grown rebellious and would not take orders from the plutocrats on Wall Street.  With the new dictators appointed by the US, they all answer to the Wall Street plutocrats.  Newly appointed dictators, like Hamid Karzai in Afghanistan, know where to march in order to stay in power.  The same thing will happen in Iraq if the Bush occupation in Iraq is successful. 

 

                     Mar 2003                                                          Just as most Third World nations are on the US payroll and being bribed and paid off huge sums of money, the undecided members of the UN Security Council made it clear that Washington would have to roll out a lot of money to buy their votes.  The foreign minister of Guinea called on national security advisor Condoleezza Rice, asking for a hand-out.  Condoleezza acknowledged that “We’re talking to people about their interests” --meaning that the US was quite willing to make bribes and payoffs to members of the UN Security Council for their votes (Mar 10, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A4).  Besides the money offers, the US also bugged the offices and communications of the members of the security council to monitor their discussions and plans on voting on the proposed US-British resolution for an Iraqi war. 

 

10/13/?        Mar 13, 2003                                                    The Serbian Prime Minister, Zoran Djindjic, was assassinated at Belgrade in Serbia-Montenegro--by alleged Serbian nationalist supporters of the former Yugoslavian President Milosevic (Mar 14, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A2).  This assassination has many similarities to the assassination of the Archduke Francis Ferdinand, heir apparent to the Austro-Hungarian throne, at Sarajevo, Serbia on Jun 28, 1914, to touch off WWI (as outlined earlier).  Will the murder of Djindjic prove to be of like importance? 

 

14/13/?        Mar 17, 2003                                                    The Bush team announced its plans for a war and an invasion of Iraq in a nation-wide TV address.  Bush told Iraq that in order to avoid being destroyed, Saddam Hussein and his sons would have to go into exile and the nation would have to surrender to incoming allied forces (and not resist).  Saddam and his sons said that they were born in Iraq and that they would die in Iraq.  Bush said that Saddam’s rejection of the Bush ultimatum would be Saddam’s “final mistake” (Mar 28, 2003, “The Week,” p. 2). 

 

14/13/?        Mar 17, 2003                                                    In one of the preparatory moves for the Iraqi war by the Amalekite plutocrats in North America (who rule the US), the public was hyped up for days with a story that a successful war against Iraq would shore up the US economy and everything would turn out rosy.  Maybe, this message paid off in part because something happened around March 13, 2003, to cause some large up-ticks in the US stock markets.  The US dollar even gained ground against the EURO and Japanese Yen.  While this motion was clearly fueled from behind the scenes by the Fed and various central banks (like the Bank of Japan), it must have caught on to motivate many private investors.  The US markets turned up and even after it became clear that the US would proceed with war.  For awhile, it manifestly looked like the Fed and its central bank colleagues had reflated the US stock markets. 

 

14/13/?        Mar 17, 2003                                                    While some part of the investing world looked upon the US decision to go to war as being a good decision by buying US stocks and bonds and supporting the dollar, such motions really were not signs of strength; but were, instead, signs of weakness.  All along, Bush has played the role of the bully of the block (which is the historic roll that the US has played internationally for many years now following WWII).  Instead of all other nations caving in and bowing to US demands, many nations stood up and said no.  This streak of independence created significant US problems in Turkey (where some $36 billion could not initially buy off the Turkish parliament) and at the UN Security Council (where stacks of US money tried to bribe the various US Security Council members).  Some nations, like France, Germany, Russia and China, showed strength to say no to Bush.  Along with these expressions of no, millions of anti-war protesters poured out all over the world to also say no to Bush.  The whole process made it clear that Bush had created a strong division and crisis in NATO, in Europe and at the UN.  Gullible and stupid investors looked upon this mess as symbols of strength.  Well, the evidence is massive that this mess (created by Bush) has to be evaluated as symbols of American weakness.  Bush was already committed to war and he proceeded accordingly.  But at some point in time, trouble may await the US for this stupid Bush maneuver. 

 

14/13/?        Mar 17, 2003                                                    The Mar 17, 2003, “American Free Press” (p. 1, 3) had a story by Christopher Bollyn on “Weak Link in Chain of Command Could Prove Deadly to Soldiers” which assessed the problem facing the US military as it prepared to invade Iraq.  The article presented three photographs--of George W. Bush, Donald Rumsfeld and General Tommy Franks with the question-- “Top three links in a weak chain of command.  Will the chain break under the pressure of combat?” 

 

14/13/?        Mar 17, 2003                                                    In a perfect illustration of US feminism and stupidity, the March 24, 2003, “Time” magazine had a picture of Lt Col Laura Richardson on its front cover with the words “When Mom Goes to War.”  Laura had her steel helmet and combat goggles on and with a snarl on her face.  The subtitle said “This helicopter pilot and her husband are now based in Kuwait, leaving behind their 14-year-old daughter.”  Obviously, if Laura is a Lieutenant Colonel, it means that she is simply not just a helicopter pilot; but indeed, must be a commander or leading officer of a helicopter force (evidently a battalion or squadron commander).  For sure, America is in trouble.  Incompetent and unqualified leadership spells out an eventual crisis.  

 

15/13/?        Mar 18, 2003                                                    The famous writer Gore Vidal spoke to 1,700 people at the University of California at Berkeley.  While Vidal’s words were primarily directed at the US war against Iraq, the author did say-- “We’re in the middle of a depression, we’re about to go broke.  This society as it is now set up is not going to continue” (Apr 7, 2003, “American Free Press,” p. 14).  

 

16/13/?        Mar 19, 2003                                                    The US dropped millions of leaflets over Iraq demanding that the Iraqis surrender.  Iraqis were told that if they used chemical, biological or nuclear weapons or attacked civilians, they would be captured and tried for war crimes.  Importantly, no mention was made on what will happen with US leaders who use uranium enriched bombs or kill innocent civilians in the various US bombing runs and attacks.  Clearly, there is a great presence of hypocrisy in the US threats against the Iraqis. 

 

17/13/?        Mar 20, 2003                                                    George W. Bush launched his war against Iraq.  Per the Bush representatives, the initial barrage of missiles and bombs were designed to strike and kill some of the Iraqi leadership (evidently Saddam Hussein and his sons).  Reports from Iraq indicated that this US attack actually hit an empty building and a residential area where one innocent civilian was killed and several more were injured.  The bombing intensified to fulfill the US proclamation that she would conduct a “Shock and Awe” war upon Iraq (evidently meaning that the US would shower thousands of bombs and missiles upon the Iraqis).  Interestingly, the US labeled her war of aggression on Iraq as “Operation Freedom.”  Yes, enough bombs killing enough people will liberate them which is one of the Bush objectives for the conduct of the war. 

 

17/13/?        Mar 20, 2003                                                    On the afternoon of Mar 20, 2003, some Iraqi oil wells were reportedly on fire--allegedly set by the Iraqis (although in the 1991 Gulf War, the US military set the fires and blamed Saddam).  Per US Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld at a press conference, any fires set on oil wells would be a criminal act against the Iraqi people (and presumably would open the door for a trial for crimes against so-called humanity, but nothing was said about what would happen if the US set the fires).  Rumsfeld also told the gullible reporters that the Iraqi people want to be liberated from the evils of Saddam Hussein.  Although he did not make the connection, the US bombing and killing of them will surely liberate them.  Hence, is it possible that Rumsfeld actually believes that the Iraqi people want to be bombed to oblivion in order to be liberated?  One must pause and wonder if the Rumsfeld press conference was built totally on lies and deception.  Did Rumsfeld speak any words at all which were truthful? 

 

17/13/?        Mar 20, 2003                                                    The Turkish parliament voted to allow US planes to use Turkish air space in the Bush war against Iraq and even after the parliament had earlier denied such use.  It is amazing what pay offs and bribes can accomplish--and even when 95% of a nation’s people are against it. 

 

17/13/?        Mar 20, 2003                                                    The controlled US media offered some of the Bush atrocity stories to hype up the gullible American public.  In one case, a Iraqi deserter was shown.  His story was that in the 1991 Gulf War, he deserted to the Americans.  With the end of the war, he was returned to the Iraqi government.  The Iraqi government cut one of his ears off.  Now, in 2003, with the Bush war, this man has again deserted to the Americans.  Many Americans seeing this TV story were concerned.  The point of this is that most military forces routinely shoot and kill deserters (as has been the practice for vast ages).  So, if this man only lost an ear, he got off pretty easy.  He could have been shot.  

 

17/13/?        Mar 20, 2003                                                    Anti-war protests broke out across America and throughout the world and continued daily thereafter.  Hundreds of protesters were arrested in San Francisco for blocking traffic.  Later, on March 22d, a large protest exercise in Indonesia said that the world’s number one terrorist was George W. Bush.  Still later, protesters in Syria marched through the streets of Damascus and called Bush a “pig” (Apr 4, 2003, “The Week,” p. 7). 

 

17/13/?        Mar 20, 2003                                                    A news item in the Apr 7, 2003, “American Free Press” (p. 2) quoted “USA Today” and other sources which said that thousands of Iraqis living abroad were returning to Iraq, not because they had any love for Saddam; but rather, because they despise the Americans. 

 

17/13/?        Mar 20, 2003                                                    Iraq is the cradle of the Adamic people and civilization.  Yes, it all started in this area some 6,000 years ago.  Hence, there are priceless archaeological treasures here--now discovered or waiting to be discovered.  For sure, the massive US bombing of Iraq will spell out the destruction of many of these priceless treasures from out of the past.  There is too some concern that as the US destroys the existing government structure that surfacing anarchy may open the door for thieves to steal many of the presently discovered artifacts. 

 

18/13/?        Mar 21, 2003                                                    The US and Britain commenced their ground invasion of Iraq. 

 

19/13/?        Mar 22, 2003                                                    The Mar 22, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review” (p. A11) had a story from Brussels, Belgium that France, Germany and Belgium are discussing new links in their armed forces to serve as a counterweight to Britain and the United States.  A later report also added in Luxembourg to the mix.  As this thing progresses, it could spell out the end of NATO and even lead the way for the ousting of Britain from the European Union.  Some people in Britain have expressed concern that because Britain had joined in with the US in the Bush war against Iraq, Britain “is burning her bridges” with continental Europe (as reported by NPR on a news item on Apr 6, 2003). 

 

20/13/?        Mar 23, 2003                                                    A Black Muslim soldier with the 101st Airborne Division in Kuwait threw three hand grenades into tents holding American soldiers.  Two officers were killed and 14 more were wounded.  This is the first fragging incident in the Bush war (which recalls the days of the Vietnam war where many US soldiers fragged their officers and non-coms). 

 

20/13/?        Mar 23, 2003                                                    The Iraqi government said that she had captured some US prisoners.  At first, the US denied the Iraqi claim.  The Iraqis then said that they would show the prisoners on TV.  Thereupon, the hypocrite Donald Rumsfeld immediately started screaming about the Geneva convention and that such a TV display would be illegal.  So here we have one of the Bush spokesmen talking about the Geneva convention which the US totally ignores in her own wars of aggression by calling prisoners detainees and by torturing them (as happened to date in Afghanistan and will likewise happen in Iraq as the evidence shows).  Too, the US has had numerous Iraqi prisoners on TV--like the man with the cut off ear (as cited above).  Actually, the evidence is in place that it was US lies and deception (over the loss of the soldiers) which likely prompted the Iraqis to have to go on TV to prove that she did have US prisoners.  It was only after they were on TV that the US finally admitted that some soldiers had been captured.  This whole exercise was only prompted because of US lies, deception and hypocrisy. 

 

21/13/?        Mar 24, 2003                                                    US authorities indicated that the Russians had supplied the Iraqis with special warfare equipment (like night vision goggles, anti-tank weapons and equipment to disrupt the US Global Positioning System).  Bush called Putin on the phone and allegedly “demanded” that Russia stop such transfers. 

 

22/13/?        Mar 25, 2003                                                    An apparent US bomb struck an Iraqi residential area (leveling a two-block area), killing 30 and wounding many more (of course, this was not a weapon of mass destruction as Bush saw it).  US authorities said that the Iraqis bombed their own people. 

 

23/13/?        Mar 26, 2003                                                    The Mar 26, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review” (p. A6) had a story on “A long war could cost $1 trillion” according to experts.  Yet, Bush only asked for $74.7 billion initially (the Congress actually passed a bill for $80 billion, which included $3.1 billion in give aways for US airlines and $8 billion in give aways to US allies--Apr 13, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A3).  The Congressional Budget Office said that peacekeeping in Iraq could run $1 to $4 billion monthly after the end of the war. 

 

24/13/?        Mar 27, 2003                                                    After meeting some Iraqi resistance, Lt Gen William Wallace, Commander of the V Corps and highest ranking US military official in Iraq told reporters “The enemy we’re fighting is different from the one we’d war-gamed against” Mar 28, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A1). 

 

25/13/?        Mar 28, 2003                                                    News reports said an apparent US bomb struck an Iraqi market place and killed 68 mostly women and children.  US authorities blamed this bombing on the Iraqis as well as the one three days earlier.  A later Apr 14, 2003, “American Free Press” (p. 2) report said that a piece of the missile was found by journalist Robert Fish at the site with an identifying cage code number MFR 96214 09 on it--indicating that it was manufactured by Raytheon Company in McKinney, Texas (cage codes are identified on the Internet at www.gidm.dlis.dls.mil).  So it was a US missile which the US simply lied about came from the US (of course, it was not a weapon of mass destruction if it came from the US).. 

 

25/13/?        Mar 28, 2003                                                    An Iraqi suicide bomber in a car pulled up at a US check point fifty miles South of Baghdad and blew himself and four American soldiers up.  The Iraqi vice-president said that there would be more suicide attacks on Americans, both inside of Iraq and elsewhere.  He said that 4,000 Muslims in other Arab states would come to Iraq to be suicide attackers--despite US attempts to patrol the Iraqi borders to keep people out (even if Muslims in other countries don’t come to Iraq, they may still become suicide attackers of US targets worldwide, including in the US--ed). 

 

26/13/?        Mar 29, 2003                                                    Both Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld and later Secretary of State Colin Powell condemned and threatened Syria for allegedly furnishing night vision goggles and other aid to Iraq.  This is interesting in view of the fact that the US claimed that the Iraqi borders were totally controlled by US Special Forces (so it was unclear how the Syrians got this stuff into Iraq). 

 

27/13/?        Mar 30, 2003                                                    US authorities said that they would ship some of the captured Iraqis to Guantanamo, Cuba where the US is holding Afghanistantian prisoners which the US calls “detainees.”  Apparently, the US plans on torturing and murdering some of these Iraqi fighters in the vein that they are not prisoners of war.  Periodically, the US has come out and charged Iraqi fighters with war crimes and crimes against so-called humanity (implying that some or many of them will be tried by a US military tribunal).  This is interesting in view of the many US charges that Iraq was not in compliance with the Geneva Convention in the way she was handling US prisoners.  Thus, the Bush people want the Iraqis to comply with the Geneva Convention while the Americans do not abide by the Geneva Convention.  Is this hypocrisy or what?  As law professor Erwin Chemerinsky wrote in the “Los Angeles Times” (Apr 4, 2003, “The Week,” p. 3), since when does the US care about the Geneva Convention--in view of the Afghanistantian prisoners held in Cuba?  The Apr 7, 2003, “Time” magazine (p. 67) asked “has the U.S. always followed these (Geneva convention) rules?”  The answer is no! 

 

28/13/?        Mar 31, 2003                                                    The Mar 31, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review” (p. A13) had an article by Laura Peterson on “Continuing war protests are a bad sign for our country.”  Peterson pointed out that she can see “anti-war protesters clogging the streets while the battle rages on in Iraq.  I see Vietnam all over again.”  Of course, Peterson is correct at this stage of the Bush war. Bush and his people have consistently lied about the war and the so-called progress being made.  Thence, the anti-war protesters have had much ammunition to use in their opposition to Bush and his war.  Some of the protesters are increasingly becoming pro-active and causing rebellion and violence in the streets of America.  If the war and/or US occupation of Iraq continues, the protests could grow in size and intensity.  It may look like a repeat of Vietnam. 

 

29/13/?        Apr 1, 2003                                                       An NPR news report from the Pentagon suggested that the US is conducting a psychological warfare operation against Saddam Hussein to undermine his command and control of Iraqi forces by constantly questioning his presence and ability to direct operations against the US.  The goal is to make the Iraqi military leaders, forces and people be suspicious about the status of Saddam since he has not been seen in public since the war started.  At first, the US propaganda tried to say that Saddam was killed or seriously injured and could not direct the Iraqi military (although Saddam was seen several times on Iraqi TV).  On Apr 1, 2003, the latest US psychological ploy was that Saddam and his family had fled Iraq.  What much of the public doesn’t understand is that the CIA has a murder contract out on Saddam.  If he appears in public, there is always a chance that some undercover CIA agent may murder him.  He understood that he had to keep a low profile in order to avoid assassination.  Apparently, the real goal of the current psychological operations against Saddam is to goad him to come out in public (to show himself to the Iraqis) in order for positioned CIA agents to assassinate him. 

 

29/13/?        Apr 1, 2003                                                       Secretary of State Colin Powell visited Turkey and demanded that Turkey not order her army into Northern Iraq.  Turkey already has several thousand troops in Northern Iraq and a huge army waiting on the Turkish-Iraqi border.  For days, there has been talk that Turkey would order this huge army into Iraq to secure Northern Iraq and to keep the Kurds from gaining independence (maybe, the Turks could conceivably just annex Northern Iraq).  If the Turkish army does enter Iraq, it could put the Turks against the Kurds (who are US allies) and potentially against the US. 

 

29/13/?        Apr 1, 2003                                                       As the US war on Iraq progressed, it became clear that there would be some other fall outs around the world which would significantly impact upon the US.  Former Afghan leader Mullah Omar issued a call for a jihad or holy war against the US.  His decree was signed by 600 Islamic clerics and publicized across Eastern Afghanistan (Apr 1, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A7).  Military activities by the Taliban in Afghanistan picked up.  The US-Afghanistan dictatorship controls Kabul, but much of the rest of the country is not under its control (as the US war continues in the mountain areas).  The Afghanistantians are continuing to fight back at the US invaders.  US soldiers are still being killed from time to time--two were killed in early Apr 2003 (Apr 11, 2003, “The Week,” p. 7), two more were killed on Apr 26, 2003 (Apr 27, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A2), and 175 US special operations casualties have occurred to date--Apr 14, 2003, “American Free Press,” p. 2).

 

29/13/?        Apr 1, 2003                                                       The Apr 21, 2003, “American Free Press” (p. 2) had a news item from the “Los Angeles Times” which noted that the government in Afghanistan is being sunk amidst reports of rising criminal activities and inability to collect taxes.  The US puppet dictator, Hamid Karzai, acknowledges a crime wave that includes armed robberies, carjackings, assaults, extortion and lawlessness. 

 

29/13/?        Apr 1, 2003                                                       A later report from Afghanistan said that outside the Afghan capitol of Kabul, the situation has deteriorated into a bloody chaos (ibid, p. 14).  Too, there is the possibility of more Muslim attacks on Americans worldwide (and even in the US).  Egypt’s President Mubarak has warned of 100 bin Ladens (Apr 1, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A7). Terrorist attacks against Americans are continuing to happen in Kuwait.  The US supported dictatorship in Jordan and in other puppet Arab states are running scared that the people may revolt and kick them out (thus, the dictatorial governments, allied with the US, have been arresting and intimidating their people grossly). 

 

29/13/?        Apr 1, 2003                                                       Iraq’s national debt is around $60 to $100 billion.  With the US bombing, the country has been reduced to almost nothing.  Pessimists say that the Iraqi oil revenues won’t begin to cover the country’s post-war daily running costs, not counting the national debt and the massive needs for reconstruction (Apr 21, 2003, “Jerusalem Report,” p. 20-21). 

 

01/01/?        Apr 2, 2003                                                       Aviv 1 (Rishon Be’Aviv), the 37th year in the Jubilee. 

 

01/01/?        Apr 2, 2003                                                       The liar George W. Bush launched his war against Iraq on the premise that the war was necessary to disarm Iraq of weapons of mass destruction.  After no weapons were found (other than those weapons of mass destruction used by the US invaders), Bush switched his pitch to the need to liberate the Iraqi people and grant them freedom.  When it become obvious that the Iraqi people hated Bush more than they hated Saddam and didn’t want freedom under Bush, Bush switched his pitch to the evils and brutality of the dictator Saddam.  When this pitch didn’t pan out, he switched his speeches to talk about the humanitarian needs of the Iraqi people.  Bush speeches commonly said that the Americans were coming with food, water and medicine for the people (obviously, the need here was created by the US bombing, killings and invasion).  Of course, the truth is that the Bush war was for none of these stated reasons.  The truth is that the US Amalekites wanted this war and there was the hope of vast profits and plunder from the Iraqi oilfields.  But the alleged reasons did set well with the gullible American people and particularly the US military (thus, Bush made many speeches at US military bases to get applause and support--but none on college campuses where he would be booed). 

 

01/01/?        Apr 2, 2003                                                       A US missile struck an Iraqi hospital, causing damage and death.  As the war against Iraq continued, hospitals were ether struck or full of injured and bombed out peoples.  As always in warfare, it was the little people who were hurt the most. 

 

01/01/?        Apr 2, 2003                                                       For years, Saddam Hussein patterned himself after Nebuchadnezzar, conqueror of the Jews in Jerusalem.  But the latest belief from the Arab world is that many Arabs are comparing Saddam to the famous Muslim leader Saladin (1137-1193), who successfully opposed the invading Christian Crusaders (Apr 2, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A7).  Many Arabs expressed pride in being an Arab simply because of what Saddam had done against the invading Americans (contrast this reality with the fact that before the US invasion many Arabs didn’t care for Saddam--though, in fairness, the Arabs hated George W. Bush and America a lot more than they ever did Saddam). 

 

02/01/?        Apr 3, 2003                                                       The Bush war at first was predicated on the “need to disarm Saddam of weapons of mass destruction.”  In the Bush war, the US has been using 5,000 pound bombs which can level whole city blocks.  In US carpet bombings, whole cities can be destroyed with the death of tens of thousands.  The US has also been using cluster bombs which are so deadly that they can demolish a tank and yet be so erratic that they can take years to blow up (Apr 3, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A7).  Human rights groups have complained over the use of these cluster bombs.  If a chemical shell or bomb can kill or injure the few people within its limited radius, how about these US bombs which can kill tens of thousands?  Are they weapons of mass destruction?  Is there some hypocrisy in the definition of these weapons? 

 

03/01/?        Apr 4, 2003                                                       The Qatar daily “Al-Rayah” says that the “American-British media machine has been churning out the most duplicitous propaganda” and that contrariwise, the Iraqis “have distinguished themselves by their openness and credibility” (Apr 4, 2003, “The Week,” p. 14).  While the editor of this study cannot comment upon the truthfulness of the Iraqis, the truth remains that the Bush war against Iraq has been profoundly characterized by the huge assortment of lies and deception--all the way from Bush down to military leaders fighting the war.  Virtually everything said by the Bush people has to be taken with a grain of salt because so much of it is absolutely a fabrication. 

 

06/01/?        Apr 7, 2003                                                       For days, various Americans and American groups have promised a boycott of French goods (like French wine) because of French opposition in the UN to US demands.  An Apr 7, 2003, NPR news report suggested that the French may initiate their own boycott of US goods.  Could a trade war result in this conflict? 

 

09/01/?        Apr 10, 2003                                                    News reports said that US forces were now in parts of Baghdad.  Most major resistance in Baghdad seemed to be over.  The Iraqi government apparently lost control in Baghdad.  There were also some reports of Iraqis cheering the Americans and condemning Saddam.  This story reminds one of France.  In 1940, the German army marched into Paris.  The French people came out to cheer and welcome them.  In 1944, the American army marched into Paris.  The same thing happened as the Americans were cheered and welcomed.  Yes, defeated people, who lack a means of resistance, will apparently always cheer and welcome their worst enemies who come as conquerors.  Perhaps they are afraid of their conquerors and don’t want to demonstrate any remaining opposition. 

 

                                               09/01/?         Apr 10, 2003    The Apr 18, 2003, “The Week” (p. 3) quoted the “New York Times” which asked why Saddam did not use weapons of mass destruction if he had them.  Among the answers posed, the question was asked-- “is it possible that Iraq simply has far fewer horror weapons than many have suspected?”  As noted, a few barrels won’t do.  The Bush administration claimed that Saddam had hundreds of tons of biological and chemical agents and 30,000 shells and missiles capable of delivering them.  It should be possible to find such a monstrous cache, especially now that Iraqi scientists will be able to speak freely.  “For any findings to be credible in the battle for global opinion, neutral analysts will be needed to verify the laboratory results and ensure a strict chain of custody to avoid charges of tampering with the evidence.”  The editor of this study would just add that anything allegedly found has to be suspect since the Bush people are such gross liars. 

 

09/01/?        Apr 10, 2003                                                    For days, there has been a conflict between the US and the UN over who will rule Iraq (and thereby get to steal the oil wealth).  But the US made it clear that the Bush team will rule Iraq.  Initially, there will be a military dictator in the form of retired US General Jay Garner.  Later, the US will choose interim Iraqi leaders (Apr 10, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A14).  Of whichever Iraqis are appointed, one can be sure that they will be puppets of Wall Street and the US plutocrats.  The Apr 25, 2003, “The Week” (p. 17) suggested that “crooks, spies, and profiteers” have been chosen to govern Iraq.  Even Garner brings with him much baggage as he was/is a supporter of Israel and the president of an arms exporting company.  The Iraqi émigré Ahmed Chalabi is expected to be one of the Iraqi bosses.  As a banker, Chalabi was convicted of embezzlement in Jordan.  “The Week” (quoting “The Nation”) added that Rumsfeld and his crew are setting Iraq up for factional strife, chaos, and civil war (as is occurring in Afghanistan).  For sure, the time will come when the US will be forced out and the UN will take over.  This will pave the way for the fulfillment of the UN to build its headquarters in Iraq (Zech 5). 

 

09/01/?        Apr 10, 2003                                                    A news item this date noted that the US now has plans on the table for an invasion and conquest of Syria next and/or Iran.  At some point in time, will Bush put these plans into effect?  All along, Bush and his team has been threatening Syria over rendering aid to Iraq.  And in time, the US accused the Syrians of having obtained some weapons of mass destruction from Iraq.  Any of these excuses could be used by Bush to launch a war on Syria and Iran.  Probably, the Bush people would want to take on only one nation at a time with a goal of destroying both of them (plus North Korea) in sequence. 

 

09/01/          Apr 10, 2003                                                    While there is some uncertainty of which nation (Iran or Syria) will be next in the Bush wars of “liberation,” both are on the drawing boards for quick action.  The Apr 10, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review” (p. A8) had a story by Timothy M. Phelps on “White House hawks making contingencies for Syria.  Phelps quoted threats made by Secretary of Defense Rumsfeld.  When asked if Syria was next, Rumsfeld said “It depends on people’s behavior.  Certainly I have nothing to announce.”  Conversely, the Apr 14, 2003, “American Free Press” (p. 1, 19) had a story by James P. Tucker Jr which said “Iraq wrecked; Iran Next?”  Tucker reported upon an Apr 1, 2003, meeting of the American Israel Public Affairs Committee which top Bush people attended (including Powell, Rice, and others).  This “off-the-record” meeting said that Iran will be next (on the premise that Iran had a secret nuclear weapons program). 

 

10/01/?        Apr 11, 2003                                                    In each city in Iraq that US forces conquer, there has been an immediate collapse of public services (water, electricity, police, etc) as anarchy prevails among the civilian population of mixed blooded, mamzer Iraqis.  At first, the mixed blooded animals have gone wild to steal and loot everything possible.  Next, they have turned to vengeance against their enemies (trying to settle old scores and kill or hurt enemies).  With the conquering Americans, there is a complete breakdown of law and order (anarchy) among the mamzer Iraqis (in WWII, in Europe, this simply did not happen as the more Adamic people there did not go wild like animals with the arrival of the Americans and British).  In Iraq, the conquering Americans have generally ignored the problem and simply said that they didn’t have the forces to deal with it.  As it became increasingly bad, the US commanders did issue a plea for the wild Iraqis to stop, but it was largely ignored.  Truly, the American conquest of Iraq has spelled out a total humanitarian disaster (but the US and British fat cats will get to steal the Iraqi oil/wealth).  Maybe, this whole thing is prophetic of what will happen in the US with the arrival of the conquering Chinese, Russians, etc in WWIII. 

 

10/01/?        Apr 11, 2003                                                    The US military in Iraq issued a proclamation for the arrest of 55 former Iraqi government officials.  Leaflets were distributed with their pictures and descriptions.  Presumably, the US will try these 55 people as criminals for alleged crimes. 

 

10/01/?        Apr 11, 2003                                                    France, Germany and Russia held a summit meeting in Russia to discuss Iraq and other common problems.  Have the Bush aggressive actions and demands for war created a bond among these former enemies? 

 

10/01/?        Apr 11, 2003                                                    With the fall of the Saddam government in Baghdad, several things stood out.  First, the US authorities and leaders have constantly lied about almost everything conceivable in creating the need for war, in assessing Iraqi capabilities, and in reporting on events.  Regularly, the American people were told about US successes (like the alleged surrender of one whole division in the early days of the war) and the capture of various towns and cities.  The US told these lies to make out that things were going well for the invaders when they were not going well in truth.  Finally, there have been numerous US comments about Iraqi chemical agents and the Iraq plans to use these agents.  So far, this has all been lies.  For sure, if the US comes up with any chemical or biological agents, one can be sure that they were US plants designed to deceive the world. 

 

12/01/?        Apr 13, 2003                                                    George W. Bush demanded that Syria not harbor fleeing Iraqi officials.  Bush also charged that Syria has chemical weapons which seems to suggest that the war mongering Bush has decided that he may make Syria his next objective.  Within a few days, Secretary of State Powell visited Syria and expressed the so-called US concerns (correctly demands) in order for Syria to avoid an invasion (May 19, 2003, “American Free Press,” p. 2). 

 

14/01/?        Apr 15, 2003                                                    Per the Apr 16, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review” (p. A6), Syria responded to the US charges on chemicals and said that the threats were aimed at serving the interests of Israel.  Iran came to Syria’s defense, saying that it would employ all nonmilitary means to prevent a US attack upon Syria. 

 

21/01/?        Apr 22, 2003                                                    The US, China and North Korea entered into talks in Beijing, China on the North Korean nuclear program.  North Korea wants more US aid (beyond the food that Bush had been sending). 

 

21/01/?        Apr 22, 2003                                                    The Apr 22, 2003 Spokane “Spokesman-Review” (p. A1) had a headline which said “Administrator has tough job ahead.”  It was followed with two sub titles and stories--one on the arrival of General Jay Garner to supposedly fill the void left by Saddam in Iraq and the other read “Shiites have own plan for postwar Iraq.”  This story noted that in Shiite Islam’s holiest city, Karbala in Iraq, a seemingly unstoppable movement is about to turn postwar Iraq into an Islamic republic, resembling the one that has ruled neighboring Iran for the past 24 years, much to Washington’s displeasure.  Iraq has a Shiite majority.  Many of them have made a pilgrimage to Karbala demanding a fundamentalist state.  If there is any democracy in Iraq, it may promote this Muslim state--along with huge anti-Americanism. 

 

22/01/?        Apr 23, 2003                                                    The Apr 23, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review” (p. A1) said that the Iraqi Shiite demands for a dominant role in the future of Iraq caught the Bush White House off guard.  The US focus was on the goal of defeating the Saddam forces and not on the dynamics of religion and politics in the region (is this more of an example of the incompetence of Bush, Powell, Rice, Rumsfeld and company?).  This same paper (p. B6) had a cartoon with two statutes--one of Saddam being toppled and the other of an Islamic cleric with the words “Islamic Fundamentalism.”  The caption noted that “you guys wanted regime change, right?”  The US is opposed to an Islamic religious state in Iraq and will supposedly work to prevent it. 

 

24/01/?        Apr 25, 2003                                                    A US controlled weapons depot exploded killing a number of nearby Iraqis in a Southern Iraqi city.  A huge Iraqi protest followed to demand that the US leave Iraq.  On Apr 30, 2003, a number of Iraqis protested and the US shot into the crowd to kill fifteen of them.  More and more Iraqi protests are coming out in the public demanding that the US invaders leave the nation.  Iraqis are beginning to use guerrilla tactics against the US invaders in an effort to expel them. 

 

27/01/?        Apr 28, 2003                                                    A news report from the UN revealed that fractional fighting in NE Afghanistan has killed some 64 people (Apr 28, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A3).  The UN urged the Hamid Karzai government in Kabul to put down the violence and bring the killers to justice.  Though not mentioned in the report, the US and the US puppet dictator Karzai do not control Afghanistan.  Outside of Kabul, various local leaders really run things and they are fighting each other to establish the pecking order.  Under the US and the US appointed dictator, virtual anarchy prevails in much of Afghanistan (and now in Iraq as well). 

 

                     May 2003                                                          Reportedly, Iran has secretly hosted groups of nuclear experts from North Korea, China, Pakistan and Russia, and is seriously interested in producing a lightweight, miniaturized bomb suitable for terrorists and delivery from small aircraft or drones (Nissan/Iyar 5763, “Jerusalem Prayer Mandate,” p. 2). 

 

30/01/?        May 1, 2003                                                     On the national day of prayer (May 1st, which is also May Day to the Communists and various sun worshippers), President Bush spoke to the sailors on the USS Abraham Lincoln aircraft carrier.  He declared a victory and bragged about the ground conquest of Iraq and that the ground combat war was over (but fighting and resistance remained, as the Iraqis continued a guerrilla war). 

 

30/01/?        May 1, 2003                                                     Along with the Bush declaration of the end of the ground war in Iraq, Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld got into the same act by declaring an end of major hostilities in Afghanistan.  Rumsfeld stated that the occupying US forces will now change their focus from combat to promoting stability and reconstruction (May 2, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A2).  In contrast, former Taliban officials say that they are ready to carry on a guerrilla war as long as it takes to oust the US invaders (May 19, 2003, “American Free Press,” p. 2). 

 

30/01/?        May 1, 2003                                                     By May 1, 2003, there were an estimated 20,000 Iraqis killed in the Bush war--presumably, in order to be rid of Saddam and obtain a new, even more hated, US dictatorship (May 5, 2003, “American Free Press,” p. 2). 

 

11/02/?        May 12, 2003                                                   American diplomat L. Paul Bremer took charge of Iraq, relieving Gen Jay Garner who returned to the US.  Per the May 23, 2003, “The Week” (p. 4), Bremer found the country reportedly sinking into chaos.  Reports of car jackings, assaults, and lootings surged anew.  “The Week” noted reports that US efforts to bring about stability to date have been a failure. 

 

15/02/?        May 16, 2003                                                   A blood red eclipse of the moon over the US. 

 

                                               20/02/?         May 21, 2003   This concludes the fourth mark off of 390 days from Apr 26, 2002, over the Slick Clinton acquittal. 

 

28/02/?        May 29, 2003                                                   The May 29, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review” (p. A3) had a story from occupied Iraq which said:  “Anti-American rage continues in Iraq with riots, lawlessness.”  Since the US takeover in early April 2003, anarchy and lawlessness have prevailed, and the US has failed to stop it (along with failing to provide essential services--like water, electricity, medical care, etc).  Along with the lack of law and order, US soldiers are being periodically killed in attacks and ambushes.  A military leader said that the war continues in Iraq, despite the US advertisements of victory.  Above all else, the Iraqi people hate the US invaders more and more with the passage of time. 

 

29/02/?        May 30, 2003                                                   Partial eclipse of the sun--over Alaska and NW Canada. 

 

01/03/?                                                        May 31, 2003   The 396th anniversary of the settlement at Jamestown. 

 

06/03/?        Jun 5, 2003                                                      Shavuot. 

 

07/03/?        Jun 6, 2003                                                      The US is developing plans to destabilize Iran internally, along with making threats against Iran for allegedly developing nuclear weapons and supporting al Qaeda (Jun 6, 2003, “The Week,” p. 7).  Apparently, the CIA and huge blocks of US dollars have went to work inside Iran to create “student unrest” to try to topple its government. 

 

07/03/?        Jun 6, 2003                                                      Some columnists and political observers believe that the US war on Iraq has revived al Qaeda (Jun 6, 2003, “The Week,” p. 15). 

 

08/03/?        Jun 7, 2003                                                      A plague of Mormon crickets has swarmed over Southwestern Idaho and may spread out from there into other areas (Jun 7, 2003, “Idaho Spokesman-Review,” P. A1, A7). 

 

28/03/?                                                        Jun 27, 2003    The 393d anniversary date of the abandonment and re-establishment of Jamestown in 1610. 

 

28/03/?        Jun 27, 2003                                                    The front cover of “The Week” for Jun 27, 2003, read:  “Will we regret invading Iraq?”  An inside story (p. 6) asked:  “Were the victory celebrations premature?  Someone forgot to tell the Iraqis that the war was over, said Fred Kaplan in Slate.com.  Seven weeks after President Bush triumphantly proclaimed that America’s mission was accomplished, U.S. troops find themselves in a deadly guerrilla war with Iraqis loyal to Saddam Hussein.  More than 50 U.S. soldiers have been killed since peace was declared... Expect more of this, said Michael R. Gordon in The New York Times.  Iraq remains infested with thousands of heavily armed rebels determined to oust the Americans.  By all indications, we’ve entered a prolonged period of “counterinsurgency” in Iraq.  ‘Unlike the rush to Baghdad, this fight will not be measured in days, but in months, if not years.’” 

 

                     Summer 2003                                                  US military authorities have been holding secret meetings in Kuwait, supposedly in making plans and preparations to attack and invade Iran next (Jul 7, 2003, “American Free Press,” p. 1, 11).  The AFP story on this (p. 11), by Gordon Thomas, was headlined “Global War Looms?”  It raised the question that this next Bush war could expand into something really serious.  A sub-title asked “Are Warhawks Contemplating War With Red China?”  Will an attack on Iran bring Russia or China into the conflict?  Per the report, the US is drafting plans to make this attack on Iran in 2004. 

 

05/04/?        Jul 4, 2003                                                       Though the US war against Iraq was supposedly over on this date (at least, as claimed by US authorities), any number of things could ultimately happen which could force the US to withdraw before the Bushes and the plutocrats get to steal all the wealth of the country.  First, it is a fact that much resistance remains and Iraqi guerrilla warfare continues to inflict hurt upon the American conquerors and occupiers almost daily.  There is too the fact that the huge US expenditures to gain this alleged victory may set the stage for the meltdown of the US dollar and financial markets.  This would spell the end of Yisrael’s pride (especially as the Bush team continues to tell lies and plows billions of dollars overseas in its efforts to rule the Middle East and steal the oilfields).  Since the US uses money to dominate and rule over other countries, the fall of the dollar will mean the end of US domination over the rest of the world. 

 

05/04/?        Jul 4, 2003                                                       As of this date, Saddam Hussein and his two sons still have not been located (the US responded by announcing a $25 million reward for information leading to Saddam’s arrest--bribes and payoffs inevitably bring results).  Like Osama bin Laden and the Mullah Omar in Afghanistan, the Bush war of “liberation” has so far been unsuccessful in eliminating Saddam (or Osama bin Laden or the Mullah Omar).  For sure, even if the invaders do successfully locate Saddam (as eventually happened with the money payoff), he could well become a martyr to motivate and influence significant Arab nationalism in the future.  Whatever the future may hold for Saddam and Iraq, Hussein has made his mark on history. 

 

05/04/?        Jul 4, 2003                                                       The Apr 28, 2003, “Time” magazine (p. 40-43) outlined three key questions of unfinished business in Iraq.  First, where is Saddam?  Two, Where are the alleged weapons of mass destruction?  And three, who is in charge in Iraq?  It appears that the US victory has not answered any of these concerns as of this date.  In terms of question two from “Time,” the May 5, 2003, “American Free Press” (p. 14) made note of the possibility that any weapons found may be “planted.”  This same paper (p. 2) had a news report which said that the US has established a program to pay monetary rewards to Iraqis who find Iraqi weapons of mass destruction.  As the report noted, “Iraqis evidently can ‘find’ anything.”  A number of international people (like the UN weapons inspector Hans Blix) have raised questions about the validity of any alleged US finds of weapons in now occupied Iraq.  Blix has suggested the presence of an international team of independent inspectors in Iraq to verify any alleged finds of weapons.  The US said no. 

 

05/04/?        Jul 4, 2003                                                       Since Bush declared victory in Iraq on May 1st, almost 70 US soldiers have been killed and hundreds more have been wounded or injured.  Daily, US occupying forces are attacked. 

 

05/04/?        Jul 4, 2003                                                       In a speech in Los Angeles, former CIA Director James Woolsey said:  “The Iraqi campaign is really just the start of the Third World War and one that may last for decades” (Jul 7, 2003, “American Free Press,” p. 11). 

 

17/04/?        Jul 16, 2003                                                     Former Defense Secretary William Perry warned that the US is drifting towards war with North Korea (Jul 16, 2003, “Idaho Spokesman-Review,” p. A3)

 

17/04/?        Jul 16, 2003                                                     The Bush administration predicts that the US budget deficit will reach $455 billion this year (Jul 17, 2003, “Idaho Spokesman-Review,” p. A1).  This figure does not include the US raid of the Social Security trust funds or the full cost of the Iraq war.  Bush said that the deficit was not a problem in view of the $10 trillion dollar US economy (Jan 19, 2003, “Idaho Spokesman-Review,” p. A1). 

 

01/06/?        Aug 28, 2003                                                   On Aug 27, Mars will be in opposition to Earth; on Aug 28, it will be closest to Earth (perihelion) in recorded history when it comes within 36 million miles of Earth (the last time this happened was 73,000 years ago and it won’t happen again for another 1,012 years); and on Aug 29, Mars will arrive at its closest point to the sun (Mar-Apr 2003 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 21). The coinciding of Mars and its perihelion within three days makes it a unique event--where Mars will be double-bright in the heavens. 

 

01/07/?        Sep 26, 2003                                                   Yom Teruah 

 

                                               15/08/?         Nov 9, 2003      This is the anniversary date that Yarovam established sun worship in Yisrael.  While the financial markets did not collapse this day, some things did happen which could be significant.  First, the dollar’s decline against foreign currencies (like the EURO, etc) increased (causing new dollar lows).  Next, gold and silver entered a new bull market.  Finally, on Bul 16, 2003, the World Trade Organization found that the US was in violation of its rules on trade because of the tariffs Bush placed on steel imports.  Hence the WTO imposed sanctions which could open the door for a possible future trade war or at least contribute to one. 

 

29/08/?        Nov 23, 2003                                                   Total eclipse of the sun. 

 

03/10/?        Dec 26, 2003                                                   The US occupation in Iraq is not going well as US forces face almost daily attacks.  The loss of lives continues to grow (on the US side as well as the multiplied tens of thousands of Iraqis being killed).  The plans of Bush and his super rich colleagues to steal the oil in Iraq has faced continuous problems as the locals often attack the pipelines and facilities used by the US super rich to steal the oil.  So far, the Iraqi people have not willingly submitted to a US dictatorship and the theft of the Iraqi oilfields.  What will happen?  While the US plans on staying long enough to install a US directed puppet dictatorship of local Iraqis, as the US is trying to establish in Afghanistan (which may mean many years of occupation), the Iraqi resistance suggests that this plan may not work out.  It is conceivable that the US plans may collapse unexpectedly before the Bush people and their large corporate sponsors get to steal all of the oil.  Maybe, the US will be forced out (either with a collapse of the US dollar, a mistaken US attack on Iran or Syria, or some other unforeseen crisis).  At that time, the UN will surely take over in Iraq and commence building a new UN headquarters in Iraq so that Zechariah 5 can take place when the headquarters of the new world government/the UN officially moves there. 

 

03/10/?        Dec 26, 2003                                                   Along with the US loss and removal in Iraq, it is a certainty that the US will finally have to leave Afghanistan as well as the entire Middle East and South-Central Asia.  Already, tensions throughout the Muslim world is building up against the US and her British lackeys (the US sponsored and supported dictatorships will begin to fall as the Muslim fundamentalists gain strength--this means the end of the Saudi royal family and other US sponsored dictators, like the one in Pakistan).  The Muslim woman of the South (the fundamentalist faith of Islam) is developing and gaining strength daily throughout the Muslim world.  At some point in time, the four horns of Zechariah 1:19 will solidify and commence their active aggression and war against the US and Britain.  Probably an oil embargo will occur and a siege will start against America and Britain as the US dollar goes down the tubes.  Not only will this green Muslim empire (in the vein of Islamic fundamentalism) arise to oppose the US and Britain, but its power will have a profound role to play in the age end in the vein of the kingdom of the South which will oppose the kingdom of the North, as defined in Daniel. 

 

03/10/?        Dec 26, 2003                                                   Along with the increasing problems for America in the Middle East and South-Central Asia, it seems certain that at some point in time the Muslim terrorists (so freely allowed into the US by US politicians and authorities) will begin to do some real damage in America in the form of domestic terrorism.  This can involve chemical, biological or radiological attacks.  Surely, when this commences in earnest, the US president will declare marital law and the last vestiges of US freedoms will be gone forever. 

 

 

2004 

 

01/01/?        Mar 23, 2004                                                    Aviv 1, the 38th year in the Jubilee.  

 

                                               06/01/?         Mar 28, 2004    The planets Mercury, Venus, Mars, Saturn and Jupiter will come into a unique alignment which will not be repeated again for 30 years.  The moon will weave through the alignment which will continue until Passover. 

 

28/01/?        Apr 19, 2004                                                    Partial eclipse of the sun. 

 

02/02/?        Apr 22, 2004                                                    The earth passes through the Lyrids meteor belt. 

 

14/02/?        May 4, 2004                                                     Total eclipse of the moon. 

 

14/02/?        May 4, 2004                                                     The Eta Aquarid meteor shower occurs. 

 

01/03/?                                                        May 20, 2004   The 397th anniversary of the settlement at Jamestown. 

 

07/03/?                                                        May 26, 2004   Shavuot 

 

                                               20/03/?         Jun 8, 2004      For the first time in 121 1/2 years, the sun will be partially eclipsed by the planet Venus (“Old Farmer’s 2004 Almanac,” p. 79).  This is called a transit.  No one alive today has ever seen Venus transit the sun. 

 

                                               26/03/?         Jun 14, 2004    This concludes the fifth mark off of 390 days from May 21, 2003, over the Slick Clinton acquittal. 

 

                                               28/03/?         Jun 16, 2004    The 394th anniversary date of the abandonment and re-establishment of Jamestown in 1610 (Ezek 4:5; 9:8-11). Is this the end of 394 years of Israelite sin?  Or is it that Ephraim Yisrael has completed 390 years of accountable sin on the premise that there was a three-five years grace period at the beginning?

 

14/05/?        Jul 30, 2004                                                     The Delta Aquarid meteor shower occurs. 

 

27/05/?        Aug 12, 2004                                                   Earth passes through the Perseids meteor belt. 

 

01/07/?        Sep 15, 2004                                                   Yom Teruah 

 

25/07/?        Oct 9, 2004                                                       The Draconid meteor shower occurs. 

 

29/07/?        Oct 13, 2004                                                     Partial eclipse of the sun. 

 

07/08/?        Oct 21, 2004                                                     The Orinnoids meteor shower occurs.  

 

13/08/?        Oct 27, 2004                                                     Total eclipse of the moon. 

 

26/08/?        Nov 9, 2004                                                      The Taurids meteor shower occurs. 

 

05/09/?        Nov 18, 2004                                                   The Leonids meteor shower occurs. 

 

13/09/?        Nov 26, 2004                                                   The Andromedid meteor shower occurs. 

 

30/09/?        Dec 13, 2004                                                   The Giminids meteor shower occurs. 

 

09/10/?        Dec 22, 2004                                                   The Ursid meteor shower occurs. 

 

 

2005

 

22/10/?        Jan 4, 2005                                                      The Quadranid meteor shower occurs. 

 

01/01/?        Mar 11, 2005                                                    Aviv 1, the 39th year in the Jubilee, an intercalcary year. 

 

30/01/?        Apr 9, 2005                                                       Total eclipse of the sun. 

 

13/02/?        Apr 22, 2005                                                    The earth passes through the Lyrids meteor belt. 

 

25/02/?        May 4, 2005                                                     The Eta Aquarid meteor shower occurs. 

 

01/03/?                                                        May 9, 2005     The 398th anniversary of the settlement at Jamestown. 

 

                                               07/03/?         May 15, 2005   Shavuot. 

 

28/03/?                                                        Jun 6, 2005      The 395th anniversary date of the abandonment and re-establishment of Jamestown in 1610. 

 

                                               03/05/?         Jul 9, 2005       This concludes the sixth mark off of 390 days from Jun 14, 2004, over the Slick Clinton acquittal. 

 

24/05/?        Jul 30, 2005                                                     The Delta Aquarid meteor shower occurs. 

 

08/06/?        Aug 12, 2005                                                   Earth passes through the Perseids meteor belt. 

 

01/07/?        Sep 4, 2005                                                      Yom Teruah 

 

07/08/?        Oct 9, 2005                                                       The Draconid meteor shower occurs. 

 

19/08/?        Oct 21, 2005                                                     The Orinnoids meteor shower occurs. 

 

08/09/?        Nov 9, 2005                                                      The Taurids meteor shower occurs. 

 

17/09/?        Nov 18, 2005                                                   The Leonids meteor shower occurs. 

 

25/09/?        Nov 26, 2005                                                   The Andromedid meteor shower occurs. 

 

12/10/?        Dec 13, 2005                                                   The Giminids meteor shower occurs. 

 

21/10/?        Dec 22, 2005                                                   The Ursid meteor shower occurs. 

 

 

2006 

 

04/11/?        Jan 4, 2006                                                      The Quadranid meteor shower occurs. 

 

30/13/?        Mar 29, 2006                                                    Total eclipse of the sun which will sweep NE from Brazil across Africa to Mongolia. 

 

01/01/?        Mar 30, 2006                                                    Aviv 1, the 40th year in the Jubilee. 

 

24/01/?        Apr 22, 2006                                                    The earth passes through the Lyrids meteor belt. 

 

06/02/?        May 4, 2006                                                     The Eta Aquarid meteor shower occurs. 

 

01/03/?                                                        May 28, 2006   The 399th solar anniversary of the settlement at Jamestown. 

 

                                               06/03/?         Jun 2, 2006      Shavuot. 

 

28/03/?                                                        Jun 24, 2006    The 396th anniversary date of the abandonment and re-establishment of Jamestown in 1610. 

 

05/05/?        Jul 30, 2006                                                     The Delta Aquarid meteor shower occurs. 

 

                                               09/05/?         Aug 3, 2006     This day will conclude the seventh mark off of 390 days from Jul 9, 2005, over the Slick Clinton acquittal. 

 

18/05/?        Aug 12, 2006                                                   Earth passes through the Perseids meteor belt. 

 

01/07/?        Sep 23, 2006                                                   Yom Teruah 

 

17/07/?        Oct 9, 2006                                                       The Draconid meteor shower occurs. 

 

29/07/?        Oct 21, 2006                                                     The Orinnoids meteor shower occurs. 

 

19/08/?        Nov 9, 2006                                                      The Taurids meteor shower occurs. 

 

28/08/?        Nov 18, 2006                                                   The Leonids meteor shower occurs. 

 

06/09/?        Nov 26, 2006                                                   The Andromedid meteor shower occurs. 

 

23/09/?        Dec 13, 2006                                                   The Giminids meteor shower occurs. 

 

02/10/?        Dec 22, 2006                                                   The Ursid meteor shower occurs. 

 

 

2007 

 

15/10/?        Jan 4, 2007                                                      The Quadranid meteor shower occurs. 

 

01/01/?        Mar 20, 2007                                                    Aviv 1, the 41st year of the Jubilee.  Does this date conclude a mark off of a 40 year-period of trial on Yehudah? 

 

05/02/?        Apr 22, 2007                                                    The earth passes through the Lyrids meteor belt. 

 

17/02/?        May 4, 2007                                                     The Eta Aquarid meteor shower occurs. 

 

01/03/?                                                        May 18, 2007   The 400th solar anniversary of the settlement at Jamestown. 

 

                                               06/03/?         May 23, 2007   Shavuot. 

 

28/03/?                                                        Jun 14, 2007    The 396th anniversary date of the abandonment and re-establishment of Jamestown in 1610. 

 

16/05/?        Jul 30, 2007                                                     The Delta Aquarid meteor shower occurs. 

 

29/05/?        Aug 12, 2007                                                   Earth passes through the Perseids meteor belt. 

 

15/06/?        Aug 28, 2007                                                   Importantly, this day will conclude the eighth mark off of 390 days from Aug 3, 2006, over the Slick Clinton acquittal.  Will this acquittal date have any significance at this time? 

 

16/06/?        Aug 29, 2007                                                   Saturn enters the constellation of Leo, the Lion, and races toward Regulus, the king star. 

 

01/07/?                                                        Sep 12, 2007   Yom Teruah. 

 

                                               01/07/?         Sep 12, 2007   Per William Dankenbring, Saturn reaches a conjunction with Regulus, the king star, in the feet of Leo.  With this sign, the case can be made that YESHUA returns soon. 

 

27/07/?        Oct 8, 2007                                                       The Draconid meteor shower occurs. 

 

10/08/?        Oct 21, 2007                                                     The Orinnoids meteor shower occurs. 

 

29/08/?        Nov 9, 2007                                                      The Taurids meteor shower occurs. 

 

09/09/?        Nov 18, 2007                                                   The Leonids meteor shower occurs. 

 

17/09/?        Nov 26, 2007                                                   The Andromedid meteor shower occurs. 

 

04/10/?        Dec 13, 2007                                                   The Giminids meteor shower occurs. 

 

13/10/?        Dec 22, 2007                                                   The Ursid meteor shower occurs. 

 

 

2008 

 

26/10/?        Jan 4, 2008                                                      The Quadranid meteor shower occurs.  During a coming meteor shower (this one or a later one), will stars seem to fall on the US and Canada?  Thus, a future meteor shower may be significant.  If so, it could knock out or damage some or all of the 600 plus satellites now in orbit providing global communications (far worse than the disruption of beepers on May 18, 1998, by the failure of the Galaxy IV satellite).  The shower can potentially appear to be like hail, fire, brimstone and poisonous acids raining on earth.  Will it be an ante-typical fulfillment of Rev 6:13?  Will some people believe that it is the fulfillment of these Revelation prophecies?

 

01/01/?        Mar 8, 2008                                                      Aviv 1, the 42d year in the Jubilee, a Sabbath year and an intercalcary year.  If the barley is not found in the ear in Palestine by this date, the new year will slip to Apr 6, 2008 which is what the Jewish calculated calendar indicates. 

 

16/02/?        Apr 22, 2008                                                    The earth passes through the Lyrids meteor belt. 

 

28/02/?        May 4, 2008                                                     The Eta Aquarid meteor shower occurs. 

 

01/03/?                                                        May 6, 2008     The 401st anniversary of the settlement at Jamestown. 

 

                                               06/03/?         May 11, 2008   Shavuot. 

 

28/03/?                                                        Jun 2, 2008      The 398th anniversary date of the abandonment and re-establishment of Jamestown in 1610. 

 

26/05/?        Jul 30, 2008                                                     The Delta Aquarid meteor shower occurs. 

 

10/06/?        Aug 12, 2008                                                   Earth passes through the Perseids meteor belt. 

 

01/07/?        Sep 2, 2008                                                      Yom Teruah 

 

20/07/?        Sep 21, 2008                                                   This day will conclude the ninth mark off of 390 days from Aug 28, 2007, over the Slick Clinton acquittal. 

 

09/08/?        Oct 9, 2008                                                       The Draconid meteor shower occurs. 

 

21/08/?        Oct 21, 2008                                                     The Orinnoids meteor shower occurs. 

 

10/09/?        Nov 9, 2008                                                      The Taurids meteor shower occurs. 

 

19/09/?        Nov 18, 2008                                                   The Leonids meteor shower occurs. 

 

27/09/?        Nov 26, 2008                                                   The Andromedid meteor shower occurs. 

 

15/10/?        Dec 13, 2008                                                   The Giminids meteor shower occurs. 

 

24/10/?        Dec 22, 2008                                                   The Ursid meteor shower occurs. 

 

 

2009 

 

06/11/?        Jan 3, 2009                                                      The Quadranid meteor shower occurs. 

 

01/01/?        Mar 26, 2009                                                    Aviv 1, the 43d year in the Jubilee.

 

28/01/?        Apr 22, 2009                                                    The earth passes through the Lyrids meteor belt. 

 

10/02/?        May 4, 2009                                                     The Eta Aquarid meteor shower occurs. 

 

01/03/?                                                        May 25, 2009   The 402d anniversary of the settlement at Jamestown. 

 

                                               06/03/?         May 30, 2009   Shavuot. 

 

28/03/?                                                        Jun 21, 2009    The 399th anniversary date of the abandonment and re-establishment of Jamestown in 1610. 

 

08/05/?        Jul 30, 2009                                                     The Delta Aquarid meteor shower occurs. 

 

21/05/?        Aug 12, 2009                                                   Earth passes through the Perseids meteor belt. 

 

01/07/?                                                        Sep 20, 2009   Yom Teruah 

 

20/07/?        Oct 9, 2009                                                       The Draconid meteor shower occurs. 

 

27/07/?        Oct 16, 2009                                                     Importantly, this day will conclude the ninth mark off of 390 days from Sep 21, 2008, over the Slick Clinton acquittal.  Will this acquittal date have any significance at this time? 

 

03/08/?        Oct 21, 2009                                                     The Orinnoids meteor shower occurs. 

 

22/08/?        Nov 9, 2009                                                      The Taurids meteor shower occurs. 

 

01/09/?        Nov 18, 2009                                                   The Leonids meteor shower occurs. 

 

09/09/?        Nov 26, 2009                                                   The Andromedid meteor shower occurs. 

 

26/09/?        Dec 13, 2009                                                   The Giminids meteor shower occurs. 

 

06/10/?        Dec 22, 2009                                                   The Ursid meteor shower occurs. 

 

 

2010 

 

19/10/?        Jan 4, 2010                                                      The Quadranid meteor shower occurs. 

 

01/01/?        Mar 16, 2010                                                    Aviv 1, the 44th year in the Jubilee, an intercalcary year. 

 

09/02/?        Apr 22, 2010                                                    The earth passes through the Lyrids meteor belt. 

 

21/02/?        May 4, 2010                                                     The Eta Aquarid meteor shower occurs. 

 

01/03/?                                                        May 14, 2010   The 403d anniversary of the settlement at Jamestown. 

 

                                               06/03/?         May 19, 2010   Shavuot. 

 

28/03/?                                                        Jun 15, 2010    The 400th anniversary date of the abandonment and re-establishment of Jamestown in 1610. 

 

30/04/?        Jul 11, 2010                                                     Total eclipse of the sun. 

 

19/05/?        Jul 30, 2010                                                     The Delta Aquarid meteor shower occurs. 

 

06/06/?        Aug 15, 2010                                                   Earth passes through the Perseids meteor belt. 

 

01/07/?        Sep 9, 2010                                                      Yom Teruah 

 

                                                                                                If Suleiman’s command for the construction and/or rebuilding of Jerusalem in part or in total was given as early as 1527 (which is plausible), then the mark off of 483 years (suggested in Daniel 9:25) ends in 2010.

 

01/08/?        Oct 9, 2010                                                       The Draconid meteor shower occurs. 

 

13/08/?        Oct 21, 2010                                                     The Orinnoids meteor shower occurs. 

 

03/09/?        Nov 9, 2010                                                      The Taurids meteor shower occurs. 

 

04/09/?        Nov 10, 2010                                                   This day will conclude the tenth mark off of 390 days from Oct 16, 2009, over the Slick Clinton acquittal.  Will this acquittal date have any significance at this time? 

 

12/09/?        Nov 18, 2010                                                   The Leonids meteor shower occurs. 

 

20/09/?        Nov 26, 2010                                                   The Andromedid meteor shower occurs. 

 

07/10/?        Dec 13, 2010                                                   The Giminids meteor shower occurs. 

 

16/10/?        Dec 22, 2010                                                   The Ursid meteor shower occurs. 

 

 

2011 

 

01/01/?        Apr 4, 2011                                                       Aviv 1, the 45th year in the Jubilee. 

 

01/07/?        Sep 28, 2011                                                   Yom Teruah. 

 

10/09/?        Dec 5, 2011                                                      This day will conclude the eleventh mark off of 390 days from Nov 10, 2010 over the Slick Clinton acquittal.

 

 

2012 

 

01/01/?        Mar 24, 2012                                                    Aviv 1, the 46th year in the Jubilee. 

 

                                               17/03/?         Jun 6, 2012      Venus will transit the sun (“Old Farmer’s 2004 Almanac,” p. 79). 

 

01/07/?        Sep 16, 2012                                                   Yom Teruah. 

 

29/08/?        Nov 13, 2012                                                   Total eclipse of the sun. 

 

16/10/?        Dec 29, 2012                                                   Importantly, this day will conclude the twelfth mark off of 390 days from Dec 5, 2011 over the Slick Clinton acquittal.  Will this acquittal date have any significance at this time?  Are the evil Clintons and/or other US leaders of the same or equal caliber at last to be judged for their sins and the hurt that they put upon America?  Or will this judgment come earlier or later? 

 

 

2013 

 

01/01/?        Mar 13, 2013                                                    Aviv 1, the 47th year in the Jubilee and an intercalcary year. 

 

30/08/?        Nov 3, 2013                                                      Total eclipse of the sun. 

 

 

2014 

 

                                                                     Mar 21, 2014    Asteroid 2003-QQ47 (the size of the nation of Belgium and traveling at 20 miles a second) may strike earth near this date (Sep-Oct 2003 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 61). 

 

01/01/?        Apr 1, 2014                                                       Aviv 1, the 48th year in the Jubilee. 

 

 

2015 

 

                     Mar 20, 2015                                                    Total eclipse of the sun. 

 

01/01/?        Mar 21, 2015                                                    Aviv 1, the 49th year in the Jubilee, a Sabbath year. 

 

                                                                     2015-16            70th Jubilee since Yisrael was first given land.  Is this the start of the new division of land to Yisrael?  Ezekiel 45:1 to 47:13 would seem to place this division in Yehoyakhin’s 25th year or later.  But Yehoyakhin’s 17th year is more in line with what happened with Yehoshua and his entrance into the land following the Exodus.  Thus, 2015-2016 seems to be the Jubilee and the Jubilee is the time for the land to revert to its true owners.  Of course, the division can start at this time and may be completed some time later. 

 

 

2016 

 

01/01/?        Mar 10, 2016                                                    Aviv 1, year one in the new Jubilee, an intercalcary year. 

 

 

2019 

 

                                                                     Feb 1, 2019      2002 NT, a huge asteroid (2 km or 1.2 miles wide) with a 837-day orbit around the sun, is expected to rendezvous with earth.  If it should hit earth, it would cause a disaster with an explosive power of 1.2 million tons of TNT (Sep-Oct 2002 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 34-35).  

 

 

2020 

 

01/01/?        Mar 25, 2020                                                    Aviv 1, the 5th year in the Jubilee.

 

                                                                     2020                  The 483 years prophecy may end near this year (if it is dated by progressive counting from 1537).  But it could end in a prior year or in a later year. 

 

 

2021 

 

01/01/?        Mar 14, 2021                                                    Aviv 1, the 6th year in the Jubilee, an intercalcary year. 

 

 

2022 

 

01/01/?        Apr 2, 2022                                                       Aviv 1, the 7th year in the Jubilee. 

 

 

2023 

 

01/01/?                                                        2023                  Aviv 1, the 8th year in the Jubilee. 

 

 

2028 

 

                     2028                                       2028                  A large asteroid one mile wide is supposed to pass close to earth.  Scientists are divided over how close it will come.  Some say it will come within 30,000 miles and could even hit the earth while others say it might be as far as 600,000 miles away on its pass. 

 

 

2044 

 

                                                                     2044                  End of 56 years of transition to usher in the sovereign rule of YHWH YESHUA over all the earth. 

 

 

2045 

 

                                                                     2045                  End of forty years of drought (punishment) on Egypt, if it started in 2005 (per Ezek 29:1-16). 

 

                                                                     2045                  Start of 1,000-year millennium with all peoples and nations obedient and subservient to YHWH YESHUA’s rule and government from Jerusalem. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Appendix E--Possible Chronology of the Age End

 

 

Facts and Assumptions 

 

1.  Prophecy can be dual in fulfillment or even have repetitive fulfillments.  One must be careful about concluding that something like Daniel 11 has been fulfilled.  True, it seems to have had an ante-typical fulfillment in past ages.  But the great typical fulfillment is still essentially future in 2003.  The same is true with Matthew 24, most of the book of Revelation and many other prophecies. 

 

2.  For many reasons (certainly, for primary blessings and curses), Yakov-Yisrael’s name (of Yisrael) was placed upon the sons of Yosef (Ephraim and Manasseh--Gen 48:16).  Thus, in the age end, much of the punishment coming on Yisrael crystallizes on the two nations comprising Yosef’s sons.  Ephraim (ten times more people than Manasseh) received the birthright and major blessings and will be the primary recipient of the most severe punishment.  In Hosea and some of the prophets, Ephraim symbolizes Yisrael. 

 

3.  National and ethnic identifications, on the basis of genetics and/or race and racial origins, are of supreme importance in attempting to understand the Word and particularly in the context of prophecy.  These identifications must be contrasted with and distinguished from geographical, religious and other definitions. 

 

4.  Hence, modern Arab descendants of Ishmael occupy certain land areas in Jordan that geographically once were called Moab, Ammon, Seir and Edom in the Book.  While the Edomites, Ammonites and Moabites still exist as a people, they do not presently possess that old land area of Moab, Ammon, Edom or Seir now in Jordan.  The Edomites, Ammonites and Moabites are to be found in other modern areas and among other defined peoples. 

 

 

The Possible Constraints 

 

1.  Yechezkel’s 30th year and his first witness and trial of 430 believed days assuredly did cover an intercalcary year of 13 moons (Ezek 1:1-2; 3:15-16; 8:1).  Logically, any age end prophetic work would cover the same period.  The earliest recent year that met that criteria was 2000, on the premise that the new year started on March 7, 2000 (but this year did not offer the required events).  The next best year was 2002 and later ones will occur in 2005, 2008 and 2010 (intercalcary years occur about once every two or three years thereafter).  However, hindsight makes both 2000 and 2002 seem out of the question--leaving the years 2005, 2008 or 2010 as possibilities. Alternatively, Yechezkel’s 30th year can come in a regular calendar year.  Actually, any year from 2003 to 2010 (or later) is possible for Yechezkel’s 30th year, as discussed in former chapters.  But regardless of which year, it should make the final heptad of seven years start that year. 

 

2.  As far as fulfillment of the prophecies on the House of Yisrael, this writer allows that the final siege of 390 days could start in Yechezkel’s 31st or 32d years which also could be an intercalcary year or a regular year.  In the sense that the judgment comes on Yisrael after they have been warned by Yechezkel, the 32d year makes sense.  It is also curious that if the fulfillments start on the 12th day of the fourth month, 390 days later in an excessive intercalcary year takes one to the 17th day of the fourth month which just happens to be a very significant date for the destruction of the House of Yisrael. 

 

3.  As outlined in a prior chapter, Suleiman gave an order to build Jerusalem’s city walls and gates (and perhaps the city itself) possibly in 1537.  However, the Jaffa Gate dates the construction in 1538-1539 and the Jewish historian, Joseph ha-Kohen, put the date at 1540. 

 

4.  These dates of 1537-1539 are surely based upon historical data as accumulated by the Muslims--based upon their lunar calendar; which, over time, quickly becomes out of alignment with the Scriptural luni-solar calendar and the Julian-Gregory solar calendar.  Islam dates from about 622 CE, and the Muslim lunar calendar probably dates from then or earlier.  In attempting to convert this Moslem historical information into the Julian-Gregory solar calendar used by Christians, it is very easy that there could be some calculation errors with the reported dates of 1537-1539.  Therefore, the case can be made that the date of 1540, supplied by the Jewish historian, may be the better date. 

 

5.  Alternatively, the rebuilding of the city clearly started earlier.  Suleiman took power over Jerusalem in 1520 and certainly by 1536 he was in the process of rebuilding the city (as discussed earlier).  It is unclear when the Sultan gave the rebuilding order.  It could have come as early as 1520 or as late as 1540.  When added to 483 years, these dates translate to 2003 to 2023.  This dating scheme might kick the return of YESHUA into that time frame.  But the case can also be made that the date involved leads one to calculate the time when the rebuilding process will be re-commenced and concluded, rather than being the time of YESHUA’s return. 

 

6.  Daniel 9:25 has a related prophecy of a similar building 483 years later at the conclusion of things (per Lamsa’s translation).  If this prophecy is valid, with a connection to Ezekiel 40:1 (Yehoyakhin’s 25th year), then it might authenticate the year when the rebuilding is completed.  Alternatively, the 483 years may end around 2003-2023 and yet have no connection to Yechezkel’s 25th year which may come later (to signify the end of the construction of Jerusalem/the Temple and not the start of it).  

 

7.  Confirmation on the original ante-typical dates can be found in the building of Jerusalem during the days of Nechemyah (about Darius’ 20th year--Neh  1:1, 6:15, in the sense that Darius’ 2d year corresponds to Yechezkel’s 30th year), and the Maccabees (the Maccabees’ 16th/17th years also seem to be construction years on the rebuilding of Jerusalem--I Macc 2:1; 10:1-10, in the sense that the Maccabees 1st year corresponds to Yechezkel’s 34th year, when the abomination of desolation may possibly be set up). 

 

8.  The dating arrangement in Ezra, Nehemiah, Ezekiel, Haggai, Zechariah and I and II Maccabees all seem to be relevant to the age end chronology of events.  The dates in Jeremiah, and with the events associated with the First Temple, may or may not apply in some fashion. 

 

9.  Apparently, the dates offered in Ezekiel, Haggai and Zechariah probably reflect the dates that the prophets received the prophecies (saw the visions) and not necessarily the events themselves or any age ending prophetic work predicting the events.  Some of the events involved months and years in fulfillment (i.e., the prophecies on the fall of the House of Yisrael covered 390 days in duration.  Later, their fulfillments lasted another year and a half--making almost a total of three years for the presentation in Ezekiel 1-7).  

 

10.  The most that can be said for the dating arrangement is that the dates are essentially guidelines only.  The fulfillment of some prophecies often take place on the exact dates given (usually, of prophecies with a limited time duration).  Alternatively, the completion of the fulfillment of other prophetic events may follow by days, weeks or months.  For example, Ezekiel 8:1 suggests that the elders of Yehudah are sitting before the prophet (surely, on that date).  Either on this date or sometime thereafter the prophet received a vision or visions (from Ezek 8:2 to 11:24) where the actual fulfillment(s) may have taken place still later. 

 

11.  The point is that the dates are extremely important.  But they do not always precisely date all of the events stated in context.  Of course, they do provide a general outline (approximation) of the involved dating (certainly, in the sense that the events take place in a reasonable and/or logical time sequence after the stated dates). 

 

 

Some Problems

 

1.  The first problem is that Yechezkel’s 30th year didn’t mesh with 1995-97, as it might should have done so if 1966-67 was the Jubilee which is to allow the 30-year calculation, as indicated herein.  The important 30-year count may be actually from 1973 or a later year, as things may work out. 

 

2.  It is not completely clear why for the 30 years timing unless it has significance for some other reason (besides the Jubilee)--like some personal relationship to the age end Yechezkel witness.  Or in the age end, it may signify the year when Jewish religious access to the Temple Mount formally and definitely stopped.  Too, there is the reality that the year 1973 was the year when  the last Jewish-Arab war took place--in fulfillment of the final 2,520 years of punishment on Yehudah.  It may mark the countdown to the age end--in the sense of progressive counting with 1974 as being year one. 

 

3.  Second, as assessed in the Prologue, the determination of the Scriptural year for 2000 was extremely complicated.  Based upon the astronomical signs, the case could be made that the new moon of March 7, 2000, started the new year.  This writer followed that determination.  However, the Jewish calculated calendar started the new year, a month later in early April. 

 

4.  The years 2005 and 2008 will seemingly fit into exactly the same situation.  This writer has the Scriptural new years on March 11, 2005 and March 8, 2008.  The Jewish calculated calendar seems to slip both into April.  If the Jewish calculated calendar was/is correct for these years, then it means that the intercalcary years were in 1999, 2004 and 2007; and not in 2000, 2005 and 2008 as suggested in this work. 

 

5.  It would not be an important point except YESHUA said that the Pharisee Jews (succeeded by the Orthodox) sit in Moshe’s seat.  Thus, were/are they right in 2000, 2005 and/or 2008?  Regardless, this editor’s presentation herein has been made based upon the early start of the Scriptural year. 

 

6.  Third, there remains serious questions about whether the years of sin by Yisrael are to be 390 years or does a three to five-year delay or set off apply (as happened in the ante-type).  In terms of the present, must one address 390, 391, 392, 393, 394 or 395 years from a given start point.  Here, even the start point can be in some confusion in the sense of 1610 for Jamestown, 1620 for Plymouth Rock or 1611-1612 for the King James Scriptures. 

 

7.  If this set off or delay applies, when does the count end--at the first signs of Yakov’s Trouble, the year following the start of Yakov’s Trouble, the year that the first embargo starts, the year that the final siege commences, or the year when the final siege ends and the actual captivity starts for the survivors? 

 

8.  Even with a count down from the correct start year, there always remains the question of whether the count is by inclusive counting or progressive counting.  Obviously, all of these issues involve extremely complicated determinations (that will easily allow the student of truth to be off by a year or two). 

 

9.  Finally, the point must be made that this writer’s calculation of Yechezkel’s 30th year could be in 2003 or a later year for that matter.  Hence, as noted throughout this publication, any year from 2003 on could prove to be Yechezkel’s 30th year. 

 

10.  On the premise that Yechezkel’s 30th and/or 32d years could come in an intercalcary year, the intercalcary years have figured into the establishment of the dates in the following presentation.  Thus, Yechezkel’s 30th, 32d and 35th Scriptural years have been calculated hereafter on the basis of them being intercalcary years.  Of course, it may work out that these years are not intercalcary years.  Anyway, it has been necessary to incorporate the 13-month intercalcary years into the dating in order to address long prophetic dates--like 1,260; 1,290; and 1,335 days. 

 

11.  The reasons for this present determination to follow have been outlined in a prior chapter.  But prophecy and dating methods are enormously complicated.  Always, hindsight is better than foresight.  So subsequent developments may spell out that there could be a one or two years’ slippage in dates. 

 

12.  Consequently, the presentation of events for Yechezkel’s 30th year may be correct as presented hereafter in Appendix E.  But the complication arises in trying to date them.  Thus, it must be accepted that the following presentation is very approximate (and can be wrong). 

 

 

Legend (for the Below Presentation) 

 

1.  The dating of Yechezkel’s years are the best method in understanding the age ending chronology.  Yechezkel’s 30th year = Yehoyakhin’s 5th year of captivity = Tzidkiyahu’s 4th year = Darius’ 2d year (Hystaspes, Artaxerxes and/or Darius I) = Yirmeyahu’s 34th or 35th year = perhaps Yehoshua’s 1st or 2d year or his 41st or 42d year of the Jubilee; and likely Antiochus Epiphanies’ 5th year (his 9th year was year 145 in the Seleucid-Grecian calendar, and the Maccabees’ 1st year was in the Greek year 145 or 168 BCE).  Yechezkel’s 34th year also probably equates to Hoshea’s 10th year under Assyrian dominion and Hizkiyahu’s 7th year. 

 

2.  The years associated with Cyrus to be noted probably also connect to this scheme, but they are very complicated to reconcile because there is some uncertainty associated with the reigns of the Mede and Persian kings.  It is possible that Cyrus’ release of the Jews to return to Jerusalem somehow relates to the Jewish conquest of Jerusalem in the 1967 Six Day War and the stoppage on the building of the Temple to the actions of the Arabs and the Israeli court decisions in 1969-1979 to prohibit religious Jews from worshipping on the Temple Mount (as allowed in a prior chapter).  Yet, there is difficulty here in trying to tie down the exact significant date in the 1970s.

 

3.  If the tie exists, it might suggest that there was some 30 years between Cyrus’ 2d year (when work stopped on the Temple Mount) and Darius’ 2d year, which (by progressive counting) may correspond with the 1970s to the early 21st century.  If this method holds, it would allow the age end dating of the years mentioned in Daniel for Cyrus.  But again, this is extremely uncertain. 

 

4.  Dates:  Hebrew Day/Hebrew Month/Year, starting on Aviv 1 for various kings or other means of year identification, are generally recorded by inclusive counting.  Y means Yehoshua (Joshua); E means Ezekiel, J means Jehoiachin, Z means Zedekiah, C means Cyrus, D means Darius Hystaspes and AE/M means Antiochus Epiphanies/Maccabees, when combined with the years associated with those persons.  Christian sun worship calendar dates are in the regular sun worship mode.  Years in bold face are predicated upon the possible prophetic implications of the book of Ezekiel. 

 

 

EVENTS AND THEIR DATES 

 

Firm Date                            Possible Date 

Hebrew                                Hebrew                                   Event (Scriptures)

 

 

Possibly Yechezkel’s 28th Year

 

01/01/03J                                                                               Aviv 1 (Rishon Be’Aviv).  Is this Yehoyakhin’s 3d year (of captivity), and Antiochus Epiphanies/Maccabees’ 3d year (I Macc 1:20, 54; 2:1; 10:1-10)?  This year may be a regular year. 

 

                                               13/09/?                                    Amos 1:1 is dated two years before the earthquake.  It is unclear which earthquake is involved.  But it could be one possibly coming late in Yechezkel’s 30th year to clear the Temple site for construction in that year (Hag 2:1-9; Zech 1:12) or one by Yechezkel’s 30th year in the House of Yisrael.  Isaiah 34:4 and Rev 6:12-14 both also predict large earthquakes in about Yechezkel’s 33d year.  If these are the ones involved in Amos, then this prophesy must be dated to 31E.  If one of these dates is valid, it then is possible to date much of the book of Amos. 

 

 

Possibly Yechezkel’s 29th Year 

 

01/01/04J                                                                               Aviv 1 (Rishon Be’Aviv).  Is this Yehoyakhin’s 4th year (of captivity); Darius’ 1st year (Ezra 4:5-24; Jer 36:9; Ezek 1:1; Dan 9:1-2; Hag 1:1; Zech 1:1); and Antiochus Epiphanies/Maccabees’ 4th year (I Macc 1:20, 54: 2:1; 10:1-10)?  This year may be a regular year. 

 

                                                                                                In one year, the House of Yisrael’s crops will fail (Isa 32:9-17)?  Will the coming mixed up weather (rain/floods in one area and drought in another), coupled with a bug or locust invasion (which could start in Yechezkel’s 30th year), bring on the crisis?  The US grain harvest starts in May each year--so perhaps the harvest will start to fail as early as the spring of Yechezkel’s 30th or 31st year and really collapse by the fall of that year.  This prophecy also could be a Yechezkel’s 32d year prophecy with the loss of crops that year. 

 

                                               01/07/01C                               Possibly by now, religious Jews have gained access to the Temple Mount and built an altar and commenced the daily sacrifice (per Ezra 3:1-2).  Some clearing of the Temple site or some actual construction could start this early. 

 

                                               01/07/04J                                There was to be an astronomical sign of a pregnant woman clothed with the sun, and the moon under her feet and on her head a crown of 12 stars.  A red dragon appears on the scene having 7 heads (with 7 crowns) and 10 horns.  He draws a third part of the stars and cast them to the earth. The dragon stood before the woman to devour her child upon its birth.  She brings forth a man child (the new moon) who will shepherd the nations.  This event could come sometime before The MESSIAH returns.  Could it have occurred partially in 5 BCE or earlier with the birth of YESHUA as the man child and Yisrael as the woman?  If so, it was in ante-type since the prophecy is an age end one and the man child is likely one or both of the first two prophets or the final two witnesses and/or the woman is Yisrael or the congregation of the very elect (Rev 12:1-5).  This sign possibly links in some way to the formation of Philadelphia.  Even if this sign is for the start of Philadelphia (which may occur at Sukkot one year), it might be that it also applies to the first two prophets or the final two witnesses (as in the case of the man child who might be linked to the two final witnesses and particularly Eliyahu). 

 

                                               01/07/04J                                To interpret this text, the Internet offered that at Rosh Hashanah (in 1999, per the Internet) 7 years before the return of The MESSIAH (which was estimated to be in 2006 by that interpreter), there will be a “OTh B’Shamayim” (Sign-[OTh--Hebrew--aleph, tav] in the heavens).  “Beithula (Virgo) will have within her an alignment of all the planets along with HaL’vana (the moon).  (L’vana represents Mashiach and Yis’rael.)  Beithula will be about to give birth to L’vana.  Above L’vana will be positioned the constellation ‘Bernice’s hair’ a crown of twelve stars!  Also to have the possibility of seeing this sign, Hama (the sun) will have to be at the horizon; thus clothing Beithula with the Hama.  To complete it all positioned below the thighs of Beithula is TANAIM (Draco), also called Livi’than, waiting to devour the child -- The L’vana = Mashiach Yeshua = Yis’rael.  Ancient Jewish sources identified Tanaim (the dragon) and Livi’than with Mashiach Sheker (The False Messiah).  The Livi’than was known as a creature with 7 heads and 10 horns.  This ‘OTh’ has NEVER happened before and will NEVER happen again... B’Shem HaShem,” Jan-Feb 1998 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 86 (Rev 12:1-5). 

 

                                               01/07/04J                                In terms of the above interpretation, the Internet author suggested 1999 for this event on the premise that YESHUA returns in 2006.  In view of the planetary alignments on going in 2000, this was also a possible year.  Yisrael is the woman (perhaps ultimately the very elect grouping in the House of Yisrael since it will be this very elect group of Philadelphians which will flee to the wilderness for safety)--involving the constellation Virgo combined with a unique planetary alignment.  Whenever the sign occurs, the man child (the birth of the moon) could be the sign to formally announce the appearance or work of either (or both) of the first two prophets or the final two witnesses.  The red dragon is surely Satan himself, but perhaps manifested as a restored Roman Empire--United Europe.  The Zodiac sign of Virgo supposedly occurs from Aug 23 to Sep 22.  So it fits with Yom Teruah in 1999, 2001, 2002 and 2004 (Rev 12:1-5). 

 

                                               01/07/04J                                While the above interpretation suggested its occurrence on Rosh Hashanah in 1999, Yom Teruah in later years actually looked better. The new moon was in the sign of astronomical Virgo on Sep 17-20, 2001 (“The Old Farmer’s 2001 Almanac,” p. 78).  The next option was 2002 where the beginning visible, crescent moon was in the astronomical Virgo on September 8-10 (“The Old Farmer’s 2002 Almanac,” p. 84).  But was this sign seen in 2001 or 2002?  The answer seems to be no.  The next option is the Yom Teruah moon on Sep 15, 2004.  For 2004, the “Old Farmer’s Almanac 2004” offered a couple of interesting possibilities.  The Virgo sign will correspond to the new moon astronomically on Sep 15-17, 2004 (p. 64) and astrologically on Sep 13-14, 2004 (ibid, p. 189).  This writer is unfamiliar with the difference between the astronomical and astrological features of the Virgo sign.  But it is fascinating that they both come together the evening and night of Sep 14-15, 2004 (actually, the new moon occurs at 4:28 PM on Sep 14th in Jerusalem, meaning that the new moon day is technically on Sep 15th, which starts at sundown on Sep 14th).  This unusual occurrence does not always happen with the September new moon (it didn’t happen in 2002; and in 2001, the conjunction only occurred on Sep 17, 2001).  Since the visible presence of Yom Teruah probably will be seen on Sep 15-17, 2003 (as a visible crescent), this conjunction may be relevant.  As a minimum, this sign may be seen anytime from 2003 on. 

 

                                               15/07/04J                                Possible start of the beginning formal organization of Philadelphia as a Sabbathkeeping and mitzwot observant group--the very elect, Daughter of Zion (Zech 2:7, 10)?  It will likely be an outgrowth of the beginnings of a group of Sunday keepers, possibly at Sukkot (as discussed earlier).  Will one or more of the coming prophets or witnesses (like Yohanan?) have a role to play in the forming of this group (Rev 3:7-13; Matt 24:24; Phil 1:1-4:23; II Kg 19:1-5; Isa 22:20-25; Jer 4:31)?  As a minimum, it is plausible that the very elect daughter of Zion and perhaps her members at least begin some process of identification at this time.  This organization may happen in the US (perhaps somewhere in the US West or Pacific Northwest).  Logically, the apostle Yohanan may have a role in organizing this group--perhaps in his person or by mental telepathy. 

 

                                               15/07/04J                                Does the Baptism of Fire for service come now upon some part of the surfacing of the Philadelphia group (Joel 2:28-30; Acts 1:8; 2:1-4, 17-18)?  Possibly, the Baptism of Fire comes now and the Baptism of The RUACH HA KODESH comes later as the latter rain for the entire group once it is defined and numbered (Zech 9:1-12; 10:1; Joel 2:23; Acts 1:2; Hos 6:3; Jas 1:18; 5:7; Jer 5:24)?  Does the Apostle Yohanan (one of the real two witnesses) administer both aspects of the spiritual Baptism? 

 

 

Possibly Yechezkel’s 30th Year 

 

01/01/05J                                                                               Aviv 1 (Rishon Be’Aviv).  Is this Yehoyakhin’s 5th year (of captivity); Darius’ 2d year (Ezra 4:5-24; Jer 36:9; Ezek 1:1; Dan 9:1-2; Hag 1:1; Zech 1:1); and Antiochus Epiphanies/Maccabees’ 5th year (I Macc 1:20, 54: 2:1; 10:1-10)?  This year probably should date some thirty years from an earlier event of some significance--perhaps in the 1970s (Ezek 1:1).  This year may be an intercalcary year. 

 

01/01/05J                                                                               Following the example of the nations’ leaders and role models (like the morally depraved Bill Clinton and the lying and hypocritical George W. Bush), the downward plunge in morality of the House of Yisrael nations accelerates--if that’s possible (I Tim 4:1-3; II Tim 3:1-8, 12; 4:3-4; II Pet 3:3-4; Jude 1:18-19). 

 

01/01/05J                                                                               Acceptance and presence of sodomites (like Slick Clinton and Monica Lewinsky), sexual perverts and queers intensify in the House of Yisrael nations--as in the times of Lot (Lu 17:28-30; Gen 19:1-29). 

 

01/01/05J                                                                               Acceptance and presence of interracial sex and miscegenation increase dramatically in the House of Yisrael, as in the times of Noah (Gen 6:2; Matt 24:37-38; Lu 17:26-27). 

 

01/01/05J                                                                               In the days of Noah, The ELOHIM saw that the wickedness (Hebrew “ra”) of Adam was great upon the earth and that every imagination of the thoughts of his heart (all the heart’s desires) was only (on) evil continually (Gen 6:5).  A footnote in the “Companion Bible” says that ra here means lewdness or moral depravity.  This is very descriptive of the US and Britain in the 21st century. 

 

01/01/05J                                                                               Acceptance, presence and prevalence of the occult and New Age faiths in the context of a great ecumenical movement increase within Christendom at large and particularly in the House of Yisrael nations. 

 

01/01/05J                                                                               Acceptance and presence of outcome based education, thought crimes (so-called hate crimes), apparent subliminal messages over TV, radio, etc accelerate in Christian, sun worshipping Yisrael.  The population becomes even more like mesmerized zombies and robots incapable of logic and reason.  Their minds and mentalities have been seared of independent thought.  They are ready for the thought control of the New World Order. 

 

01/01/05J                                                                               The House of Yisrael is very complacent, arrogant, proud, smug, unconcerned, apathetic and indifferent (Jer 5:12-13; 14:15).  Clearly, nothing concerns Americans and nothing moves them.  Even the problems in the Balkans’ war, the US terrorist attacks and the Bush war on Iraq (and their seriousness) could not really take people’s minds off of sports, entertainment, pleasure and living the “good life” (whatever that is).  Most Americans have been far more concerned with what they were going to buy at the big mall or what they would eat at the a local restaurant than what all Slick Clinton and George W. Bush were doing at home or abroad.  Nobody in the generic sense has cared about anything except themselves.  America is ripe for judgment. 

 

                                               01/01/05J                                Trouble accelerates in the House of Yisrael nations. 

 

                                               01/01/05J                                Is this the beginning phase-in of seven years of Yakov’s Trouble on fleshly Yisrael (to end by Yechezkel’s 37th-39th years)? 

 

                                               01/01/05J                                Is this the start of the time of trouble mentioned by Daniel (Dan 12:1).  Or did it happen earlier on the 15th day of the 8th month in a prior year (fulfilling the date that Yarovam formally set up sun worship in Yisrael)?  Or will it occur later? 

 

                                                                                                Will John Paul II die and Sixtus Six become Pope? Or will 6’s rise to power be temporarily delayed by another short term Pope?  Is Sixtus Six a racial Amalekite?  There is now some speculation that Jewish Cardinal Lustiger of France, a very likely Amalekite, will be the next Pope (Aug-Sep 1999 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 79).  If so, will he take the name of Peter as alleged or Sixtus? 

 

                                                                                                With financial troubles, problems in the Balkans and in Iraq, a political crisis over the US 2000 elections, Arab terrorism (like the attacks on the Pentagon and the NY Trade Center and perhaps more from the fall out of the US war on Iraq), and a growing loss of support for Big Brother, all coming at a time when the US has or is ready to declare martial law, the president will turn to new wars and new attacks to hopefully regain credibility and allow him to declare his dictatorship (if he has not yet done so and if the dollar still has any value to allow a new US war against some other state).  While the US president may start something further or get into a new confrontation with Russia, with China or somebody else, the Bush administration’s threats of war against the so-called axis of evil always remains on the drawing board, if the US has any military forces left after the US war in Iraq.  But this thing can quickly accelerate and the US can find herself even more alone (except for the rest of the House of Yisrael and maybe the Jews). 

 

                                                                                                But whoever else Big Brother attacks or opposes--the US enemies will be strengthened and probably prevail by initiating more terrorist attacks upon the US.  Such a crisis would create a situation allowing the president to declare marital law.  The Muslims, in particular at some point in time, may retaliate with biological attacks on perhaps 100-120 US cities using deadly anthrax toxin or botulism.  Such a biological attack could quickly kill 40 million or more people and maybe an ante-type of the later coming fifth trumpet of the demonic invasion.  Also, terrorist attacks from the Serbs and Russians can occur as well in view of the Balkans’ war.  If this scenario develops about the time of the total financial collapse, Big Brother will surely declare martial law and suspend the Constitution if he has not already done so.  In any case, US attacks on Iraq, Afghanistan and Serbia have set the stage for the four horn powers discussed herein to ally and plan an attack upon the US, her Anglo-Saxon-Celtic allies; and in time, on the state of Israel (Zech 1:18-19). 

 

                                                                                                By now, religious Jews possibly may be worshipping/praying on the Temple Mount.  Despite any Israeli government agreements with the Arabs precluding the building of the Temple (if any exist at this time from the earlier trouble on the Temple Mount), something will eventually happen and the Temple’s cornerstones will be laid.  Maybe, they are laid now, earlier or later by religious Jews (Ezra 3:8; I Kg 6:1).  For sure, there may be an effort by now to build an altar and/or lay the cornerstones.  When this event happens, it will cause another enormous explosion of trouble in both the Christian and Muslim worlds.  Such an event may precipitate another Moslem call for jihad.  Surely, many secularist Amalekite Jews will be upset as well (because they do not want the Temple rebuilt). 

 

                                               ?/02/02C                                 If religious Jews are in control of some part of the Temple Mount, they may proceed to begin construction of the Third Temple by perhaps laying the foundation or foundation stones by now (per I Kg 6:1). 

 

                                                                                                If and when religious Jews eventually do gain access to the Temple Mount, and if and when they attempt to build an altar (whether stopped or not), there will be a great outcry in the Muslim world (to include cries for a jihad).  There may be a hastily called conference between the Jews and the Muslims which might make an agreement that allows religious Jews to have some part of the Temple Mount to worship upon.  Perhaps this agreement will not allow the rebuilding of the Temple at this time. 

 

                                                                                                For sure, by now, more preparations are being made by religious Jews for the construction of the Temple.  Is it possible that actual construction on the Temple lasts in total for around 490 days (as suggested as an ante-type in Dan 9:24).  Probably, the Temple is largely finished by Yechezkel’s 34th year (or even later on 03/12/06D, after Satan sits in it), but the work is stopped on it--evidently, sometime after construction commences (this likelihood would possibly suggest a construction time of about 430 days after work reconvenes).  Possibly, the Jews are apathetic and indifferent about the work--which helps to allow the temporary stoppage(s). 

 

                                                                                                Probably Christian and Muslim pressures against the Jews force the religious Jews on the Temple Mount to dispense with their construction efforts at some point in time.  Of course, a worldwide jihad and coming trouble on the US will mean that the Jews have no allies.  Also, Christian Israelites may also come to Jerusalem and start protesting and causing trouble at the Temple work site to make the Jews commence a temporary halt in work. 

 

                                                                                                If there has not been a summit meeting of the Palestinians and the Jews over the Jewish presence on the Temple Mount by now, there will likely be one soon if the Jews display an effort towards rebuilding the Temple.  Surely, a meeting will take place and serve to produce an agreement between the two parties which might curtail Jewish efforts to rebuild the Temple.  While a new seven year peace pact could arise this early, it is more likely that the actual seven years treaty of Daniel 9:26-27 might come a little later.  While the final treaty appears still future, it is possible that there could be a temporary agreement of sorts between the Israelis and Arabs at this time (which would guarantee the Jews some access to the Temple Mount).  But any temporary agreement will not last long as trouble will continue.  Sharon has stated his desire for a temporary agreement. 

 

                                                                                                So eventually, from an agreement with the Arabs and/or prodding from Christian Amalekite leaders (in the Catholic and leading Protestant Churches), work at the Third Temple site will be stopped at some point in time for at least 30, 70 or more days.  This trouble at the building site and halt of the work could be the typical fulfillment of what happened with the Amalek-Samaritans at the Second Temple. 

 

                                               12/04/05J                                Possibly an age end Yechezkel witness starts as early as Yechezkel’s 30th year (Ezek 4).  It probably starts from Jerusalem; or alternatively, possibly from New York City (the head of the present Babylonian world system), Iraq (the geographical Babylon on the Euphrates), Rome (the religious Babylon and home of the modern Babylonian people), Washington, DC or some other place.  Too, this witness could conceivably start a few days later.  Maybe, the prophet will lie upon his sides for 430 days as the prophecy suggests.  The initial focus of the Yechezkel message will be on what happens in the coming 390-day siege (Ezek 5-7).  If this is an excessive intercalcary year, the 390 days of prophesying will end by the 17th day of the fourth month of Yechezkel’s 31st year.  If the additional 40 days witness to Yehudah follows immediately, the prophesy will end by about the 28th day of the fifth month of the 31st year. 

 

                                               12/04/05J                                If the Yechezkel witness does materialize, as is possible, the prophet will be surrounded (Ezek 2:6) by briers and thorns (Amalekites/Kenites from Kain) and scorpions (demons). 

 

                                               12/04/05J                                Yechezkel made an amazing prophecy for Yisrael which seems to have been dated in Yehoyakhin’s 27th year (Ezek 29:21).  As will be covered in later comments, the prophecy was that when Yisrael’s horn buds (becomes a state again), the words of Yechezkel are to be heard (“Bible Light on the News,” v. 9, no. 2, p. 3).  The Ronald Knox translation gives this as “When that day comes, new life shall spring forth from the stock of Israel” (“The Word The Bible From 26 Translations,” p. 1702).  The classic time for this fulfillment has to be if and when a Yechezkel message occurs for Yisrael.  In terms of the state of Israel, this text may have something to do with the rebuilding of the Temple. 

 

                                                                                                A possible Yirmeyahu work (or something similar to complete the first pair of prophets) is commissioned visibly or physically to the nations (lost tribes of Yisrael) or is it later?  Will the Yirmeyahu work come from Jerusalem, London or Scotland? (Jer 1:4-5; 25:15-17; 36:1-2; I Macc 2:4-8; Matt 16:14).  Like Yechezkel, Yirmeyahu’s message to the House of Yisrael has been delivered in the sense that the Christian Israelites have had his words in their “Christian Bibles.”  Nothing further is required prophetically.  However, an option of a live Yirmeyahu presence, in conjunction with a live Yechezkel work, is plausible.  Alternatively, these two prophets could do their work on a spiritual plane using mental telepathy.  Finally, it is possible that two modern contemporary men arrive on the scene as prophets and do their work in the vein of the spirits of Yechezkel and Yirmeyahu (or from influence of mental telepathy from Yechezkel and Yirmeyahu or whomever). 

 

                                                                                                In the ante-type, Yirmeyahu was specifically commissioned to oversee the goyim; to root up, pull down, destroy and overthrow; and to build and plant (Jer 1:10).  This commission has been taken by many students as relating to Yirmeyahu’s work of overseeing the destruction of Yehudah, the preservation of the Temple artifacts and the movement of the throne of David and the kingly line from Jerusalem to the House of Yisrael in the West.  In view of the fact that many of Yirmeyahu’s prophecies concern the fall of the Houses of Yisrael (which had actually fallen some 140 years or so earlier) and Yehudah, is it not entirely logical that any Yirmeyahu work in the age end will focus upon the recovery of the hidden Temple artifacts; the fall of the House of Yisrael nations; and the overthrow and movement of the throne of David from Yisrael in the West to a temporary intermediate location and eventually to Palestine to be united with Philadelphia for preservation?  Thus, this may be the thrust of the work of any Yirmeyahu witness in the age end.  

 

                                                                                                An ante-type of the age end conglomerate Beast, the four horns (Babylon/Iraq, Persia/Iran, Greece/Syria and Rome/Eastern head at Moscow) are on the scene as enemies of the Israeli state and House of Yisrael nations?  They seem to be well established by 2003, but may not be formally allied into one discernible group until later.  While Iraq was bombed into oblivion by the US in Mar-Apr 2003, there always is some question about how far the US would go with war upon the remaining three horns.  If the US does continue oppressing the horns, they will eventually come together to defeat America. 

 

                                                                                                By now (or possibly as late as the 5th or 6th months), there will perhaps be two prophets physically on the world scene, visibly presenting truth--the first time men have preached real truth in the flesh since apostolic times.  These two will be ante-types of the final two witnesses and at some point, Christendom might interpret their work that way (as the two witnesses to come).  Perhaps their work will involve the spirits or persons of Yechezkel and Yirmeyahu, the two witnesses for the fall of Jerusalem in 554 BCE, or two other personages.  While these witnesses could be physically accomplished by two men (either the prophets themselves or two contemporary and physical men or works of this age), it must be allowed that these witnesses could be accomplished by mental telepathy of the two prophets or two messengers. 

 

                                                                                                The first two prophets (Yechezkel and Yirmeyahu?) may point out the hypocrisy and sin among the Christian Israelites and their national leaders with a proclamation of coming judgment (of destruction and slavery) upon the House of Yisrael nations for sin.  While their words will be hated by the Christian Israelite people and rejected outright by the collective House of Yisrael nations, their prophetic pronouncements of doom on the House of Yisrael will authenticate them when the doom eventually comes true.  As a minimum, they will address Yechezkel 5-7. 

 

                                                                                                The House of Yisrael is impudent, stubborn, rebellious, hard hearted, desperately wicked and will not listen to the prophets’ call to repent (Isa 6:8-10; 29:13; 30:8-14; Jer 3:12-13; 5:3, 11-14, 6:10, 16-21; 7:22-28; 17:23; 18:12-13; 18-23; 20:3-4, 23-33; 22:21; 23:8-9, 33; 25:4-7; 32:33; 44:4-5; Ezek 2:3-8; 3:5-9, 27; 12:2, 22-25, 27-28; 20:3-4, 23-33; 23:8-9; 33:30-33; Hos 4:11-16; 9:7; 11:1-2, 7; Am 2:11-12; 5:10; 7:10-13; Mic 2:11). 

 

                                               ?/04/04Z                                  Possible start in America or Britain of False Prophet Hananiah--saying everything is OK--contrary to Yechezkel and Yirmeyahu? (Jer 28:1). 

 

                                                                                                A series of volcanic mountains are ready to explode in the Western US--much like as happened some years ago with Mount St. Helens.  US, state, and media authorities have purposely hid this developing situation from the gullible public least they get excited and tourism and business suffer.  In 1998-2003, Mounts Baker, Rainier and St. Helens in Washington state were all bulging and acting like they were ready to blow with ash and lava.  Some in Oregon and California were acting suspicious as well.  The Yellowstone Park area was rumbling and venting heat suggesting that it too could explode as a volcano.  Perhaps some or all of these sites will start erupting--maybe, one or two initially and then all of them later.  When they start, the crises will probably last for well over a year.  One or more of these volcanoes will cause enormous destruction and create a flow of ash to spew into the atmosphere to pollute much of the US.  If the nation is in much of a drought, this ash will persist and create real problems without the air cleaning benefits of rain.  It might be possible to relate a darkening flow of ash (making the sun black and the moon like blood) over the US or parts of the world as an ante-typical fulfillment of the sixth seal of Rev 6:12.  This event, if serious, will be just one more reason for Big Brother to declare a state of emergency. 

 

                                                                                                Significant breaks in some of the US faults are long overdue (particularly in Southern California with the famous San Andreas fault, and with the New Madrid fault running in Southern Missouri to Seattle).  Will there be a major destructive earthquake in the US by Yechezkel’s 30th year?  Could this be an ante-type of the earthquake at Revelation 6:12, 14; which occurs in conjunction with the blackened skies from the volcanic ash? 

 

                                                                                                The last several years has seen any number of reports offering very credible evidence on locating Noah’s Ark high on the slopes of Mount Ararat in Eastern Turkey.  The CIA released high resolution photographs in 1997 and 1998 which showed an “Ararat Anomaly” which is said to be an elliptical shape under the summit’s ice cap (Mar 1998 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 25).  Will part or all of Noah’s Ark (evidently it has broken into two parts on the mountain slopes) be formally revealed at some point in time?  The Ark’s revelation during the first half of the last heptad (and particularly during the time frame that a major drought will be in place), seems highly possible.  This will be quite a fantastic witness to the world whenever it does happen. 

 

                                               ?/04/05J                                  After YHWH starts to break the pride of Yisrael’s power (which started in the fall of 2000 with a stock market fall, other financial problems and the desecration of Yosef’s tomb and then with the Sep 11, 2001, attacks in Washington and New York), the next thing in sequence is a terrible drought.  Likely, one of the acts of the first two prophets will be a declared rolling drought upon the House of Yisrael lands (with rain in isolated places).  Could this drought come in Yechezkel’s 30th or 31st year, three months before the harvest, as announced by Amos (Lev 26:19-20; Deut 28:23-24; Amos 4:6-9; Hag 1:11; Ezek 4:9-13; Joel 1:16-20; Jer 14:1-6)?  If it starts three months before the harvest and if the US wheat crop is lost, then more major problems will ensue for America. 

 

                                               ?/05/05J                                  Is this a locust invasion, ante-typical of the later demonic release in the fifth trumpet, or does it occur earlier or later (Joel 2:1-9, 25)?  A locust or bug invasion, coupled with a drought, will insure a complete agricultural disaster in Yisrael (as predicted a year earlier, from Isa 32:9-17). 

 

                                               01/06/02D                               (Hag 1:1).  There possibly will be two prophets at work in the vein of what Haggai and Zekharyah did during Second Temple days.  Will these two prophets be the first two prophets (Yechezkel and Yirmeyahu) who may have started their work on the twelfth day of the fourth month of Yechezkel’s 30th year? 

 

                                               01/06/02D                               Alternatively, Zechariah 4 allows that the two anointed ones (likely the final two witnesses of Rev 11) start their work in the days when the prophecies of Haggai and Zekharyah are starting to be fulfilled.  As discussed in previous comments, the evidence is massive that the final two witnesses may have a ministry of seven years, with the first half of the heptad being non-public while the last half is a public ministry of preaching the Good News to the world.  Though this ministry of the final two witnesses may not be public, this early, the two witnesses could be physically present (in Jerusalem) and simply involved with overseeing the establishment and operations of the Temple and perhaps some oversight of the election and particularly the organization and functioning of Philadelphia (Zech 1:20; 4:1-14; Mal 1-4; Matt 17:11; Rev 11:1-6).  Of course, it is also possible that the final two witnesses are not even physically present, but do their work of the first half of the last heptad from behind the scenes by using mental telepathy. 

 

                                               01/06/02D                               The two prophets (possibly the first two prophets, but it could be the final two witnesses) make the call for Israeli Jewish leaders to resume the stalled work on the Temple and/or to rebuild it.  There could also be a call for some of the House of Yisrael Israelites to go to Jerusalem and help to rebuild the Temple (Hag 1:1-11). 

 

                                               24/06/02D                               (Hag 1:14-15).  The two prophets make a call to certain Jewish religious leaders to start making preparations to resume the rebuilding of the Temple (will this be done physically or by mental telepathy?). 

 

                                               24/06/02D                               At this time, there probably will be two Jewish leaders of significance in Jerusalem.  Assuredly, they may be operating under the guidance of the first two prophets or the two final witnesses (possibly the two eventual witnesses--Yohanan and Eliyahu).  One of these Jews will be a religious leader (who will become the next Jewish high priest--could this be Ovadia Yosef?) and the other will be a civil leader (could this be Binyamin Netanyahu?). 

 

                                                                                                Some House of Yisrael Israelites may begin returning to Jerusalem and assist in making more Temple preparations (Hag 1:12-15; Jer 3:14). 

 

                                               ?/07/04Z                                  False Prophet Hananiah dies after 3 months (Jer 28:17). 

 

                                               15/07/05J                                If the final two witnesses have not yet started their work on the Temple Mount in Jerusalem (by a physical appearance or perhaps by mental telepathy), they may do so at this time or soon hereafter. 

 

                                               15/07/05J                                Peculiar precipitation patterns seem to have developed across America during the last few years.  Progressively, and more and more, it has been raining (flooding) in one city or area while other cities and areas have had droughts (Amos 4:7). 

 

                                               15/07/05J                                For the coming last seven years in this age, early Jewish “rabbis” taught a particular series of events that would occur.  The first year would produce rain in one city with drought in another--Amos 4:7 (“Pesikta De-Rab Kahana,” p. 109-110).  This mixed pattern means that some areas will definitely face a drought while others will probably flood. 

 

                                               15/07/05J                                Could this be the start of the first period or year of the heptad suggested in the Midrashim “Aggadoth Mashiach” (Dan 9:24-27; “The Life and Times of Jesus The Messiah,” p. 211-221, by Alfred Edersheim).  If so, this one year period will not have sufficient nourishment (Nov-Dec 1997 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 6).  Or does this event start earlier or later?  Logically, the predictions of this Midrashim and those above in Pesikta De-Rab Kahana should mesh on the basis of a religious year starting on Aviv 1.  But somehow, they do not seem to fit.  So maybe, both predictions should start on the basis of an agricultural year--thus, six months earlier or later than the regular religious year.  In any case, this presentation assumes an agricultural year for both. 

 

21/07/02D                                                                              (Hag 2:1).  To the Jews. 

 

                                               21/07/02D                               This coming house (Temple) is nothing now.  But soon, it will be great.  In a little while, YHWH will shake the heavens, earth, sea & dry land (possibly a great earthquake, meteorite or asteroid shower, and/or a capsized or wobbly earth?) and shake the nations (Hag 2:1-9).  A meteorite shower after the 21st day of the 7th moon could be one of the regular showers that occurs annually or it might be something unforeseen.  An earthquake is the best option.  In recent years, there has been concern that the earth’s poles may reverse (as has occurred a number of times over the ages).  Could the earth’s magnetic poles reverse at this time or does it happen later?  Is this the ante-typical fulfillment of Rev 6:12-17 or does it come earlier.  However, such a natural event may come later with only an announcement of it on this date. 

 

?/08/?                                    01/08/02D                               (Zech 1:1).  The two prophets or final two witnesses push for Jewish leaders and the people to repent and change their attitudes toward rebuilding the Temple (Zech 1:1-6).  This may have happened by mental telepathy for an ante-type in the year 2000, as the Jews were celebrating their Yom Kippur in the 8th month.  This prophecy is not dated completely, but it might have happened on the first day.  Likely, this thinking or need for repentance will cover most or all of the eight month and become more serious. 

 

                                               15/08/02D                               While there had been some stock market problems earlier (which were largely contained at that time), the real trouble was to come later.  This problem has entailed a process involving some days and months and not necessarily a total immediate collapse.  It could have started anytime; but since the 15th day of the 8th month was the classic time of the collapse, it may have started that date in 2000 (some trouble did come that day, but it was temporarily contained and the market was held flat--evidently, by the market control unit) and really may start to come apart later.  The problems in Asia would also allow that some trouble may have started in 1998.  But the ultimate trouble will likely commence with a still larger stock market fall or significant correction in the US or internationally (which might be initially controlled or contained by the super rich bankers), to be succeeded by a quick recovery and restoration of confidence in the markets before the trouble resumes.  Logically, this fall should have happened in 2003, but it did not.  In any case, 2003 finished the year with no further big stock market falls (instead, the markets seemed to be somewhat recovering).  But the handwriting is on the wall.  At some point in time, the markets will start down and not recover.  

 

                                                                                                Over time, the financial trouble on Yisrael will begin to spread to the bond and other markets, although the plutocrat rulers will move fast to try to contain it by having their prostitute politicians go on TV and lie and deceive the public--particularly with misleading and altered government statistics showing that everything is all right.  Perhaps the early reactions will be deflationary with much higher interest rates as the Fed attempts to protect the dollar.  However, commodity prices should firm and start up.  Rising commodity prices will be a signal that disaster is coming.  At some point in time, oil futures will explode upward (the start of this may have occurred in the spring of 2000.  The groundwork was further laid in Dec 2000 when OPEC voted to cut production).  More stock market problems will be just more of the signs of seven times of punishment coming upon Yisrael when the pride of her power is broken (Lev 26:18-19). 

 

                                                                                                For some years now, Americans have been on a spending spree in terms of buying foreign consumer goods and using worthless US dollars.  In 1999, this binge reached record levels.  In 2000, it reached unfathomable levels in excess of $30 billion per month (over $360 billion per annum).  By  2003, it was running at $40-$50 billion monthly (or over $500 billion annually).  When adding these effects in with the squandering of Federal Reserve Notes by the Fed to enrich the fat cats (in the market control unit and other methods) and the US money give-aways to also benefit the fat cats ($14.9 billion in foreign aid alone for FY 2001), the balance of payments deficit is staggering. 

 

                                                                                                The “Washington Times” of Jul 26-Aug 1, 1999, had a story by Patrice Hill on “U.S. goes on spending binge; trade deficit soars” (p. 12) which assessed the seriousness of the balance of payments problem.  The trade deficit has been financing US budget deficits and/or providing funds for US growth at the expense of foreign countries.  Hill notes that these investors can withdraw this money funnel to America and keep their money overseas; thus, causing an abrupt reversal of the US stock and bond markets and weigh down the US dollar.  The article quoted analyst Cary Leahey that the growing debt is increasing the chances of a hard landing for the US expansion as it approached an all time record longevity (actually, a decline did set in slowly in the last quarter of 2000--so the US economic longevity seems to be clearly over, maybe forever).  Is it possible that stock market problems may eventually precipitate the withdrawal of foreign money from US securities? 

 

                                                                                                The US and Britain enjoyed a seven year economic boom which started in 1993.  But it literally ended in 2000.  It likely came from YHWH to parallel the seven years of blessings upon Egypt during Yosef’s days.  Economic problems and troubles commenced in 2001.  In the case of the US, there are reasons to believe that Slick Clinton and his Amalekite handlers manipulated the budget, deficit and economic data and statistics to show a substantially better position than what really existed.  For years, the US has been taking social security funds and placing them in the general fund to decrease the budget deficit.  It is also true that US liabilities (both real and contingent) have not been correctly reflected in the US budget.  Moreover, Slick began a campaign of discontinuing long term bond issues (with higher interest rates) in preference for short term notes (with smaller interest rates).  This has cut federal outlays for interest on the national debt.  But this option will cause a crisis at some point in time when this short term paper comes due.  Finally, Slick manipulated and altered the US budget in other ways to hide reality which allowed him to claim a large budget surplus which seems to be lacking in truth.  At some point in time, the proof of his skullduggery will likely come out to cause America more problems (although it probably won’t come out until after Slick has regained power; after all, if Bush tries to blame Slick, the general public will not believe GWB). 

 

                                                                                                In 1998, investment advisor Martin Weiss said that over $4.3 trillion in US securities were held by foreigners--much of it in Asia.  He noted that the continued Asian problems and need for cash will prompt these interests to dump a lot of these securities.  This will precipitate a stock market crash (Jun-Jul 1998 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 7-8).  The view by the writer of this study is that this pile of money has started to come home in 2003 (slowly) and will continue from there on with an acceleration into 2004-2008.  Foreigners are not exactly stupid.  At some point in time, they will realize that they have been accepting worthless dollars which won’t buy anything of value in the US.  When the foreign goods dry up, because foreigners are tired of taking worthless US dollars, inflation will take off in the US. 

 

                                                                                                While the coming financial and economic collapse of Ephraim Yisrael comes first, it will certainly accelerate and quickly spread to the rest of the White British Commonwealth of nations.  At some point in time, the US dollar and all of the US financial markets will probably collapse in conjunction with an inflationary bust sometime later--creating a major crisis of unequaled proportion.  Probably, the collapse starts with the major stock exchanges, but it will likely spread in time to the other markets (actually, it may have started on the 15th day of the 8th month in 2000, as noted earlier, but this was a slow decline and not an immediate collapse).  Though stocks have been grossly overvalued, they may not fall as much as one may first suppose because the US unsecured debentures and currency are even more overvalued and will provide the real collapse (because they are backed by nothing).  At least, in stocks, foreigners are exchanging worthless dollars for “something” of value.  While this collapse probably starts slowly and will be initially deflationary, the government will print money and precipitate an inflationary bust at some point in time. 

 

                                               15/08/05J                                Is this the final date for the collapse of Yisrael’s currency--the dollar?  Trouble will intensify over America.  The decline in the value of the dollar versus the EURO and certain other foreign currencies seems to have started in 2003 (as discussed earlier).  Possibly, the fall will greatly accelerate and soon implode. 

 

                                                                                                The deadly wound to the USSR and Communism is healed (an ante-type of a later fulfillment of Revelation).  Will President Vladimir Putin return to Communism or be removed in some manner to bring about this healing of the wound?  Most of the Third World in Latin America, Asia and Black Africa will soon be openly Marxists (most are actually Marxists in 2003, just not openly) as a part of the liberation theology movement of Catholicism (Rev 13:14-15). 

 

                                                                                                By now or soon thereafter, Russia may enter the Balkans in force on the side of the Serbs and Macedonians to put down a possible Albanian uprising.  NATO will do nothing. 

 

                                                                                                If the US is still bogged down in the Middle East, it will offer a perfect opportunity for US trouble in Asia.  At some point in time, Communist China will take control of Taiwan and North and South Korea are reunited (perhaps North Korea simply invades South Korea and conquers it).  The US will likely respond by talk only--though the US president might try to start more trouble in Asia to have another excuse for martial law.  There also most likely will be a major eruption of problems in Kashmir in the Pakistan and India dispute. 

 

                                                                                                When it finally dawns upon the Japanese that America cannot and will not defend them any longer, Japan will scrap its anti-war stand and begin to create a military force.  At some point in time, Japan will cozy up to China and probably enter into an alliance or non-aggression pact of some sort.  Japan launched two spy satellites in early 2003, suggesting that Japan might now be concerned about her own defense. 

 

                                                                                                Perhaps by now, a US constitutional convention could be in progress.  If Cheney’s health deteriorates and if Bush should die (by assassination or whatever) and if Powell, Rice or whomever takes over, but is unable to solve the US problems; then a meeting constitutional convention could quickly give the US both a new constitution and a new president in the form of Slick or Hillary Clinton.  This is a plausible scenario to allow Slick to resume power very quickly (as the man who supposedly gave the US prosperity and stability for eight years).  If so, any efforts to remove Slick thereafter will meet with failure.  If he regains power, Slick will quickly declare martial law and be firmly in control. 

 

                                               13/09/02D                               The people in the state of Israel, Yehudah (either the Jews, the escaped Israelites or all of the people), were asked on the 24th day of the 11th month if they fasted on the fast days of 5th and 7th months for YHWH for these 70 years.  Can this have a significance since 1933-1934?  Or is it 70 days and not years?  Since religious Jews have fasted on the 5th and 7th months, this question would be more suitable to House of Yisrael Israelites who have never fasted for these periods as they have been sun worshipping Christians (Zech 7:4-5). 

 

                                               13/09/02D                               Has YHWH’s patience with Yehudah worn out (in terms of her need to rebuild the Temple)? Will there now be an earthquake, a meteorite or asteroid strike (maybe, from the Andromedin meteor belt) or some other natural event, which clears the Temple site to destroy some Muslim site (the Dome of the Rock or the Dome of the Spirits) and pave the way for the Temple to be rebuilt.  Because of some reason (like possibly the irresponsible and careless work carried on by the Arabs up under the Temple Mount), there have been major buckles of the foundation of the Western and Southern walls of the Temple Mount (as described earlier).  At some point in time, these buckles may collapse and take down the Dome of the Rock and/or other Muslim artifacts on the Temple Mount.  It may not take much of a earthquake to do this. 

 

                                               13/09/02D                               Though the Temple site may be cleared, the Jews do not aggressively start work on the building.  Thus, is YHWH angered at Yehudah?  Hence, is this the start of 70 days of YHWH’s indignation upon Jerusalem (Zech 1:12)? 

 

24/09/02D                                                                              (Hag 2:10, 18-20). 

 

                                               24/09/02D                               Something has happened on the Temple Mount by this date.  Either a natural event will have cleared the Temple site (like maybe, the collapse of the Western and Southern walls from the bulges which surfaced following the work of the Arabs up under the mount); or alternatively, maybe one of the Temple groups grows impatient with the continuing Palestinian uprising and simply defies both Jewish and Muslim authorities to clear one of the Moslem sites.  If the US pushes Israel into accepting a peace agreement with the Palestinians which gives them the Temple Mount, religious Jews may defy authorities and simply go upon the mount and take possession of it by force.  Whoever or whichever Jews go upon the mount will probably be influenced by the two prophets or final two witnesses (at least by mental telepathy).  This event will spell out the beginning of great turmoil among people all over the world (YHWH will shake the nations, causing a giant political upheaval all over the world--Hag 2:21-22).  There will be a major crisis in the Arab world and cries for a Muslim jihad.  This event could be the trigger for more Arab actions against both the US and Israel. 

 

                                               24/09/02D                               The Jerusalem trouble will provoke the major powers (to probably include the Israelis, Arabs, United Europe, UN, US, Russia, etc) to call for a special summit meeting to settle the Middle East crisis. 

 

                                               24/09/02D                               A Moslem jihad could possibly start now with the Israelis on the Temple Mount at this time for worship and especially if the Jews tear down some Moslem site(s).  Such a jihad could also invite further antagonism toward the US for Israeli support.  Certainly, the Muslims hate America. 

 

                                               24/09/02D                               Real financial trouble could come now (perhaps the Muslim world will lead the efforts by dumping US securities and by withdrawing their dollars from US banks and converting them into EUROs--as a part of their jihad against the US because of the Jews being on the Temple Mount).  Possibly, the trouble started around Bul 15th in 2000 and has been slowly phasing in since then.  This could be the real proof of the seven times of punishment coming upon Yisrael in the age end, in conjunction with YHWH’s act to break the pride of Yisrael’s power and commencing of a severe drought on the House of Yisrael (Lev 26:19). 

 

                                               24/09/02D                               Thrones are overturned (the throne of Yisrael and maybe others--Hag 2:10-23).  Is it possible that Elizabeth dies, abdicates or steps down in some way so that Britain’s throne overturns at this time?  Probably, later in time, the throne of Yisrael is to be returned to Palestine to make it ready for YESHUA (but this motion seems too early at this time).  Does Charles became king? 

 

                                                                                                YHWH will be in the midst of the very elect--Philadelphia--the pomegranate (Zech 2:10-11; Hag 2:19-20). 

 

                                               ?/09/05J                                  Yirmeyahu witness?  Words are read to Yisrael nations and/or the leaders (Jer 1:5-19; 5:14, 20; 25:15-26; 31:28; 36:9; 43:1). 

 

                                               ?/09/05J                                  The King (Charles? Elizabeth II must now be gone) and leaders reject Yirmeyahu’s words (Jer 36:22). 

 

                                               24/09/02D                               Possibly, the Temple’s foundation is cleared, the cornerstone is laid and maybe a sacrificial altar is built on Mount Moriah to resume the daily sacrifice, if these things did not happen earlier (II Sam 24:25; Ezra 3:1, 6). 

 

                                               24/09/02D                               Physical identification (the actual sealing may take place later) of the age ending election of Yisrael and Yehudah--in the context that after this date, the vine, the fig tree, the pomegranate and the olive tree will bear fruit (Hag 2:19). 

 

                                                                                                A summit of various world leaders and the Israelis and Arabs will ultimately start, in supposed earnest, but it will drag on and on.  But this conference will probably settle nothing initially and the trouble will continue and intensify. 

 

24/11/02D                                                                              (Zech 1:7).  Many important prophecies come either on this day or after it. 

 

                                               24/11/02D                               Because of the explosion of trouble and the presence of the Jews on the Temple Mount and the calls for a major summit of world powers, a major summit has surely taken place by now to discuss events and conclude at least another Arab-Israeli peace treaty.  Actually, one may have already started and continues off and on. 

 

                                               24/11/02D                               This special summit meeting of the major powers and the Israelis and Arabs occurs and the parties agree on a new 7 year agreement to allow the Temple to be rebuilt with possible Vatican oversight (at some point in time) over Jerusalem and the so-called “holy” places (Dan 9:27; 11:22).  Jerusalem will ultimately be an open city.  Certainly, a peace treaty of sorts will be concluded in the summit upon the Israelis and the PLO at this time (Zech 1:7-11).  While this agreement will theoretically cover seven years, it may end for all purposes near Passover in Yechezkel’s 34th year  when the Beast invades Palestine and stops the Daily Sacrifice; and certainly, it will end when YESHUA returns, likely clears the Temple site and builds a new altar (thus, it may never last seven full years and it may not even be breached at the mid-point in the last heptad). 

 

                                               24/11/02D                               A preliminary Arab-Israeli peace agreement signed in early Sep 1993 provided that the final agreement would have a deadline of Sep 2000 (Sep 13, 1999, “US News & World Report,” p. 33).  This planned event never happened on schedule.  But after the previous trouble on the Temple Mount and when the Jews entered upon it and commenced work on the Temple, negotiations or at least plans for a major peace summit have been on the drawing boards.  Will the final accord classify Jerusalem as a new international city?  The Pope is advocating a UN status for Jerusalem which will internationalize it and place it and the so-called “holy sites” under the purview of the Vatican.  Old Jerusalem would now be an open city under Vatican supervision.  Can the Jews now have the area of the Dome of the Spirits for a new Temple or will a earthquake grant them a site.  The so-called Mosque of Omar (Dome of the Rock) may not have to come down in this arrangement (although if it is necessary for it to come down, an earthquake or something else will accomplish it). 

 

                                               24/11/02D                               YHWH has had indignation on Jerusalem and cities of Yehudah for 70 years (Zech 1:12).?  Since 1933-1934?  But this is not readily understandable.  So it could have some other meaning.  Could the 70 years be 70 days with a more limited interpretation?  At the moment, this period would likely be 70 days which may have started on the 13th day of the 9th month of this year?  Thus, this should be the end of 70 days of indignation which YHWH has had upon Jerusalem (Zech 1:12)?  Maybe, the Jews will now go to work to rebuild the Temple. 

 

                                               24/11/02D                               The final two witnesses could be on the scene physically (or at least, by mental telepathy) and perhaps in Jerusalem by this date (Zech 4:1-14; Mal 4:5; Rev 10:10-11; 11:1-12).  There is also some possibility that the NT Apostle Yohanan will have a role to play with Philadelphia while Eliyahu will be more involved with the Temple construction (Zech 1:16; 2:1; Mal 3:1-4:6; Matt 17:11; Rev 7:1-12; 11:1-6).). 

 

                                               24/11/02D                               A measuring line is being laid out over Jerusalem--possibly in the vein of an Israeli-Arab peace treaty which will divide the Old City of Jerusalem into Arab and Jewish parts (Zech 1:16; 2:1-2).  This measuring line seems to be different from the later one in Revelation 11:1-2 which involves the Temple. 

 

                                               24/11/02D                               Man on red horse followed by three other horses (red, sorrel and white) patrol the earth and report that it is at rest (peace?).  Great cry of peace sweeps the earth--to precede more disaster and war.  Is this the cry of peace and safety when there is no peace?  Logically, this cry of peace globally occurs when peace comes to the Middle East.  But Zekharyah seems to have it dated at this time (Jer 6:13-15; Ezek 13:9-10; Zech 1:7-11; Rev 6:1-8; I Thes 5:3). 

 

                                               24/11/02D                               Could this be the white horse and the start of the four horses of Revelation?  At the moment, this looks like the first seal and the white horse of Revelation 6:1-2, which probably means peace under Christianity. 

 

                                               24/11/02D                               The four horses of Rev 6:1-8 and Zech 1:7-11 likely have duel features and particularly in the context of the four chariots with horses (the horses, per chariot, have an obvious meaning of two or more horses per chariot) linked with the four winds of heaven--red, black, white and dappled or bay at Zech 6:1-7.  The black horses linked to the North probably represent the European-Catholic power; the white horses in the West perhaps represent the Anglo-Saxon-Celtic empire of Britain and the US or perhaps the Protestant Christian Church power; the red horses in the East represent the Communist empire of Russia, China and Asia; and the bay or dappled horses in the South represent the Moslem empire of the Arabs and their Edomite cousins.  The pale color comes from the Greek “choros” meaning green linking to chlorophyll (Jun-Jul 1998 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 15).  Reportedly, the color green identifies the Moslem nations.  Rabbinic interpreters also relate the horses of the four chariots to four world powers--red with Babylon, white with Greece (since Christianity is a Greek religion, the color white also would obviously relate to Christendom, as shown above and elsewhere herein), black with Media-Persia, and bay with Rome (“Twelve Prophets” of the “Soncino Books of the Bible,” p. 290). 

 

                                               24/11/02D                               The better view at this point in time is that Zechariah 1:7-11 does pertain to four powers.  Apparently, the black horse power of a United Europe is not yet fully on the stage, leaving the red horse of Russia and China, the White horse of the Anglo-Saxon-Celtic West and the sorrel horse representing the rest of the third world in Asia and Africa (or perhaps just the Muslim empire). 

 

                                               24/11/02D                               By this time, it is quite evident that the King of the South, in the context of the pale, dappled or green horses, is beginning to be unified or has achieved a measure of unification.  The backbone of this confederation will be Egypt, Saudi Arabia and other Arab nations--in the context of the Islamic (religious) daughter of the South (Dan 11:17).  Perhaps, in time, this alliance will extend to include some of the non-Arab Muslim nations of Iran, Pakistan, Afghanistan and possibly others.  In time, too, the Moslem bloc will become closely linked with the Chinese and other peoples of Asia. 

 

                                               24/11/02D                               In an ante-type of the age end conglomerate Beast, the four horns (Babylon/Iraq, Persia/Iran, Greece/Syria and Rome/Eastern head at Moscow) are now on the scene as enemies of the Israeli state and the House of Yisrael nations?  How does this group of four relate to a United Europe or a conglomeration of a divided world into different power blocks?  Is Europe now united particularly with an Eastern threat from an Asian block?  Evidently, Europe will be united, but will stay largely neutral with the confrontation developing between Russia and her Third World allies, as opposed to the US and her Anglo-Saxon-Celtic cousins--except for France, Greece or Germany which might be an antagonist to Yisrael (Zech 1:18-19). 

 

                                               24/11/02D                               Could the first two prophets, the final two witnesses, and/or at least the two Jewish leaders be on the Jerusalem scene in a foursome contemporaneously present as the four carpenters or builders (of Zech 1:20-21)? 

 

                                               24/11/02D                               YHWH is to bless and protect Jerusalem (Zech 2:4-5, 12-13; Hag 2:19-20). 

 

                                               24/11/02D                               Start or further movement of election and other House of Yisrael Israelites to Jerusalem (Isa 1:8-9; 3:4; 4:1-5; 66:7-9; Ezek 6:8; 7:16, 22; 9:2-11; 11:13; 14:22; 20:33-37; Zech 2:6-8; Mic 4:8).  Zechariah 2:7 and 10 seem to tie together and if so, the command to escape to Zion (of those who dwell with the daughter of Babylon--Christianity) probably directly concerns the daughter of Zion or Philadelphia.  Probably, Philadelphia, as an entity, makes her move to Palestine at this time from Ephraim-America. 

 

                                                                                                A proper priesthood is cleansed and restored in Jerusalem Zech 3:1-10; Mal 1-4; Rev 11:4-13). 

 

                                                                                                Some of the election (to probably include some of the very elect) and/or representatives of the first six assemblies (probably their headquarters as well) are evidently in Jerusalem.  Probably, the beginnings of the 7th Assembly is in Jerusalem as well, though it may not be formally organized this early in time.  Perhaps it becomes formally organized and functioning later (Zech 4:2; Mal 3:1-4:6; Isa 4:1-2; Rev 1:11; 10:1-11:4; Matt 17:11). 

 

                                                                                                Intense work commences on the Temple (Zech 4:9). 

 

                                                                                                The political and government capitol of the world (UN Headquarters?) is moved from the Babylon of New York and is restored to ancient Babylon on the Euphrates (Zech 5:1-11).  The Bush war on Iraq in 2003 probably contributes to this choice by the Beast.  With the Bush bombing and destruction of Iraq and the concern of the UN to rebuild it, the case can be made that the UN could establish her headquarters there as a part of the rebuilding effort.  Incidentally, the context of Zech 5 is clearly concerned with the enormous presence of lies when this event unfolds.  On the two women of Zech 5:9, the “Soncino Books of the Bible” (p. 289) suggest that the two women are hypocrisy and pride, which together with the woman wickedness (who must be the woman of Rev 17), establish themselves in Babylon. 

 

                                                                                                The horses and chariots (red, black, white & bay) go to North country--in preparation to ignite a nuclear WWIII which will spell the end of the House of Yisrael nations? (Zech 6:1-8). 

 

                                                                                                The High Priest is ordained to oversee the Third Temple, by YESHUA--probably through the final two witnesses (Zech 6:9-14). 

 

                                                                                                Because of the NATO war and occupation in the Balkans, which created internal dissension within the alliance, NATO will be largely dissolved at some point in time.  For sure, the US, Britain and Canada are on the way out.  Whatever part of NATO that survives will form the nucleus of a United Europe military alliance.  Likewise, something will likely erupt to cause Britain to leave the European Community at about the same time. 

 

 

Possibly Yechezkel’s 31st Year

 

01/01/06J                                                                               Aviv 1 (Rishon Be’Aviv).  Is this Yehoyakhin’s 6th year (of captivity); Darius’ 3d year (Ezra 4:5-24; Jer 36:9; Ezek 1:1; Dan 9:1-2; Hag 1:1; Zech 1:1); and Antiochus Epiphanies/Maccabees’ 6th year (I Macc 1:20, 54: 2:1; 10:1-10)?  This year may be a regular year. 

 

05/06/06J                                                                               (Ezek 8:1).  With elders of Yehudah.  Witness by the first pair of two prophets to the elders of Yehudah--the Israelis (Ezek 8-11) on the evil Christian Israelites at the Temple (which has started by now and only intensifies in the coming days). 

 

                                               15/07/06J                                Could this be the second period of a year of the heptad suggested in the Midrashim “Aggadoth Mashiach” --a period of the launch of a famine (“The Life and Times of Jesus The Messiah,” p. 211-221, by Alfred Edersheim). 

 

                                               15/07/06J                                Could this be the period predicted in the teachings of the early Jewish “rabbis?”  This second year is to see famine on Yisrael (“Pesikta De-Rab Kahana,” p. 109-110). 

 

                                                                                                One of the important tasks of the Yechezkel witness is to physically demonstrate the coming captivity of the House of Yisrael and its king/prince in a one day period.  He does this by imitating the removal by the prince (leaders?) from Jerusalem and the captivity coming on the people (Ezek 12).  The Israelites mock him. 

 

                                                                                                 No more delays, all prophecies to be now fulfilled (Ezek 12:21-28). 

 

                                               10/10/06J                                Possibly, the intensification of Yakov’s Trouble occurs on this historic fast day (after showing signs of developing in 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 and 2005).  Is this the real breaking of Yisrael’s pride? 

 

                                               10/10/06J                                Is this the start date of a possible embargo against the House of Yisrael nations because of their currency problems and failure to pay off foreign debts?  Will it last 40 days and be led by the Russians/Muslims against the US and Britain because of Anglo support for the Israelis? 

 

                                               10/10/06J                                The coming trade crisis may start as a temporary embargo (possibly oil by the Muslims) by perhaps a Russian/Moslem, UN or some other alliance action involving the four horns against the US and Canada, as Yosef (Ephraim and Manasseh) prophetically represents Yisrael.  This embargo could start with just the US and later extend to Canada (maybe, starting with an oil embargo).  It seems to be precipitated by the fall of the US economy while she owes vast debts (and maybe, wheat sold earlier but not delivered) to foreigners and internationalists (who will be holding huge mortgages on American lands--both private and public).  Congress authorized first mortgage bonds on the public lands in Slick’s first year.  This has caused the super rich to finance and give media coverage to the environmental movement (to protect their mortgages on the timber and minerals on the public lands and private lands as well).  Continued US support for the state of Israel also helps to precipitate this crisis, coupled with US and Anglo-Saxon-Celtic antagonism and acts of war toward Russia, Yugoslavia, Iran, Afghanistan, Sudan, Iraq, Libya, Syria and other militant Arab states (II Kg 25:1; Ezek 1:2; 3:15; 24:1-2).  Surely, these US enemies will all participate in an embargo against the US.  Like China, Russia and others, the Muslims are holding large sums of US dollars and bonds.  They will be unhappy when they collapse.  They will look for restitution. 

 

                                                                                                The Yechezkel witness may deliver YHWH’s prophecies against the preachers in the House of Yisrael (Ezek 13). 

 

                                                                                                Do the elders of the House of Yisrael visit Yechezkel to inquire of YHWH (Ezek 14:1)?  They are told to repent and to give up their idols (Ezek 14:2-23). 

 

                                                                                                The terror upon Yisrael from the behemah beasts could start now or perhaps a little later (Lev 26:22; Deut 28:5, 26; Ezek 5:16-17; 14:15; Jer 27:4-6). 

 

                                                                                                Rumors and calamities in the House of Yisrael nations (Ezek 7:22, 26; Matt 24:6; Jer 4:20; 51:46; Amos 3:11). 

 

                                                                                                By now, will the evil team of Bill and Hillary Clinton be back in power--through hook or crook? 

 

                                                                                                If there is not yet a presidentially declared emergency and martial law, it will likely happen soon. 

 

                                                                                                With the financial collapse earlier, food will be in short supply.  The welfare checks and give-aways to the behemah humanoids will end.  These behemah humanoids will further revolt and go wild to terrorize the population even more in search of food and plunder.  Possibly, this trouble from the behemah beasts started earlier.  But it will only intensify as the days and weeks progress.  The roads will become unsafe to travel--they are already that way in many urban US cities.  Great racial problems will terrorize the US as a part of Yakov’s Trouble (Lev 26:22; Ezek 14:15). 

 

                                                                                                It is possible that with this monetary crisis (particularly, in view of the paralleling political crisis) will motivate the US president (and the British and Canadian prime ministers soon thereafter) to declare martial law and a national emergency.  Surely, all gold and silver in private hands will be seized and the government will continue to lie and deceive the public (particularly, on the economy and financial situations).  Rumors will accelerate in the US and Britain (Lev 26:19; I Kg 12:32-33).  The president (whomever he is) will assume dictatorial power over the US.  Either the economic crisis or something else will be the catalyst to develop in Yechezkel’s 30th and 31st years to allow the Big Brother take over.  If Slick does regain power, he will be hated by many for his corruption and immorality.  Despite the opposition, Slick (or whomever is in the presidency) will survive until perhaps just before the very end when there is a chance that the Amalekites will take over and assassinate or remove the then president. 

 

                                                                                                As a part of a US declared national emergency (whenever it comes), several things will happen.  Gun ownership in private hands will be outlawed and guns will be required to be turned in.  Title 50 of the US Code now allows the government to forcefully confiscate scarce or excess materials or materials which would be threatened by accumulation in the hands of the people.  Supposedly, this act was to prevent hoarding.  In any case, the feds can search and seize stored food, guns, gold, silver and on and on with a notice in the Federal Register.  If not already implemented, title 50 will be immediately implemented upon a declaration of emergency.  “All persons” will likely be ordered to register at the local post offices, similar to the present draft registrations.  Public work battalions may be formed and paid for by currency rapidly inflating itself into oblivion.  The US will become a total police state with federal agents spying, arresting, intimidating, persecuting and executing American citizens worse than anything ever conceived of before in history to include Nazi Germany and the USSR.  The Seventh-day Adventists will (incorrectly) believe that their theology on the US being the two horned beast of Revelation 13:11 is true (although it is patently wrong).  Alternatively, the public may in time just ignore authorities (as they have largely done for the past many years) and anarchy and civil war could prevail.  The president (whomever he is) and his Amalekite handlers could call upon the UN or foreign troops (many of which are now in the US) to restore order. 

 

                                                                                                Persecution on certain politically incorrect people and religions (like Patriots, Militias, Christian Identity, etc, which will be designated as cults by the government), probably starts in earnest--especially after Big Brother’s national emergency.  This is the first of three tribulations to come upon the world.  Many can expect to be arrested and jailed for being politically incorrect.  Will this action be the start of the first of persecutions upon YHWH’s people, as envisioned in the opening of the 5th seal of Revelation (Rev  6:9-11).  Judgment must start with YHWH’s people, just as happened with the early Jerusalem Apostolic Assembly (Acts 8:1; I Tim 5:24; I Pet 4:17).  The government assault on these persons will be motivated because of their anti-government stance, their opposition to ruling Amalek-Edomites and their favorable feelings toward the four horn powers (Russia, Iraq, Iran and Syria or Greece) developing on the world scene to execute YHWH’s judgments on the Anglo-Saxon-Celtic nations.  Just as Yirmeyahu spoke out, these politically incorrect people will speak out and be arrested and imprisoned by Big Brother (Jer 27:1-22; 32:1-36; 33:1; 34:1-3; 37:4-21; 38:6-28; I Pet 4:17).  The arrest and government murder of many of the Christian Identity preachers will act to free their sheep followers from the shackles of their false teachings. 

 

                                                                                                Persecution on politically incorrect people intensifies with more arrests and imprisonments.  While this trouble starts on right wingers in the generic sense, the Christian Identity movement will continue to be the primary focus.  In this context, these right wing groups seem to include some of the people that will ultimately make up the very elect Philadelphians (obviously, along with many other right wing people who will never be a part of Philadelphia).  As Christian Identity preachers, teachers and leaders are killed off by the persecuting Big Brother government, their followers will break free of the bondage of the leaders and be able to turn to the Scriptures and YESHUA.  These leaders have been an impediment to truth.  Their removal will pave the way for religious freedom and allow the people to turn to YHWH YESHUA rather than be followers of human leaders (I Pet 4:17). 

 

                                                                                                Since the Big Brother government will have designated the Christian Identity and certain other right wing groups as cults and enemies of the state, they will have to go underground for meetings and fellowship if they hope to avoid arrest. 

 

                                               20/11/06J                                A temporary agreement (with promises to pay) is reached with foreign powers (over the oil embargo) which may temporarily restore hope and some contentment among the American people.  The president and his (or her) evil colleagues will come on TV and lie and deceive the public as to America’s true economic and monetary status.  Fat, arrogant and smug Americans will believe that their troubles are over and that they can return to their traditional sun worship customs and contempt and rebellion toward YHWH’s Torah (Jer 37:5-11; Ezek 4:6).  Though there may be much fan fare about an agreement, probably the embargo never really ends.  It might look like it is over for a while.  But within a few weeks or months, it will be acknowledged as still in force. 

 

                                                                                                Another Yisrael remnant escapes to Babylon or Yehudah? (Ezek 14:22). 

 

                                                                                                A remnant of the House of Yisrael is now in the Jerusalem area (Ezek 14:22).  This remnant in Judea may fulfill the prophetic aspects of the Jewish remnant which was in Babylon when the House of Yehudah fell in the 6th century BCE. 

 

                                                                                                Are the prophecies of Ezekiel 15 made now? 

 

                                                                                                Are the prophecies of Ezekiel 16 made at this time?

 

                                                                                                The Israelis in Palestine become concerned about their future (primarily because of the money, protection and support given them annually by the US) as trouble intensifies in America and the White British Commonwealth.  Thus, some evil Jewish leaders (evidently Amalekites) begin making new alliances with the Russians, Germans, EU, Spanish and so forth (Ezek 16:1-21).  Ultimately, these alliances backfire when these “allies” turn against the Jews in Palestine. 

 

                                                                                                Thinking Israelites in the House of Yisrael will start thinking about leaving their lands in this window of opportunity.  Many will flee to Jerusalem or to nearby Jordan, as the case may be! 

 

                                                                                                While the goal of the election will be to reach Jerusalem, some of them may not be allowed into the Israeli state (especially Christian Identity people who are hated by the ruling Amalekites).  They may have to migrate or escape to the East bank of the Jordan (in modern Jordan) or to a Palestinian state on the West bank.  This East of the Jordan territory was a sanctuary to the parents of David (I Sam 22:3-5), to the escaping remnant of true Jewish Israelites during the Babylonian invasion (Jer 40:11) and to the Messianic Jews during the Roman siege of Jerusalem (“Dictionary of Judaism in the Biblical Period,” p. 472).  From Jordan (or the West bank of a Palestinian state), believers will surely have access to and be allowed to worship in Jerusalem with the coming Arab-Israeli peace treaty. 

 

                                                                                                A profoundly growing decline in US public confidence in the government, coupled with an accelerating political crisis, develops involving the president whomever he is (if Slick Clinton is in power, then his many illegal acts and depravity will become the focus), and over the continuing economic troubles, terrorism and the indecisive 2000 elections.  The assault on the president (if Slick has regained power) evidently will probably be led by the Rockefellers and their Republican colleagues.  The question will remain whether the Rothschilds and their liberal media cronies will join in or not with a view of elevating Joseph Lieberman, Robert Rubin, Alan Greenspan, John Kerry, or Diane Feinstein if Clinton or whomever can be removed.  As the US crisis stage continues, the Amalekites will more anxiously want their agent in the White House.  With the crisis intensifying, Slick or whomever will use or manufacture an incident to allow him to declare a national emergency and suspend Congress and the Bill of Rights to ensure his continued presidency if he has not yet done so. 

 

                                                                                                Enormous trouble erupts all over America, Canada and the White British Commonwealth nations.  This trouble spells very hard times for all people in these lands.  But some will have some temporary security from stocked and supplied retreats prepared in advance in some mountainous, back country.  So while White Christian Israelites will suffer in the cities and especially those who own no secure land and have no stored up provisions, some can have some temporary benefits.  This will be a test of true brotherly love and particularly for people in the developing Philadelphia.  Will men and women go out of their way to help their rea brethren?  While the person with a secure, supplied retreat may fare better at this time, this security will eventually expire and evaporate--certainly, by the time the nation is eventually invaded and crushed in the early summer of Yechezkel’s 33d year. 

 

                                                                                                The trouble will soon expand to most all nations in the world and particularly as the US dollar continues collapsing with some nations losing out on their hand-outs from Washington while others are angry for being left holding a bag filled with worthless US dollars. 

 

                                                                                                An ante-type of the age end conglomerate Beast, the four horns (Babylon/Iraq, Persia/Iran, Greece/Syria and Rome/Eastern head at Moscow) are clearly on the scene as enemies of the Israeli state and House of Yisrael nations? 

 

                                                                                                The US could be almost on the verge of civil war and perhaps anarchy--because of the mounting problems and perhaps some from the mess which evolved in November 2000 in Florida over the confused elections.  The behemah animals will be particularly upset when their welfare checks and food stamps end.  As the behemah revolts, the intensity of the trouble may increase seven times (Lev 26:21-22). 

 

 

Possibly Yechezkel’s 32d Year

 

01/01/07J                                                                               Aviv 1 (Rishon Be’Aviv).  Is this Yehoyakhin’s 7th year (of captivity); Darius’ 4th year (Ezra 4:5-24; Jer 36:9; Ezek 1:1; Dan 9:1-2; Hag 1:1; Zech 1:1); and Antiochus Epiphanies/Maccabees’ 7th year (I Macc 1:20, 54: 2:1; 10:1-10)?  This year may be an intercalcary year. 

 

                                                                                                More people of Yisrael come to Jerusalem to build the Temple and help financially in the building project (Zech 6:10, 15). 

 

                                                                                                Amalek-Edomites in Yehudah claim the land of Yisrael is theirs, not the returning Israelites (Ezek 11:15; 35:10). 

 

                                                                                                Possibly both the first two prophets and the final two witnesses and some part or all of the seven assemblies are now in Jerusalem. 

 

                                                                                                At this time, the US could be in a civil war or very close to one.  Anarchy may prevail in the land if the despicable Slick and Hillary Clinton team regains power and loses complete control over the people.  The different racial and ethnic groupings in the US are going to explode one day and especially as the food stamps and welfare checks dry up.  Anarchy and civil war could engulf the land.  There is also the likelihood of agitation and the promotion of a civil war by the Amalekites as they attempt to take over the US (as they did in Jerusalem during the Jewish-Roman War). 

 

                                                                                                By now, beasts (behemah, chaiyah and nokri humanoids) are ravaging and terrorizing the land and peoples of the House of Yisrael.  This trouble probably started earlier in Yechezkel’s 30th or 31st year and has only intensified since then.  The highways are totally unsafe.  As the welfare programs come to an end, the uncontrollable beasts begin ravaging the country side, suburbs and rural areas where Christian Israelites may have some food.  Government authorities will be unable to contain this terrorism.  Civil war could break out and prompt Big Brother to call in foreign troops to put down the anarchy.  Any local police still on the payrolls will be more interested in protecting their own families, rather than the public (Lev 26:22; Deut 28:5, 17, 26; Ezek 5:16-17; 14:1-5, 15; Jer 27:4-6). 

 

                                                                                                The Islamic conflict with the US and White British Commonwealth nations will continue and eventually will see Iran, Syria and Russia more dogmatically allied with Iraq (with Europe largely neutral--except possibly for France, Germany and/or Greece.  Greece could easily become one of the horns to side with the Russians). 

 

                                                                                                The age ending alliance against Yisrael is aptly described in the prophets and also in a fragment from the Dead Sea Scrolls (4Q554, Col 3--p. 184, “The Dead Sea Scrolls, A New Translation”).  It reflects that in the age end, the kingdom of Persia shall rise up with others, including people from Edom, Moab and Ammon “of the whole land of Babylon,” to do evil to the descendants of Yisrael.  This dovetails with Ps 83 which mentions the same group in the context of Assyria (Russia/Germany?), Philistia (Spain/Portugal and Latin America?), Moab (France and French Canadians?), Edom (Ireland and likely most non-Arab Muslims) and the nations of the Ishmaelites (the Arab countries).  Per Psalms 83, Amalek and other ancient peoples will also be in this alliance.  Certainly, China, Korea, Japan and various Asian, African and Latin American nations will be in this alliance.  The Colored world passionately hates White Christian Anglo-Saxon-Celtic Israelites (less the Irish, Catholic, Gaelic branch). 

 

                                                                                                While historically, from 1917 on, the Khazars (Amalek-Edomites) have been supposedly a part of the US and White British Commonwealth nations as parasites, they have actually been working against the US and Britain.  In this final conflict, they will probably be the primary cause or provocateurs to initiate, set up and perpetuate the US-Britain conflict with Russia and her third world allies.  While pretending to be for the US-Britain and edging the conflict on, they will eventually turn openly on the US-Britain in hopes of currying favor with the coming Russians and/or world powers.  They may even eventually seize power from the president in Washington by some method of stealth and cunning just before the end.  This coming WWIII will be the type of what happened with Jerusalem’s fall to Rome in 66-70 CE when the Amalekites double crossed the real Jews (Ps 83:1-18). 

 

                                                                                                Because the House of Yisrael has multiplied or outdone the heathen nations round about her in wickedness, YHWH is against Yisrael and will execute judgment upon her (Ezek 5:6-8).  The “Soncino Books of the Bible” (p. 25-26) notes for Ezekiel 5:7 that Yisrael was a worse crowd of people than the pagan nations and Israel followed the evils of corrupt peoples in contrast to righteous ones.  Thus, Yisrael had sunk even deeper into wickedness than the evil heathens.  Truly, Americans and the White British Commonwealth peoples are the most depraved and evil people in all of history.  They are ripe for judgment. 

 

                                                                                                Yisrael is to be destroyed for lack of knowledge (Jer 4:22; Hos 4:6). 

 

                                                                                                Children in Yehudah will not be delivered for the righteousness of their parents (Ezek 14:13-21).   Likely, this prophecy is in the vein of the coming trouble in Jerusalem and the commencement of the Great Tribulation. 

 

                                                                                                Does the Yechezkel witness render the prophecies of Ezekiel 17, 18 and 19 fairly soon now or are they spread out over some days ? 

 

                                                                                                House of Yisrael is urged to repent (Ezek 18:30). 

 

                                                                                                Some righteous (delivered elect) in Jerusalem can turn to unrighteousness--start of Laodicea? (Ezek 18:31; II Thes 2:3). 

 

                                                                                                More Israelites escape to Jerusalem--but some are probably profaned (Ezek 5:2-4; 7:16, 22). 

 

                                                                                                Those escaping Israelites will mourn over selling their property at sacrifice prices and those staying behind need not rejoice over buying the property at bargains.  Both will be wrong.  The seller is blessed to get out alive and the buyer is not buying a bargain at any price (Ezek 7:12). 

 

                                                                                                The king (Charles?) shall mourn, the prince (William?) shall be clothed with desolation and the people’s hands shall be troubled (Ezek 7:27). 

 

                                               12/04/07J                                Start of the final, 390-day embargo or siege on Yosef Yisrael (Ephraim and Manasseh) which will officially end on the 17th day of the Fourth Scriptural month in Yechezkel’s 33d year.  It may start as an embargo which eventually becomes a more serious siege (and fulfill Ezekiel 14:17 in the time outline of Yechezkel).  It could be UN coordinated or directed--but primarily involving Russia, Islamic nations (the horns outlined before), China, Latin America, a Marxist Third World and possibly Greece, Germany and/or France.  The primary causes--prodding by ruling Amalekite bankers/masters, unpaid debts (following the flood of the world with dollar bills and bonds to buy foreign consumer goods and to finance the power quests of the plutocrats), general Third World hatred for the House of Yisrael nations, US attacks and animosity toward the Christian Orthodox peoples in the Balkans and the Muslims in the Moslem states, and US support for the state of Israel (Ezek 4:3-5; 14:17; Deut 28:52). 

 

                                               12/04/07J                                The House of Yisrael is armed, but turns back and does not respond to the foreign siege or embargo (Ps 78:9). 

 

                                               12/04/07J                                This could be the next phase in the seven years of Yakov’s Trouble on Yisrael.  Yakov’s Trouble will do several things.  Most importantly, fleshly Israelites who survive this 7 years and live on to enter the millennium in the flesh (who will likely number around 2.4 million or one percent of the presently estimated 240 million true Israelites alive in the House of Yisrael nations--thus, most Israelites will die during Yakov’s Trouble) will learn to give up, abandon and repent of their historic Christian sun worship religion, faith, culture and civilization.  Sun worship Christianity will end in Yisrael during Yakov’s Trouble.  When YESHUA returns and gathers these 2.4 million Israelites out of their captivity, they will be cleaned up of Christian sun worship, although they (other than the election) will still be people in the flesh and subject to pride and carnality (Lev 26:14-45; Ezek 11:17; 34:11-16; 36:24; 37:21; 39:27; Jer 3:12-17; 23:3; 29:14; 31:8-10; 32:37). 

 

10/05/07J                                                                               (Ezek 20:1) With elders of Yisrael. 

 

                                               10/05/07J                                The elders of Yisrael (the House of Yisrael?) come to Yechezkel to inquire of YHWH (possibly because the House of Yisrael is under siege or this could be elders from among the escaped Israelites in Jerusalem).  Is this a second separate appearance over the span of a few days or weeks?  Then or thereafter for possibly some time, Yechezkel lays out the sins of the House of Yisrael and her leaders (Ezek 20:2-44). 

 

                                               10/05/07J                                Probably following the last discourse to the elders of the House of Yisrael, the Yechezkel message to the House of Yisrael ends. 

 

                                               10/05/07J                                If the 40-day witness to Yehudah did not happen earlier, it may occur now as the Yechezkel witness may lay on his right side to face South to Jerusalem, and start his final witness of 40 days to Yehudah (Ezek 20:45-49). 

 

                                                                                                While the 40-day witness probably starts now, it still could conceivably be delayed.  There is a possibility that it takes place in Yechezkel’s 33d year. 

 

                                               10/05/07J                                Just as the depraved House of Yisrael states are sick with sexual immorality, the same indictment pertains to Yehudah, as Yechezkel outlines in the Word.  Jerusalem seems to have present the image of a naked woman (Easter?) which provokes YHWH to anger (Ezek 8:3, per writer Colin Deal, editor of “End Time News”), and a great focus upon sex in general (Ezek 16:26; 23:3).  Much attention is present with the focus on men of great flesh (Ezek 16:26)--men with large sex organs (per Dr George M. Lamsa--Colin Deal notes that today there is a process underway whereby men can increase the size of their sex organs); men with the flesh of asses (whose male organs are like those of asses, per Dr Lamsa), and men who put out semen like horses (Ezek 23:20); on female anatomy (Ezek 23:3); on pornography (Ezek 23:15, per Colin Deal); and so it goes. 

 

                                               05/06/07J                                Does the Yechezkel witness utter further prophecies about the Christian sin at the Temple or does the prophetic aspects of Ezek 8-11 start to be fulfilled at this time.  Is this when the evil House of Yisrael Israelites start to cause real trouble at the Temple Mount? 

 

                                               05/06/07J                                The blatant sun worship rituals by Christians at the Temple site may have started earlier; but it likely intensify at this time when the Jews have finished some part of the structure. Christian sun worshippers bring pictures of the long haired, effeminate Gee-Zeus into the Temple.  The Jews allow it (probably because of fear of antagonizing the Pope and the Christian world) while the elect sigh and groan (Ezek 8:3-18; Jer 7:18). 

 

                                               21/06/07J                                The Yechezkel witness of 40 days ends to Yehudah (if it started on the 10th day of the 5th month of this year). 

 

                                               22/06/04D                               Do the Jews or the House of Yisrael people in Jerusalem commence fasting on the fifth and seventh months near this time (or more correctly--earlier over the centuries since the sixth month does not seem to be the time for the start of the fasts of the 5th and 7th months), in terms of the fasting question that will come up some 70 days later on the fourth day of the ninth month (Zech 7:1-7). 

 

                                               22/06/07J                                Is the age end Yechezkel witness now over?  Will the prophet be killed or otherwise just vanish from public sight?  The Yirmeyahu witness could also now end; although there is evidence suggesting that this prophet will have further work in overturning and moving the throne of Yisrael from Britain to possibly Europe, temporarily, and later to Jerusalem where it probably will be placed with Philadelphia to go to Petra. 

 

                                               15/07/07J                                Could this be the third period or year of the heptad suggested in the Midrashim “Aggadoth Mashiach” --the period of great famine (“The Life and Times of Jesus The Messiah,” p. 211-221, by Alfred Edersheim). 

 

                                               15/07/07J                                Could this be the third period of the early teachings of the Jewish “rabbis?”  If so, this third year will see a general famine with many deaths and the Torah forgotten (“Pesikta De-Rab Kahana,” p. 109-110). 

 

                                                                                                David’s throne (certainly Yakov’s pillar stone and possibly the coronation chair made by Edward I of England) perhaps rotates initially from Britain to a neutral country (perhaps in Europe, maybe modern Babylon--Italy) just before the time of the fall of the House of Yisrael, as a part of its path or route and return to the Middle East.  This rotation will likely be one of the three overturns of the throne after Yechezkel’s 31st year and before YESHUA returns (Ezek 21:27).  Maybe, the throne, in the form of Yakov’s pillar stone, may go to Palestine (and later Petra) with Philadelphia. 

 

                                                                                                The throne of Yisrael is rotated to the land of Yisrael (perhaps Jerusalem) in its second overturn (Ezek 17:2-23). 

 

                                                                                                The prince of Yisrael (William or Harry?) goes into exile without becoming king (Ezek 12:12).  It is probable that the King (Charles?) is now dead or has been removed in some way, perhaps because of YHWH’s rejection of him and the trouble on his nation.  In any case, the throne may now be technically vacant and it is overturned.  Very possibly, even William and/or Harry may die in this exile without ever being crowned king.  Yechezkel’s prophecy on the several overturns and the assumption of the throne by YESHUA seems to allow a vacancy when YESHUA takes over in saying “and it shall be no more until He comes” (Ezek 21:27). 

 

                                                                                                Maybe, the fulfillment of Ezekiel 17 and 19 happens over some days in this time frame. 

 

                                                                                                There is a lamentation upon the princes of Yisrael (Ezek 19:1).  No heir is left on earth to the throne (Ezek 19:1-14).  Assuredly, by now, William and Harry are dead without issue.  They must have been assassinated or otherwise killed. 

 

04/09/04D                                                                              (Zech 7:1). 

 

                                               04/09/04D                               The Third Temple in Jerusalem is probably still under construction, but it likely is functioning (Zech 7:1-7; Dan 11:22-23, 30).  Does the question of fasting come up now.  The people in the state of Israel-Yehudah (either the Jews, the escaped Israelites or all of the people) are asked if they fasted on the fast days of 5th and 7th months for YHWH for these 70 years.  Does this mark off cover 70 days?  Since religious Jews have fasted on the 5th and 7th months, this question would be more suitable to House of Yisrael Israelites (now under siege?) who have never fasted for these periods as they have been sun worshipping Christians (Zech 7:4-5). 

 

 

Possibly Yechezkel’s 33d Year 

 

01/01/08J                                                                               Aviv 1 (Rishon Be’Aviv).  Is this Yehoyakhin’s 8th year (of captivity); Darius’ 5th year (Ezra 4:5-24; Jer 36:9; Ezek 1:1; Dan 9:1-2; Hag 1:1; Zech 1:1); and Antiochus Epiphanies/Maccabees’ 8th year (I Macc 1:20, 54: 2:1; 10:1-10)?  This year may be a regular year. 

 

                                               18/01/08J                                Do some of the evil Christians in Palestine conduct an Easter sun rise ceremony (Ezek 8:16) and have a sun rise celebration at the Temple (perhaps near Passover or the following Sukkot).

 

                                               02/02/08J                                This date marks a set-off of 65 days before the US is broken up.    Historically, Ephraim entered into an alliance with Syria (the Arameans) to oppose the House of Yehudah in some manner.  Ephraim was to be broken in 65 years.  It is not totally clear what this application might be in the age end, although it logically must fit.  Is it possible that the US entered into an alliance with the Netherlands/Holland or possibly even some part of Germany against the Jews generally in 1938-1941?  Doubtful, but Wall Street did finance Schicklgruber and the US seems to have went along with him until 1938 (the start of intense Jewish persecution in Germany) and/or 1939 when he attacked Poland and the USSR friends of the US.  Thus, could the 65 years run in some way from 1941?  Alternatively, this 65 years most likely could be 65 days and involve an Ephraim alliance with the Arameans (the Netherlands and/or a part of Germany?) against the Jewish state of Israel some 65 days before Ephraim is broken.  There is a complication on this in that the Arameans may also be forced into the alliance with the Russians against Israel (Isa 9:11).  In any case, this conflict with the Jewish state may be a diplomatic move in the UN to censure or condemn the state of Israel, perhaps over the Third Temple (this could also trigger the Amalekite move to get rid of the then current US president and replace him with their man).  Alternatively, if Yisrael is to be broken up on the 17th day of the 4th month, this 65 days mark-off could start about the 10th day of the 2nd month (II Kg 25:3-4; Isa 7:1-8). 

 

                                               23/02/08J                                Probably Australia, New Zealand and the remaining White government in South Africa capitulate to their enemies on the basis of a day for a year (52 days-years) in the context of their former falls preceding Samaria (II Kg 10:31-35; 15:19; I Chron 5:26). 

 

                                               07/03/08J                                Red Horse, 2d seal, Start of Assyrian (Russian) nuclear war on House of Yisrael (initially on Ephraim and Manasseh--perhaps later extending to the other tribes).  Will United Europe (less perhaps Greece, Germany and/or France) remain neutral or play only a minor role in attacking the US and Canada?  This coming time was forecast by Vladimir Zhirinovsky (a leader of the National Unity Party of Russia, as discussed earlier, in the vein of Russian support for Iraq).  That time has arrived (Lev 26:25-28; Jer 6:4; Ezek 5:1-17). 

 

                                                                                                The “Amplified Translation” mentions the “deadly missiles” of the attackers and that the attackers are “heroes” which brings to mind a resurrected Communist USSR (Jer 5:15-16). 

 

                                                                                                No House of Yisrael Israelites go out to fight (Ezek 7:14).  Is it because whatever military force Yisrael has left is made up of Blacks, women and queers--who will not fight?  Also, it is surely true that the collapse of Yisrael’s currency (the dollar) may have forced the House of Yisrael to sell much of her military arsenal of airplanes, aircraft carriers, submarines, other ships at sea and so forth.  Maybe, by now, Yisrael simply does not have many, if any, armaments left to fight with. 

 

                                                                                                House of Yisrael has no defenses (Ezek 7:14; Hos 11:6; Isa 8:9; Jer 21:4-6; Lam 2:3; 4:17). 

 

                                                                                                Nuclear attack on Yosef Yisrael starts at noon one day in the late spring/early summer. Fallout will be disastrous for unprotected Israelites exposed to it.  This attack represents YHWH’s judgment against the evil, sinning, rebellious Israelites (Isa 1:7; 6:11; 9:18-19; 17:9, 11; 33:11-12; 40:23-24; Jer 6:4; 9:7-14; 18:14-17; Ezek 5:3-4; 6:14; 7:16-18; 12:20; 15:7-8; 22:20-22, 31; 33:28-29; Hos 8:14; 11:6; Joel 2:30; Lam 2:3-5, 21; 4:11, 18-19; Amos 4:11; 5:6-9, 12; Mic 7:13; Hab 2:13).  This attack will likely come some 30 days before the end of the 390 days siege.  However, it must be allowed that it could come at the beginning.  If at the beginning (which would be in the spring of Yechezkel’s 32d year), the attack would likely concentrate on a counterforce effort, designed to eliminate all US offensive weapons posing a threat.  Also, it could come in two phases--one at the beginning and one at the end of the siege.  In any case, an early attack at the beginning opens the door for the dangers of fallout to subside; so that when the invading army comes, this problem will be eliminated or reduced. 

 

                                                                                                Nuclear war could be the subject of Kefa’s famous dissertation on the melting of the elements (atoms?) with fervent heat and the burning up of (portions?) the earth and man’s works (II Pet 3:10).  As noted in a prior chapter, this prophecy could focus upon the burn up of demonic doctrines (the Greek “stoich”) which has certainly controlled both Yisrael and the world for thousands of years.  Perhaps this nuclear attack will commence the destruction of the Christian grip upon the House of Yisrael with its teachings and push of the sun worship doctrines of demons.  With this nuclear attack and the subsequent invasion, Christendom in the House of Yisrael will surely be crushed as it now exists. 

 

                                                                                                Nuclear bombs will fall on some of Yisrael’s cities in a way like the destruction of Sodom and Gomorrah (Amos 4:11, per J. B. Phillips’ “Four Prophets”). 

 

                                                                                                In that day, YHWH will cut off Yisrael’s war chariots, destroy the Witchcraft, soothsayers and graven images in the land and pluck up the groves and destroy the cities in anger and with a vengeance (Mic 5:10-15).  Certainly, this fulfillment should start with the nuclear attack and culminate when Yisrael’s enemies actually invade and take control of the House of Yisrael nations.  Much of this text sounds familiar in terms of the linkage between Yehudah and Ephraim and the stave of unity as found in Zeckariah (Zech 9:10-13; 10:6-7; 11:10-14). 

 

                                                                                                 “He has broken the treaty; --he has vaporized the cities: --He has no regard for mankind!  Nations shall be burned to ashes, like dried thorn-bushes burned in the fire.  Trembling has seized the hypocrites, as they cry out, Oh, who among us can survive the devouring fire?  Can any of us live through this eternal burning?--this nuclear heat!,” James Griffin translation, “The Last Warning to Man,” p. C (Isa 33:8, 12, 14). 

 

                                                                                                “You (people of Israel) shall turn pale (in horror) at the helplessness of your mighty leaders which you have looked to; and you shall turn red (in fury) because of the defense systems (defensive coverings) which you have chosen!  Then the strong one (the rich and powerful politician) shall become as rotten string (he will break!), and his works for a flash (his productions shall serve as fuel for the fire); and they shall burn up--both of them together--in a fire (nuclear) that no one can extinguish!” Griffin, p. C (Isa 1:29-31). 

 

                                                                                                “Lawlessness shall burn like fire--consuming the thorns and briers; yea, it shall set ablaze the thickets of the forest (the densely populated cities), and they shall cause themselves to be blown up in a column of smoke” Griffin, p. B (Isa 9:18). 

 

                                                                                                Ephraim to be trodden under feet (Isa 28:3-4; 37:27) 

 

                                                                                                Is Ephraim’s national government immediately destroyed by this nuclear attack?  Probably yes.  Surely, a total breakdown in law and order ensues and anarchy prevails. 

 

                                                                                                The sword will destroy the fortified cities of the House of Yisrael in which the Israelites trusted (Jer 5:12-17). 

 

                                                                                                All hands shall be feeble and all knees shall be weak as water (Ezek 7:17).  The “Soncino Books of the Bible” (p. 37) gives it as a complete paralysis of strength and as sweat caused by fear as the Israelites are unable to contain themselves through cowardly terror. 

 

                                                                                                The Israelites will seek a vision from their prophets, instruction from their priests and counsel from their elders (Ezek 7:26).  “Soncino Books of the Bible” (p. 39) notes that in their bewilderment, they will look for guidance from their prophets (Christian preachers, ed)--but in vain, as the crisis leaves them without direction from their national and religious leaders.  Yes, the Christian Israelites will find no guidance, help or hope from their Christian sun worship preachers and their Christian political leaders. 

 

                                                                                                The leaders and big shots and even the little people in the conquered lands will hide themselves in the dens and rocks of the mountains (Rev 6:15-16).  Maybe, they are afraid of the enormous fallout which will cover vast portions of the conquered territories or maybe their fear is predicated upon the invasion of their land by the foreign conquerors. 

 

                                                                                                Just as the Amalek-Edomites murdered the Jewish Israelite leadership in the Temple area before the Romans seized the Temple complex, is it not likely that the age ending Edomites (Amalekite Khazars) will murder the president, vice president and various Christian leaders in order to seize the US government?  If this parallel holds and the Amalek-Edomites do take formal control of the US and other Anglo-Saxon-Celtic governments in the final days of the siege, it will be significant.  Maybe, this will be the reason that the conquering Russians and Moslem allies will hate the Amalekites so much in the waning days of the siege. 

 

                                               11/03/08J                                Does some more of the House of Yisrael nations fall to the enemy power some 35 days before Yosef Yisrael ends?  Does Northern Ireland fall to Irish Catholics? Does Scottish and Welsh nationalists break free of the United Kingdom? Does France take possession of the Channel Islands (II Kg 15:27-30). 

 

                                               ?/04/08J                                  Black horse, 3d seal, Famine in the House of Yisrael (Lev 26:26; Ezek 4:16-17; 5:16-17; 6:12; 14:21; Rev 6:5-6). 

 

                                               ?/04/08J                                  Israelites practice cannibalism (Lev 26:29; Deut 28:53; Jer 19:3-15; Lam 2:18-20; Ezek 5:10; 14:21; Zech 11:9). 

 

                                               ?/04/08J                                  Not only will the Israelites in the siege practice cannibalism, but Yechezkel seems to allow that parents might kill their own children to eat them or sons may kill their parents to eat them (Ezek 5:10, “Soncino Books of the Bible,” p. 27). 

 

                                               ?/04/08J                                  Pale Horse, 4th seal, Pestilence and disease epidemics (Ezek 5:12; Deut 28:21-22, 27; Rev 6:7-8). 

 

                                                                                                A Russian defector named Kanatjan Alibekov revealed the work of Biopreparat, a huge biological weapons development program in Russia (per article by Joseph D. Douglass Jr in the “Wall Street Journal” of Mar 10, 1998).  In war, the Russians are prepared to deliver anthrax and other biological agents into US cities by missiles.  If this Russian terrorism is launched in conjunction with Muslim dispensations from ground sources, will the result be enormous disease and pestilence epidemics in American cities? 

 

                                                                                                Fifth seal could be open here showing persecution of certain peoples.  Probably, this is a continuation of the tribulation probably started by Big Brother sometime earlier in the US and over other parts of the Anglo-Saxon-Celtic world.  The focus of this persecution will surely be on real Fundamentalists and/or Identity peoples and other non conformists with politically incorrect views.  This wrath will fall on those persons still out in the nations who have not been able to escape to safety in Jerusalem for whatever reason (I Pet 4:17; Rev 6:9-11). 

 

                                               09/04/08J                                End of the 30-day nuclear attack on the House of Yisrael (Hos 5:7; Mic 6:16-7:1; Amos 8:2).  The attacked Yisrael nations are “broken up” in the attack (II Kg 25:3-4). 

 

                                               09/04/08J                                The end of the mark off of 65 days on Ephraim Yisrael (Isa 7:1-8). 

 

                                               09/04/08J                                This may signal the end of just the formal siege segment of the attack and the start of the Assyrian (Russian) invasion of the House of Yisrael in league with Iraq, Iran, Syria, China, Latin America, and most of the rest of a Marxist third world (to probably include Japan and perhaps Greece, Germany and/or France).  These conquering nations will be servants of THE ELOHIM carrying out His prophesied judgments on the evil sinning House of Yisrael nations (they will duplicate what Babylon did to Jerusalem in c554 BCE and the Romans in 70 CE).  In other words, per YHWH, these invading powers will be the good guys and the defeated House of Yisrael nations will be the bad guys being righteously judged and punished by YHWH (II Kg 17:3-6; 18:9-10; Ezek 4:3-7). 

 

                                               17/04/08J                                End of the House of Yisrael (Yosef) opposition and governments.  Assyria (Russia) and her Islamic, Hispanic and Asian allies occupy the land and run their flags up this day (this is 390 days by inclusive counting from the start of the siege in Yechezkel’s 32d year; however, by the Jewish calculated calendar, the count is 390 days by progressive counting).  Yosef Yisrael should have been fasting on this fast day for the past 390 years instead of rebelliously ignoring it.  If they would have fasted on this day, maybe they would have understood what could happen to them and repent (Lev 26:30-32; Deut 28:25-31; Ezek 4:1-7:2; 15:1-8; Dan 11:18; Amos 6:6-7; Rev 6:13; Isa 18:5-6; 37:26; 41:1-3; Hos 13:7-9; Jer 1:14; 5:15-20).  Being Christian sun worshippers, they could have cared less about this historic Jewish fast day.  The Syrians (modern?) and the Philistines (Spain or Portugal or the generic Hispanic peoples) shall devour the US and Canada (Isa 9:12) 

 

                                               25/04/08J                                The remaining English portion of the United Kingdom falls and is conquered by the same power that destroyed the US and Canada.  This occurs eight days later (II Kg 18:13).   

 

                                                                                                The man’s (Yisrael’s) presence in the lion kingdom passes away to be oppressed by the bear (Russia) and later the serpent (Amos 5:19). 

 

                                                                                                Yisrael is destroyed by four horns--sword (of Russia?), dogs (nokri/nekar mongrel peoples like Hispanics, Arabs, and Islamics?--Matt 15:26-27; Mk 7:27-28), beasts (Hebrew behemah humanoids--Jer 31:27) and birds (Jer 15:3 Amp; Zech 1:19, 21).  Who are these birds?  Birds are sometimes evildoers or powers to possibly include Satan and his angels or demon spirits (Ezek 17:23; 31:6, 12; Dan 4:12, 14, 21-22; Matt 13:32; Rev 18:2). 

 

                                                                                                Daniel’s lion (Britain) and the eagle’s wings (the US) are now history as world powers.  They are no more (Dan 7:1-4).  To the extent that the prophetic White horse or horses pulling the chariot might be the US and Britain, they are now history. 

 

                                                                                                The Jewish Amalek-Edomite power structure over the House of Yisrael nations and parts of Western Christianity is largely broken by the Assyrians (Russians) and the Persians (Iranians).  The Amalekite banking power over the money, businesses, and financial markets and institutions is partially destroyed by the conquering four horns.  While some Amalek-Edomite Jews may retain some power and influence over a small portion of Europe, the UN and the state of Israel, they have now lost much of their international influence.  Other internationalists (likely Amalek-Edomite Christians in the Roman Catholic Church) will call most of the shots from here on until almost at the very end when the Catholic Church seems to be destroyed. 

 

                                                                                                The conquering Russian alliance will probably release some imprisoned politically incorrect people--paralleling the situation with Yirmeyahu when he was released by the Babylonians.  Released members of the election will start their movement to temporary safety in Jerusalem.  Any persons in this persecution who were foreordained as members of the very elect have been secured and delivered alive to this grant of freedom so they can now flee to Jerusalem and join their colleagues there who may have escaped the House of Yisrael earlier (Jer 39:11-12; 40:4). 

 

                                                                                                The Colored Third World persecution against the White Protestant Christian structure intensifies (as started in 1998).  Christian Church buildings, crosses, steeples and images are to be destroyed in the conquered White Anglo-Saxon-Celtic lands.  Just like Eliyahu righteously executed the evil sun worship leaders on Mount Carmel 2,800 years ago, Christian preachers, leaders and politicians will be arrested and executed soon (perhaps on the 10th day of the 5th month of Yechezkel’s 33d year).  Christian Church denominations and congregations will be destroyed except for possibly some Catholic groups in Latin conquered lands.  Protestant Christianity and particularly Fundamentalists will suffer the most from this wonderful judgment of YHWH (using the horn conquerors as His servants) to righteously destroy sun worshipping Christianity from the House of Yisrael lands and peoples.  When this judgment finally runs its course, perhaps five or so years later, surviving fleshly Israelites will be ready to make the ultimate exodus to Palestine.  They will no longer be Christian sun worshippers (Ezek 6:4-7; 13:1-23; Lev 26:30-31; I Kg 18:40; Mic 5:13-14). 

 

                                                                                                The fifth seal is clearly open with the beginning of the Russian, Chinese, Muslim and other Third World peoples’ persecution of Christianity generally and particularly Protestant Christianity in the House of Yisrael nations.  It is probably a continuation of religious persecution started before with the Christian Identity movement.  Catholic Christianity will fare a little better in Northern Ireland and in the US lands being allocated to the Hispanic invaders.  But otherwise, the Islamics, Russians and Chinese will have little use for Christians or Jews (though most Jews will have escaped to the state of Israel).  This will be an ante-type of the later coming Great Tribulation.  The world will incorrectly come to believe that this Christian persecution is the prophesied to come Great Tribulation.  Incorrectly, the Russian conquerors and their allies will be thought to be the age ending Beast government by Christian European leaders (Rev 6:9-11). 

 

                                                                                                This ante-typical tribulation probably starts in the conquered Anglo-Saxon-Celtic West and will soon extend to most of the rest of the Colored Third World.  Christians in Asia, the Moslem world and Black Africa will probably be persecuted along with those in conquered America and Britain, although perhaps not as severely.  In any case, this persecution will continue until the Pope is later able to effectively unify the world’s religions into one mass.  

 

                                                                                                (Earthquake?) The host of heaven is dissolved (Isa 34:4). 

 

                                                                                                Earthquake (could this one be the same as the above one cited in Isaiah 34:4?), eclipse of sun, 6th seal, stars (of Yisrael) fall.  Leaf from vine falls.  The vine is the House of Yisrael.  What is a leaf off of this vine--one of the modern House of Yisrael nations or some aspect of their identity and presence--like maybe, the end of their national governments (Rev 6:12-17; Lev 26:32; Acts 2:20). 

 

                                                                                                The Sixth Seal--a mighty wind shakes the fig tree (figs fall--is this the fall of the Jewish Amalek-Edomite power structure in the Anglo-Saxon-Celtic lands?), the heavens depart as a scroll, every mountain and island moves.  Is this an earthquake, an asteroid or a meteorite shower on earth or all three or is it the results of nuclear war.  From the nuclear war, will US leaders and elites (continue to) hide themselves in some of the underground cities built in the Appalachian and Rocky Mountains (Rev 6:13-14)? 

 

                                                                                                There is a possibility and perhaps a need of an ante-type or duplication of the first four trumpets.  A good opportune time for this fulfillment likely comes about the time of the sixth seal.  This can involve natural phenomenon like with the sixth seal.  But it can also occur in connection with WWIII and the nuclear attack on Yisrael which was completed as a part of the red horse or seal.  If a nuclear bomb is detonated in the oceans or at a harbor or port, it would be taken as the second trumpet and radioactive fallout could be construed to be the Wormwood star of the third trumpet (Rev 8:7-12).  Nuclear fallout would impact upon many peoples and nations over many days.  Not only would these reactions partially fulfill the sixth seal, but they could also constitute an ante-type of the still future first four trumpets.  Christians will likely believe that this sixth seal fulfillment does represent the first four trumpets. 

 

                                                                                                False Christian preachers will not enter Yehudah as they may wish or try to do (Ezek 13:1-16; 13:9).  Perhaps they will be arrested and imprisoned or murdered by the conquerors of the House of Yisrael. 

 

                                                                                                Thus, judgment commences on Yisrael’s Protestant Christian Church leaders (Ezek 13:7-23).  They lied to the people and the people will finally discover this condition.  Too, the persecution on Fundamentalist Christians in the House of Yisrael may intensify and probably the persecution on Christians in the Third World probably accelerates (which started in the late 1990s). 

 

                                                                                                By now, most of the prophecies of Ezekiel 5-20 relating to the House of Yisrael are fulfilled.  

 

                                               09/05/08J                                This is a historic Jewish fast day which commemorates the destruction of the First and Second Temples. Will this day have particular significance at this time to the Ephraim America?  Will it signify the arrest of the House of Yisrael leadership for their crimes and evil?  Will the enslavement of the surviving Israelites start today or the next day? 

 

                                               09/05/08J                                Likely here, the leadership of the House of Yisrael nations are now all under arrest and/or detainment, awaiting judgment and punishment as war criminals--probably in the Netherlands.  This likely includes political, economic, religious, social and cultural leaders. 

 

                                               10/05/08J                                This might be the single date of when the leaders of Yisrael are at last judged for their evil against the people.  As Yeshayahu saw it, they were cut off in one day (Isa 9:14-16).  This judgment may start with Yisrael’s political leaders.  Perhaps this day includes a judgment against all of her other leaders who have been arrested and detained--religious, business, social, media, etc.  Maybe, they are sentenced to death by a world tribunal and executed this date. 

 

                                                                                                Judgment on the briers and thorns and thickets of the forest.  Does this relate to the above judgment on the Amalekite leaders in the US and Britain? (Isa 9:18). 

 

                                               10/05/08J                                The surviving Israelite people ponder on how they could have been so wrong.  Maybe the words of the two prophets, the final two witnesses or the Scriptures at last begin to sink in on them as they prepare to go into exile.  This mental recall process perhaps started a year earlier and continued throughout the siege (Ezek 20:30). 

 

                                               10/05/08J                                While Ezekiel 21 to 23 seem to be prophetic of the fall of Jerusalem to the Beast man, it also could have some dual features which link to the fall of the House of Yisrael (in that the fall of Jerusalem was a sign for the fall of the House of Yisrael). 

 

                                                                                                More Christian sinners to die now and in the future in this ante-typical fulfillment of the Great Tribulation on White Anglo-Saxon-Celtic Christians launched by the Russians, Chinese, Moslems and others.  This persecution is a part of Yakov’s Trouble.  This motion will be good for members of the election because this tribulation also helps to purify them.  Many Christians (particularly preachers and leaders who have been leading the people astray) will die, although members of the election will survive long enough so that they can be later sealed (probably fairly quickly in terms of time). 

 

                                                                                                The first two prophets might be in Jerusalem or elsewhere at this time working on the restoration of true worship.  Or perhaps, they will be murdered at some point in time by the Russian-Islamic alliance, the evil Amalekite Jews in Palestine, or some other party in a way that will fool most Christians and Jews to come to believe that these first two prophets were, in fact, the final two witnesses.  Alternatively, they could simply vanish and people come to accept the belief that they were the final two witnesses and had been simply translated to heaven.  In any case, the work of the first two prophets is becoming limited by this time as their work is now terminated or preparing to terminate in some fashion. 

 

                                               15/07/08J                                Could this be the fourth yearly period of the heptad suggested in the Midrashim “Aggadoth Mashiach” --a period of neither famine or plenty (“The Life and Times of Jesus The Messiah,” p. 211-221, by Alfred Edersheim). 

 

                                               15/07/08J                                Could this be the fourth yearly teachings of the early Jewish “rabbis?”  This fourth year will have a scarcity of some things while an abundance of others (“Pesikta De-Rab Kahana,” p. 109-110). 

 

                                               15/07/08J                                Russia and the Islamics invade Palestine and probably surround Jerusalem and/or the Jewish state in an ante-type of Ezekiel 38 (Dan 11:13-19).  If there has been any problems from Egypt or Saudi Arabia, this would be a good time for the Northern alliance to also invade those countries. 

 

                                               ?/07/08J                                  The Russian and Islamic army (which invaded Palestine) is destroyed by YHWH (ante-type of Ezek 39). Yehudah is miraculously delivered by YHWH.  The world will incorrectly believe that Ezekiel 38 and 39 and the Christian-anticipated so-called battle of Armageddon have now been fulfilled (Isa 10:32; 32:9-20; 37:22; Dan 11:19).  WWIII is now officially over. 

 

                                               23/07/08J                                Is it possible that the 40 days Yechezkel witness to Yehudah happens this late date--per Ezek 20:45-49 (if it did not happen earlier)? 

 

                                                                                                The Russian bear with the three ribs in its mouth has passed into history as a world power (Dan 7:3-5; Amos 5:19).  To whatever extent, the Russian bear was a red horse or horses pulling a chariot, it is now history. 

 

                                                                                                Daniel’s leopard beast with four wings and four heads arise as the next threatening world power from the Asian East.  The four will likely include China, Japan, Korea and perhaps Indo-China, India and/or Pakistan.  This beast will scare the daylights out of White Europeans as it ravages portions of the lands of the House of Yisrael nations and most of Asia.  Australia has been called “New China” on Chinese maps for quite some time so she is doomed if she has not already fallen--which most likely happened earlier with the fall of the House of Yisrael (Dan 7:6). 

 

                                                                                                Any lagging or delay in a powerful United Europe is now over.  Europe heals the deadly wound to the old Roman Empire and finishes uniting it to become the leading power to combine the world into a conflagration of ten entities.  The little horn Vatican power provides the religious glue to hold the system together.  United Europe takes the initiative to organize the world into a world government built around the UN (EU will dominate this union, per “Spotlight” of May 4, 1998).  While the leopard Asian block is in this group and temporarily subsides in its rampaging, it is not totally subservient and will ultimately flex its muscles against Europe in the later age end (Dan 7:7-8; Amos 5:19; Rev 13:1-4; 17:3).  The United Europe (EU) government is largely in place. 

 

                                                                                                Initially, a tax collector takes over in Europe and rules for a few days, before he is destroyed (Dan 11:20). 

 

                                                                                                Perhaps the Beast man (possibly Constantine II, King of the Hellenes, whose number is 666 in Hebrew) now takes over or at least gains some prominence in Greece initially and later over the EU.  Though he racially is a true Yehudi (and a descendant of David), he is a modern ethnic Assyrian and thus the prophetic Scriptural Assyrian (Isa 11:5; Mic 5:5-6).  He may also have some Amalekite genes.  He assumes an influential role in the UN.  This United Europe becomes the classic King of the North to be contrasted with the Moslem King of the South alliance in the Middle East and North Africa which possibly also begins to take some shape at this time.  The EU army (developing from the remnants of NATO) becomes the primary military force of the UN’s New World Order. 

 

                                                                                                The coming Beast ruler is a man of deceit and gains rulership by deceit (Dan 8:23-25; 11:21). 

 

                                                                                                The world is now divided into ten geographical segments outlined in 1973 by the Club of Rome--North America, Western Europe, Eastern Europe, Japan, Centrally Planned Asia, North Africa and Middle East, South America, South and Southeast Asia, Main Africa and Rest of the Developed World.  Will the UN Security Council remain at ten members?  If so, this is another ten.  This before projected division could be slightly modified.  But it has to be significant in that the age end Beast system will have ten toes and ten horns (Dan 2:40-43; 7:7; Rev 13:1). 

 

                                                                                                World headquarters is clearly established in Babylon on the Euphrates.  Likely, Colin Powell, Mikhail Gorbachev and King Constantine II of Greece all will have significant roles to play in this age end conglomeration.  Bill Clinton might could be in this mix, although he probably will be murdered by the Amalekites or judged by the conquering Russians at an earlier time.  Constantine II, the Assyrian, will probably become the world’s governor as UN Secretary General--whose office will have new powers under the new world government (Zech 5:6-11). 

 

                                                                                                At some point in time, the Russian, Chinese and Islamic conquest of the House of Yisrael nations passes to the EU or the UN for administration.  It might be that the alliance of the four horns and their war against the House of Yisrael nations is sanctioned or monitored by EU or the UN and especially since France, Greece and maybe even Germany may have some participation in this alliance (after all, almost all countries around the world hate the House of Yisrael nations by now) 

 

                                                                                                When the Beast man of EU takes over, he firms up the alliance with some evil Jews, surely Amalekites (Dan 11:21-24).  He soon enters the Kingdom of the South (perhaps to shore up his oil supplies), stops in Jerusalem to plunder some riches, and firms up his Amalekite allies in Judea (Ezek 16:1-63; Dan 11:25-28; I Macc 1:29-40). 

 

                                               15/08/08J                                Is this an intensification of the final aspects of Yakov’s Trouble of seven Scriptural years upon Yisrael (to conclude at Sukkot of Yechezkel’s 37th-39th years when the last of the fleshly Israelites are recovered and restored to Palestine)? 

 

                                               15/08/08J                                Some 90% of House of Yisrael, Christian, sun worshipping Israelites are to be dead by this time (Ezek 3:12; 5:1-3; 6:11-12; 7:15; Isa 6:13; 10:21-22; Deut 28:62; Amos 5:1-3; 8:3). 

 

                                               15/08/08J                                Does the captivity and enslavement of the surviving House of Yisrael Israelites (minus the very elect) officially commence now? 

 

                                                                                                Surviving White Americans and other English Anglo Saxons will be rounded up at some point in time and shipped off to prisons/camps in containment areas (maybe, in the Midwest US and a rural place in England). 

 

                                                                                                Land of the conquered House of Yisrael nations is divided to the beasts of the field and only nokri/nekar thorns and briers remain (Ezek 7:24; Amos 7:7; Isa 5:6; 7:25; 32:13). 

 

                                                                                                The Mexicans take control of most of their former US lands (TX, NM, AZ, UT, NV, most of CA and parts of OK, KS and WY).  The Chinese may get much of the Los Angeles, San Francisco and Vancouver BC areas. Russia gets AK, BC, Northwest Canada, WA and probably OR.  Japan gets Hawaii and most of the island possessions of the US like Wake Island, Guam and the Marianas.  Cuba gets Florida.  The American Indians get OK, KS and portions of the great plains and Rockies in the US and Canada.  France gets Quebec.  Newfoundland may possibly gain independence.  The Blacks (the Muslims?) get the Old South (GA, AL, SC, NC, AR, LA, MS, TN, VA, DC and possibly KY and MD).  Probably, New England, New York and New Jersey will be so polluted (especially from radioactive fallout) that no one can live there.  The rest of the US and Canada will be put under a UN protectorate of some sort.  Some surviving ethnics in America and Canada will return to their European homelands (Italians to Italy, Greeks to Greece, French to France or Quebec, Germans to Germany, Poles to Poland, Russians to Russia or to their newly seized lands in North America, etc). 

 

                                                                                                A similar reaction will occur in conquered Britain, Australia, New Zealand and South Africa.  The Chinese seize Australia and likely New Zealand.  Control of Northern Ireland probably has already passed to the Irish Republic beforehand and Whites in the RSA were assuredly already killed or expelled earlier.  France takes over the Channel Islands.  The Scots and Welsh “may” be allowed to stay in their lands and possibly may gain some limited independence subject to a European or UN protectorate.  England will likely see areas established for the Asian Indians and Caribbean Blacks.  Whatever is left of England will be put under a European protectorate.  Surviving White Anglo Saxons will not be allowed to stay long in their lands. 

 

                                               15/08/08J                                White Americans and other Anglo Saxons will get to live in their remaining protectorate areas only briefly before being sent off (sold) to slave and concentration work camps around the world in payment of outstanding debts.  Americans never understood that while they were flooding the world with dollar bills to buy foreign consumer goods and give away to various foreign nations as bribes and payoffs in support of the ruling plutocrats that there would ultimately come a day of reckoning. 

 

                                                                                                Ultimately, the surviving Americans will begin to understand what has been happening to themselves (starting in 1913) all the while that they sat back and allowed their national leaders to destroy their nation(s).  In particular, people will understand the error of their way in the elections of Slick Clinton and their allowances for him to commit treason for campaign funds and be an immoral disgrace to the world.  When the few surviving White Anglo-Saxon-Celtic peoples are sold into foreign slavery, they will finally begin to put two and two together and begin to understand.  Rather than trusting the evil Wilson, Roosevelt, Truman, Kennedy, Johnson and the others, they should have been trusting in YESHUA (Lev 26:44-45). 

 

                                               15/08/08J                                Probably, the surviving Israelites (now held in containment areas in the US Middle West, and maybe, in some part of England) are prepared for shipment to slave labor camps in Siberia and other sites owned by the conquerors.  Actual removal may start at this time (Ezek 12:3).  The remaining leaders of America, Canada and Britain  (at least those not yet judged and executed) are shipped to an international court in the Netherlands for trial as war criminals. 

 

                                                                                                Remaining Israelites in the House of Yisrael lands go into captivity, slavery and exile (Ezek 6:8-9; 12:4-6, 11, 15-16; 37:21; Lev 26:33-39; Deut 28:32-42; Hos 3:4; 4:19; 5:9; 8:13; Jer 9:16; 10:16-18; 13:24-26; 15:2, 12-14; 16:3-13; 52:14-15; Mic 1:10-16; Lam 4:20; Amos 3:12; 5:27; 7:17; Isa 3:16-17; 5:13; 6:12; 51:17-23). 

 

                                                                                                Heavenly scene of elect (of Passover and Pentecost harvests) in heaven (Rev 7:9-17). 

 

                                                                                                A delay in the 7 trumpets for 1/2 hour (Rev 8:1-4).  If one prophetic hour is 30 days, does this mean a delay for 15 days?  Logically, the trumpets sound later (maybe, in Yechezkel’s 34th year) and not now.  Or perhaps, this event is to be dated earlier or still later in this chronology. 

 

                                                                                                At some point in time, probably in the fall of Yechezkel’s 33d year, YHWH takes action against the evil Christians who have brought their idols into the Temple and who conducted sun rise worship services in the Temple (Ezek 11:8-25).  The worst offenders are killed and eventually all of them (less the very elect) will be expelled to the borders of Yisrael for judgment (by the Beast in Yechezkel’s 34th year).  Are religious Orthodox or Ultra Orthodox Jews YHWH’s executioners in this?  The Bands between Ephraim and Yehudah are broken (Zech 10:7;  11:7-14). 

 

                                                                                                While the sinning House of Yisrael people (Christians?) are righteously executed by YHWH (Ezek 9:4-11), there is a group of Israelites in Judea who are sealed and protected by YHWH (Ezek 9:4). 

 

                                                                                                Possible sealing of 144,000 firstfruits of Sukkot election (does this sealing happen after these people have repented because of the trouble that they have just faced?).  These 144,000 Israelites have to now be alive and have survived all the trouble so far.  From here on out, many of these people will now die in the faith and become a part of the first resurrection in the age end (Ezek 9:2-4, 11; I Chron 27:1-34; Isa 4:3; Dan 12:1; Mal 3:16-17; Matt 24:22, 31; Rev 1:6; 3:12; 7:2-8; 20:4, 15). 

 

                                                                                                Coals of fire (judgment) are spread over Jerusalem (Ezek 10:2).  Since Jerusalem was the ante-type, could these coals of fire be spread over the House of Yisrael nations? 

 

                                                                                                A messenger takes a censor, fills it with fire (judgment?) from the altar and casts it upon the earth, and there follows thunder, blasts, sounds and an earthquake (Rev 8:5).  This event is the same or very close or very similar to the one at Ezekiel 10:2.  But the wording in the two instances is slightly different, suggesting that they may indeed involve two separate events. 

 

                                                                                                Initially, the Jews don’t tithe as they should do to support the Temple.  The Eliyahu witness (perhaps in the form of the civil leader with influence from mental telepathy) condemns them and calls for their repentance (Mal 3:5-15). 

 

                                                                                                Is Yehudah and Jerusalem now blessed by YHWH?  (Zech 8:1-23). 

 

                                                                                                Peace in Jerusalem which is blessed by YHWH (Zech 8:1-6). 

 

                                                                                                More of the elect remnant come to Jerusalem (Zech 8:7-8). 

 

                                                                                                Amalek-Edomites in Yehudah claim the land of Yisrael is theirs, not the returning Israelites (Ezek 11:15; 35:10). 

 

                                                                                                Is elect remnant now in Jerusalem and blessed by YHWH? (Zech 8:9-22). 

 

                                                                                                There is a religious revival among the Jews in Israel (Zech 8:14-15; 11:1-14; II Chron 30:1-27; 31:1-21; 32:1-21). 

 

                                                                                                Judaism (Orthodox? The Daughter of Jerusalem?) and religious Jews are popular in Jerusalem and are greatly respected by the election who very quickly are learning that Judaism’s teaching and support of the Torah have merit (Zech 8:23).  

 

 

                                               10/10/08J                                This should be the classic time that the army of the King of the North (the Beast power) assembles at Megiddo to attack Jerusalem and take control of the Temple Mount to allow the daily sacrifice to stop and the abomination of desolation to be set up.  However, this assembling may not be necessary if the Beast and False Prophet already have some oversight on the Temple Mount as a result of the previous agreement between the Jews and Arabs over the status of the Temple Mount (this agreement may have allowed the EU or the Vatican oversight).  Does this seem to be an act of intimidation at first? 

 

 

Possibly Yechezkel’s 34th Year 

 

01/01/09J                                                                               Aviv 1 (Rishon Be’Aviv).  Is this Yehoyakhin’s 9th year (of captivity); Darius’ 6th year (Ezra 4:5-24; Jer 36:9; Ezek 1:1; Dan 9:1-2; Hag 1:1; Zech 1:1); and Antiochus Epiphanies/Maccabees’ 9th year (I Macc 1:20, 54: 2:1; 10:1-10)?  This year may be a regular year. 

 

                                               05/01/09J                                The final two witnesses are possibly in Yehudah.  Maybe, their public ministry of preaching to the world commences at this time--and will last 1,260 days (Zech 7:6-14; Rev 11:3).  While there are manifestly an abundance of reasons why the final two witnesses probably start their public witnessing at this time, the case can be made that their work is precipitated by the rise of world government and the world ruler (the Beast a few weeks earlier) and the developing motion of the Beast to invade Palestine/Israel in order to stop the work of righteousness by the Jews at the Third Temple. 

 

                                               05/01/09J                                One of the most urgent possibly important tasks of the final pair of witnesses (if they are in business, publicly prophesying at this time) is the announcement of the start of a possible great drought over some part of or perhaps all of the earth. 

 

                                               05/01/09J                                The final two witnesses also start proclaiming the trumpet messages (Rev 11:6).  These trumpets may involve natural catastrophes which start at this time and continue in some form off and on over the next three years.  In other words, these trumpets are not just a one time event.  Their ultimate fulfillment probably covers much or all of several weeks, months or years. 

 

                                                                                                First Trumpet judgment from the two witnesses, hail and fire mingled in blood to earth (pollution?), 1/3 trees and grass burnt up (Rev 8:7).  Exodus 9:22 was an ante-type of this trumpet.  Could this be a meteorite shower? 

 

                                                                                                YHWH pours out pestilence in blood (Ezek 14:19). 

 

                                                                                                Second Trumpet judgment of the two witnesses comes with a mountain of fire to the sea.  The option at this time on this event is natural pollution from a huge asteroid or comet?  A large asteroid, comet or other space object striking one of the oceans would cause massive flooding problems.  1/3 of the sea becomes blood, 1/3 of life & ships in the sea die or are destroyed and some islands vanish into the oceans (Rev 8:8-9).  An ante-type of this event was recorded at Exodus 7:17.  This trumpet is to be contrasted with the 7th last plague which causes the earth to capsize--making all the islands vanish into the sea (Rev 16:20). 

 

                                                                                                Third Trumpet of the two witnesses arrives with the Wormwood star to poison 1/3 of rivers and fountains of water (Rev 8:10-11; Jer 9:15).  Exodus 7:17 presented the ante-type from Egypt.  The better view is that it is a natural event from a comet, asteroid or some meteorites which would pass through the earth’s atmosphere causing a chemical reaction to produce “hydro-cyanic acid” (a water soluble, colorless aromatic acid which is very poisonous).  Per Dr Rod Lewis this produces a poisonous rain which would pollute portions of earth’s waters like the wormwood phenomenon where the waters become bitter or poisoned (video “Shackles of the New World Order”). 

 

                                                                                                Could the bitter waters of Marah connect here (Ex 15:23)? 

 

                                                                                                Fourth Trumpet judgment of the two witnesses.  The Sun (an eclipse of the sun?), moon and stars are darkened by 1/3 (Rev 8:12-13).  Please note that this trumpet produces a darkening of the sun and moon by 1/3--evidently from volcanic ash or meteorite dust that pollutes the atmosphere.  Could an ante-type of this have occurred at Exodus 10:21?  This darkening is to be contrasted with the nova of the sun in the fourth and fifth plagues later coming (Rev 16:8-11). 

 

                                                                                                These trumpet judgments of Revelation 8 will be incorrectly perceived by Christendom and the world’s leaders as the seven last plagues of Rev 16:1-17.  The world’s Christian population will be hyped up by the Pope and Christian leaders to expect the soon return of their Gee-Zeus. 

 

                                                                                                Possibly one of the early tasks of the two final witnesses might be a measurement of the Temple and a count of its worshippers (Rev 11:1-2).  This process should not be confused with the measurement of Jerusalem in Zechariah 1 and 2 which probably happens in about Yechezkel’s 30th, 31st or 32d years.  The reed is a symbol of weakness and it might be that the measurement is a symbolic act preparing the Temple and its worshippers for defilement by Satan and the Beast power for the next 42 months, as is clearly stated in Revelation 11:2.  For sure, the real two witnesses will want to take action to preserve any Temple artifacts to keep them from being defiled by the Beast power.  The “Jewish New Testament Commentary” (p. 818) says that a measurement is used for either preservation or destruction. 

 

                                                                                                But if the Beast army is present now at Megiddo, does it proceed to invade Palestine and attack Jerusalem (because the Beast has had indignation against the Covenant--Dan 11:25-39)?

 

                                                                                                Rumors will abound that Christendom’s “Christ” has come or is about to come (Matt 24:23-24). 

 

                                               ?/01/09J                                  Fifth trumpet, 1st woe, Satan and his demons are released from the bottomless pit (Rev 9:1-2). 

 

                                               ?/01/09J                                  Does Satan and his demons make their last effort at ascending into the heavens in their UFOs to try to take over YHWH’s throne (Rev 12:3-4, 7-9).  Is there now war in the heavens?  Is Satan and his demons soon thrust back to earth? 

 

                                               15/01/09J                                Is this the promised Latter Rain to come upon Philadelphia, perhaps in the form of Ephraim (Zech 9:1-12; 10:1)?  Does the Apostle Yohanan (one of the final two witnesses) administer the Baptism of The RUACH HA KODESH to Philadelphia at this time? 

 

                                               15/01/09J                                The Latter Rain comes on the very elect or does it come earlier  (Zech 10:1; Joel 2:23; Acts 1:2; Hos 6:3; Jas 1:18; 5:7; Jer 5:24)?  Does this action parallel what happened to the disciples in John 20:22 (cited in Acts 1:2) where YESHUA administered The RUACH HA KODESH as a separate action from the Baptism of Fire (Joel 2:28-30; Acts 1:8; 2:1-4, 17-18).  Possibly, the Baptism of Fire occurs in the early history of Philadelphia for some part of the group for service (in other words, the Baptism of Fire comes first to some part of the very elect for service [as noted earlier in this chronology] and the Baptism of The RUACH HA KODESH comes later on the whole group as it is preparing to escape to Petra). 

 

                                               15/01/09J                                Will YHWH wash away the filth of the Daughter of Zion with the Latter Rain Baptism before she leaves for Petra? (Isa 4:4). 

 

                                               19/01/09J                                This is the start of a mark off of 1,260 days to Yom Kippur and 1,335 days to Hanukkah in Yechezkel’s 37th year.  These dates could slip up to eight days (because of the eight days of Hanukkah). 

 

                                               20/01/09J                                Philadelphia begins her escape from Jerusalem to Petra for five days (Zech 9:12; Ezek 20:33-39; Matt 24:16, 22, 24, 28; Mk 13:14-20; Lu 21:20-21, 36; Lam 2:1-18; I Kg 19:18; Rom 11:4; I Chron 29:4; Isa 16:1; Rev 3:7-22; 12-14; Dan 12:1).  This flight probably occurs during or just after the time of the Feast of Unleavened Bread. 

 

                                                                                                The remnant of the vine of Yisrael (Philadelphia) is transferred to the wilderness (Ezek 19:13). 

 

                                                                                                The South (Yehudah) is now ready for judgment (Ezek 20:45-49). 

 

                                                                                                The Beast is ready to act (Ezek 21:2-19). 

 

                                                                                                Sinning House of Yisrael people (in Palestine?) to be gathered into Jerusalem for judgment at her border (Ezek 22:19-22; 11:9). 

 

                                                                                                No rain in Judea (Ezek 22:24). 

 

                                                                                                The House of Yisrael is already judged in the summer of Yechezkel’s 33d year.  The Jews and Jerusalem are now to be judged (Ezek 23:1-28, 33). 

 

                                               23/01/09J                                The Beast man and False Prophet (the Pope) enter old Jerusalem and take possession of the Temple Mount.  This assemblage may be accompanied by the Beast army or at least some military force from EU. 

 

                                               23/01/09J                                The Beast would murder the two final witnesses (Yohanan and Eliyahu?) at this time, if it was possible.  But YHWH will protect them until their 1,260 days of testimony is concluded (Rev 11:5). 

 

                                               ?/01/09J                                  The Jews initially try to fight against this entering army or people from Europe, but probably cannot do much beyond guerrilla action  (Zech 10:3-5). 

 

                                               24/01/09J                                The Jews are soon defeated by the Beast army (Zech 11:1-7). 

 

                                               24/01/09J                                The Beast army conquers Jerusalem (Ezek 21:1-25; Dan 11:29-32; Zech 11:1-17)--perhaps during or sometime soon after the Feast of Unleavened Bread. 

 

                                               24/01/09J                                Satan loses in his move into the heavens and is cast back to earth.  Does Satan and his demons come back in UFOs and are they accepted as the returning Gee-Zeus and his angels. 

 

                                               24/01/09J                                Satan causes a flood to come upon Edom or Jordan to try to stop or destroy Philadelphia.  But the earth helps her (Rev 12:15-16). 

 

                                               24/01/09J                                Philadelphia arrives at Petra in about 5 days time.  From Jerusalem, Petra is in the Seir mountains where the eagles gather.  Per Ovadyah’s words (Oba 1:4), the eagles’ nests are in the Petra area which is largely inaccessible except to the eagles and certain other vultures (“Soncino Books of the Bible,” p. 129).  This movement by Philadelphia is not in the winter and it must be completed within 6 days (Matt 24:16-28).  Beyond the fact that certain eagles do seem to nest in the Petra area, there is another interesting fact about this prophecy.  Some of the great vultures of the world (at least one or more specie) spend their winters in Africa.  In the spring at Passover time, they make a flight over Palestine (to likely include the Petra area) to the Steppes of Russia where they nest and hatch their young.  In the fall, near Sukkot, these birds return over Palestine in their trip back to Africa for the winter.  Could some of these vultures have some involvement in this prophecy.  A vulture is not an eagle, per se, but both are birds of prey and similar in some respects.  The Greek “aetos” is the word in Matthew 24:28 and it can cover both birds (per “Davis Dictionary of the Bible”).  “The Expositor’s Greek New Testament” allows that the carrion vulture are probably meant in Matthew 24:28.  Philadelphia should be securely at Petra by the 24th day of the first month of Yechezkel’s 34th year and to stay there for 1,260 days to around the 15th day of the 7th month of Yechezkel’s 37th year. 

 

                                               24/01/09J                                The throne and the vine are transferred to the wilderness in a third overturn?  Does Philadelphia now have possession of David’s literal throne at Petra (the chair and Yakov’s pillar stone)?  Or is it secured in safety somewhere in the Judean wilderness--like the Dead Sea Scrolls were secured in caves 2,000 years ago? (Ezek 19:13).  More likely, Philadelphia takes the physical throne with her to the wilderness in Petra. 

 

                                               24/01/09J                                The daily sacrifice is stopped at the Temple for 1,290 days (Dan 9:26-27; 11:31). 

 

                                               24/01/09J                                Does the presence of EL as The RUACH HA KODESH depart the Temple this date (Ezek 11:23)?  The “Soncino Books of the Bible” (p. 62, Ezekiel) says that the Merkabah left the city and halted on the Mount of Olives for three and one-half years, hoping that Yisrael would repent. 

 

                                               24/01/09J                                Jerusalem and the Temple have been trodden down by House of Yisrael Christian Israelites (ethnon).  With the fall of the House of Yisrael nations and now Jerusalem (which includes the ethnon who had fled to Jerusalem for safety), this trodding down will now end and especially as these evil Christians are slain (Lu 21:23-24). 

 

                                               24/01/09J                                The Abomination of Desolation is set up in the Temple--possibly over the altar in some manner.  Is this a statute of Gee-Zeus--Satan? (Ezek 23:38-39; Matt 24:15; I Macc 1:54-59).  This event parallels the start of the Great Tribulation, to be outlined below.  The Temple site will be defiled for 1,290 days until YESHUA enters Jerusalem and cleans it--from Bul 15 to perhaps around Hanukkah in Yechezkel’s 37th year.  These events could slip up to eight days later. 

 

                                                                                                The Essene Damascus Document (b), found in 1911 at the Cairo Geniza, states “When the oracle of Zechariah comes true, ‘O sword, be lively and smite my shepherd and the man loyal to Me--so says God.  If you strike down the shepherd, the flock will scatter.  Then I will turn my power against the little ones’ (Zech 13:7).  But those who give heed to God are ‘the poor of the flock’ (Zech 11:7): they will escape in the time of punishment, but all the rest will be handed over to the sword when the Messiah of Aaron and of Israel comes, just as it happened during the time of the first punishment, as Yechezkel said, ‘Make a mark on the foreheads of those who moan and lament’ (Ezek 9:4), but the rest were given to the sword that makes retaliation for covenant violations” (“The Dead Sea Scrolls, A New Translation,” p. 58). 

 

                                               24/01/09J                                The two staves (Beauty and Bands or Grace and Unity) are broken (Zech 11:7-14).  Could these two staves be either the first two prophets or the final two witnesses?  The better option is that the these two staves are actually the prevailing conditions or situations with the Jews in terms of YHWH (in that YHWH has showered the Jews in Jerusalem with grace and mercy from 1967 to this time), and in terms of the Israeli connections to Ephraim from 1948 until Ephraim America is conquered in the summer of Yechezkel’s 33d year; or when Philadelphia breaks from Yehudah to flee to Petra (in that Philadelphia is probably one of the major remnants of Ephraim in Jerusalem in Aviv of Yechezkel’s 34th year); or when Christian Israelites in Jerusalem are cast out of Yehudah by the Jews just before the arrival of the Beast.  The breaking of the two staves may not occur precisely at one moment in time, but may be involved in a transitioning motion from the summer of Yechezkel’s 33d year to the conquest of Jerusalem by the Beast in the spring of Yechezkel’s 34th year. 

 

                                               24/01/09J                                Bond between Yisrael and Yehudah (involving the religious Jews of Yehudah and the earlier House of Yisrael nations, the Messianic Israelites of the House of Yisrael now present in Jerusalem and/or the collective House of Yisrael and the general Jewish nation?) is broken in the form of Bands or Unity.  Is it possible that the first two prophets or the final two witnesses focused their work upon the need of Messianic Israelites to leave the House of Yisrael lands and come to Jerusalem to bind with or connect to the religious Jews in building the Temple.  Maybe, both good and bad Israelites come to escape the trouble upon Yisrael.  Do the Jews act to cast surviving bad House of Yisrael Israelites outside the borders of the state of Israel which allows them to be captured and enslaved by the conquering Beast power?  In any case, any protection that the Jewish government or people provided these Israelites is now over (Zech 11:14).  Surely, this could also be the time when Philadelphia has separated from Yehudah--as she will be making her move to Petra. 

 

                                               24/01/09J                                Three shepherds are cut off in one month.  Who are these three? (Zech 11:8).  “The Amplified Version” gives these three as the civil authorities, priests and prophets (could this murder in one month be the first two prophets plus the high priest and the civil ruler of Jerusalem--at this time or around a month earlier)? 

 

                                               25/01/09J                                Typical start of Great Tribulation for 1,260 days (Jer 9:7; Zech 11:4-7; Matt 24:9; Rev 12:17; 13:7-10; I Macc 1:41).  This could come as early as the Feast of Unleavened Bread or shortly thereafter. 

 

                                               25/01/09J                                The False Prophet imposes the mark of the Beast (666) on man probably through the secular Beast government.  Is this the Christian cross, revived in importance?  Or is the weekly cycle disrupted in some way by a calendar change?  Is it possible that a so-called Seventh day Sabbath might be imposed on the world--but in the context of an altered or disrupted weekly cycle (Zech 10:2-3; 11:15; Rev 13:16)? 

 

                                               25/01/09J                                Does Satan now enter the Temple as Gee-Zeus and Gawd or is there some delay in this event?  An Aramaic fragment from the Dead Sea Scrolls seems to allude to this person and calls him the “son of God” (“Judaism and the Origins of Christianity,” p. 208).  The conflict here might be clarified by David Flusser who quoted Lactantius’ “Institutions” which he said quotes a Jewish writing called the “Oracles of Hystaspes” (made before the fall of Jerusalem to Rome) which suggests that this age ending Beast “will constitute and call himself God, and will order himself to be worshipped as the Son of God” (ibid, p. 433).  The world will see this as the start of the millennium under “Jesus Christ” and “God” (Deut 9:5; Dan 8:9-27; II Thes 2:3-9).  It could come as late as the 3rd month. 

 

                                               25/01/09J                                Satan sits in the set apart (kodesh) section of the Temple as “Jesus Christ and God” --in the so-called secret chamber or the holy of holies (Matt 24:26).  His time in the Temple may be about 1150 days (1150 days of the 2300, mornings and evenings of Dan 8:14), if it ends in the third month of Yechezkel’s 37th year--when he likely goes out to assemble the world’s armies at Armageddon to attack the returning YESHUA.  This 1150 days is close to the 1,290 days of the abomination of desolation, minus the 150 days that Satan torments man). 

 

                                                                                                The Beast government (world dictatorship) is now established at Babylon on the Euphrates (UN headquarters?) under one man (Constantine II), perhaps as UN Secretary General or just the world’s governor (Zech 5:1-11; Rev 13:1-6). 

 

                                                                                                The world’s politically correct religions are unified in the Christian ecumenical movement.  This is a healing of the deadly wound imposed on Catholicism and the Pope in the Protestant Reformation.  Pope (Sixtus Six?) enters Jerusalem as the world’s pastor.  He is the False Prophet and two horned Beast of Revelation 13:11 (Zech 11:3; 11:15-17; Rev 13:11-18; 17:1-6). 

 

                                                                                                The False Prophet (the Pope, likely Sixtus Six) works miracles (Rev 13:13-14). 

 

                                                                                                The False Prophet creates an image of the Beast to be worshipped (Rev 13:14-15).  Is this image spread around the world in Christian Churches as a statute, picture, or something else so that people around the globe can have it constantly at hand for worship and adoration (as now happens in Christendom with the pictures of the Christian Gee-Zeus).  Actually, in the form of the pictures of Gee-Zeus (which were really representations of Satan, as discussed earlier), many Christian people have had this image in their homes, churches and possessions for vast ages--possibly as an ante-type of the final image. 

 

                                                                                                YHWH will redeem the Daughter of Zion (Philadelphia) from her enemies and bring her forth as a woman in travail and rescued from Babylon (Mic 4:10; Rev 12:1-6, 13-16).  She will dwell in safety at Petra (Isa 33:14-16; Matt 24:15-32). 

 

                                                                                                O ELOHIM YHWH, the strength of my salvation, Who hast sheltered my head in a sukkah in the day of battle (Ps 140:7). 

 

                                                                                                YHWH hidedth the very elect in His sukkah at Petra in the day of trouble (Ps 27:5). 

 

                                                                                                (On judgment day), There shall be a sukkah for shade from the searing heat of that day (Isa 4:6). 

 

                                                                                                The MOST HIGH will divide the sukkah of Sodom (before it turned to wickedness--Gen 13:10) into many, many portions for the righteous to dwell in, “Pesikta De-Rab Kahana,” p. 466 (Ps 60:6). 

 

                                                                                                With His pinions, He will shelter thee as in a sukkah.  “Pesikta De-Rab Kahana” (p. 466-467) notes per R. Levy that whoever obeys the command to dwell in the sukkah in this world (Lev 23:43; Deut 16:13; Neh 8:15-17) is so sheltered from malevolent things that they will not be able to hurt him (Ps 91:1, 4). 

 

                                                                                                The ante-typical tribulation of Christians will largely end in the Colored Third World as the Pope is able is unify the world’s religions into one mass.  Any surviving Protestant Churches and people will come back to Rome as subservient members of the great age ending religious confederation under the Pope.  The Pope is now the world’s pastor.  He not only leads the Christian world, but also all the other faiths in some type of ecumenical arrangement.  While the religious persecution on White Anglo Saxons may end now (to the extent that they still claim to be Christians), their troubles are far from over since most of them are in slavery or servitude in some manner.  Thus, Yakov’s Trouble continues for them. 

 

                                                                                                Does the Beast now commence YHWH’s judgment on the Philistines (Spain or Portugal and/or Latin nations) or the Palestinians, Moab (France or Jordan?) and Edom or do these remarks pertain to the old land areas occupied by those people? (Ezek 25:1-17). 

 

                                                                                                Start of the judgment on remaining Edom and/or Edomites?  Whereas the break of Amalek-Edomite control over international affairs and the House of Yisrael nations probably occurred earlier, the Edomites have had some remaining influence over some parts of Europe and the state of Israel.  This remaining influence is to be broken as well--but perhaps over time and not all at once.  Also, the focus here could be to Turkey, the Republic of Ireland and national Edomite powers in Asia, who could be in the confederation to attack the returned YESHUA (Ezek 25:12-14). 

 

                                               10/07/09J                                Is there a beginning of a revolt in Yehudah toward the Beast power (I Macc 2:1)?  Or does the first signs of this revolt occur earlier or later? 

 

                                               15/07/09J                                Could this be the fifth yearly period of the heptad suggested in the Midrashim “Aggadoth Mashiach” --a period of great abundance as a the Star of The MESSIAH (perhaps not the star of Yakov which may have surfaced before?) rises from out of the East to shine for 15 days (“The Life and Times of Jesus The Messiah,” by Alfred Edersheim, p. 211-221).  Maybe, this dating and/or the Midrashim are off slightly.  Perhaps the interpretation here could be to the sign in 2007 when Saturn makes a conjunction with the star Regulus (on the 16th day of the 6th month, as noted in 2007); or maybe, the conjunction appears again or some other form surfaces during this year. 

 

                                               15/07/09J                                Could this be the fifth year of the age ending cycle taught by the early Jewish “rabbis?”  This fifth year will be a year of great plenty and the Torah shall shine for Yisrael (“Pesikta De-Rab Kahana,” p. 109-110).  This doesn’t sound like the Great Tribulation.  But it well could be occurring now if the two witnesses are in Jerusalem preaching truth to the world in the last half of the heptad.  So maybe, the Torah will then truly shine. 

 

10/10/09J                                                                               (Ezek 24:1-2). 

 

                                               10/10/09J                                Do the beast forces assemble at Megiddo to prepare to attack Jerusalem (because of the revolt of the Jews which is now underway)?  But after assembling to attack the revolting Jews, is it possible that the King of the South also revolts about the same time?  Would this Muslim problem be a more serious revolt (since it involves oil for Europe) which would require more immediate attention? 

 

                                               10/10/09J                                This assembling at Ezekiel 24 may not take place in Yechezkel’s 34th year.  While it is dated in Yehoyakhin’s ninth year, it was correctly prophetic of Tzidkiyahu’s 9th year which was to correspond with Yehoyakhin’s 10th year (and thus, may not take place until later).  Anyway, this assembly could be late the next year. 

 

                                               03/12/06D                               Is the Third Temple finished and dedicated this late date by Satan (to agree with the Second Temple ante-type) or does it happen earlier (Ezra 6:15; Zech 7:1-7). 

 

 

Possibly Yechezkel’s 35th Year 

 

01/01/10J                                                                               Aviv 1 (Rishon Be’Aviv).  Is this Yehoyakhin’s 10th year (of captivity); Darius’ 7th year (Ezra 4:5-24; Jer 36:9; Ezek 1:1; Dan 9:1-2; Hag 1:1; Zech 1:1); and Antiochus Epiphanies/Maccabees’ 10th year (I Macc 1:20, 54: 2:1; 10:1-10)?  This year may be an intercalcary year. 

 

                                                                                                Does the revolt in Yehudah spread  or intensify against the Beast power to bring on concern from the Beast government (I Macc 2:1-69)? 

 

                                               15/07/10J                                Could this be the sixth yearly period of the heptad suggested in the Midrashim “Aggadoth Mashiach” --a period of voices and announcements (“The Life and Times of Jesus The Messiah,” by Alfred Edersheim, p. 211-221). 

 

                                               15/07/10J                                Could this be the sixth year of the prophetic period taught by the early Jewish “rabbis?”  If so, this sixth year produces rumors of war (“Pesikta De-Rab Kahana,” p. 109-110). 

 

                                               10/10/09Z                                Does the Beast assemble his army at Armageddon to make preparations to invade Palestine (II Kg 25:1; Jer 39:1)?  This could be the fulfillment of the prophetic aspects of Ezekiel 24:1. 

 

                                               10/10/10J                                Does the Beast make his move to Armageddon to make preparations to attack the revolting Jews now in Jerusalem?  Does something stop him at this time?  Maybe, there is further signs of a more serious Muslim revolt in the kingdom of the South (which controls the oil going to Europe)?  Maybe, again for the second time, the Beast turns his attention to the Kingdom of the South to further deal with the continuing Muslim revolt in the South. 

 

                                                                                                The King of the South (Saudi Arabia, Egypt and/or other Arab powers) will likewise somehow revolt, oppose or not submit in some manner to the Beast power (of Europe)--which will precipitate another movement by the Beast Army against the King of the South (Dan 11:40-43).  Apparently, the Beast army focuses its attention again upon the Moslems to put down the latest rebellion on-going there (Dan 11:40).  Does this attack by the Beast army constitute YHWH’s judgments against the King of the South?  The royal family of the Saudis is known to be Edomites (discussed earlier).  Is this Beast attack upon the Saudis the end of the Edomite power over them? 

 

                                                                                                The King of South (Egypt, Saudi Arabia and/or an Arab or Muslim alliance) pushes North (Dan 11:40). 

 

                                                                                                In ante-type, Egypt tried to come to the aid of Yehudah against Babylon--who was in siege against Yehudah (Ezek 30:20-26). 

 

                                                                                                Will Egypt repeat this scenario against the Beast? (Jer 37:5). 

 

                                                                                                Does the Beast army withdraw from its focus upon Yehudah at this time and instead focuses upon the Moslems and particularly Egypt  (Jer 37:5). 

 

12/10/10J                                                                               (Ezek 29:1-2) Against Pharaoh and Egypt. 

 

                                               12/10/10J                                Does the Beast army move South into Egypt at this time to exercise control (YHWH’s judgment) over the kingdom of the South (Ezek 29:1).  In the ante-type, the Beast Nebuchadnezzar (a servant of YHWH) was given Egypt for his services against Tyre (Ezek 29:17-21). 

 

                                                                                                Egypt, Ethiopia, Phut, Lud, the mingled people (the Arabs), Chub, and others will be judged (Ezek 30:1-19).   

 

                                               12/10/10J                                Judgment against Dragon and the fish of the river--Satan and angels (Ezek 29:1-8)?  This could be the beginnings of the prophetic judgment against Satan and his angels and the nations he controls and not the conclusion.  It may take some years to judge and punish the nations. 

 

                                               12/10/10J                                Is this the start of 40 years of punishment upon Egypt (or did it start earlier)? 

 

                                                                                                The revolt and trouble in Palestine begins to spread in Jerusalem and the state of Israel in general (likely among religious Jews).  Probably, there is a corresponding rebellion by more of the nations controlled by the Muslim King of the South about this same time or shortly thereafter--maybe, in Saudi Arabia, Yemen, etc.  The Muslim problem will seemingly be dealt with first by the Beast (as noted above). 

 

                                                                                                The UN Beast army enters and eventually conquers some part of the kingdom of the South (Dan 11:40).

 

 

Possibly Yechezkel’s 36th Year 

 

01/01/11J                                                                               Aviv 1 (Rishon Be’Aviv).  Is this Yehoyakhin’s 11th year (of captivity); Darius’ 8th year (Ezra 4:5-24; Jer 36:9; Ezek 1:1; Dan 9:1-2; Hag 1:1; Zech 1:1); and Antiochus Epiphanies/Maccabees’ 11th year (I Macc 1:20, 54: 2:1; 10:1-10)?  This year may be a regular year. 

 

01/?/11J                               01/01/11J                                (Ezek 26:1-2) Against Tyre.  The month is not given in this prophecy and it could be any month.  The fact that the month is not stated might imply that it is the first month, which is possible. 

 

                                               01/01/11J                                Does YAH’s judgment on and destruction of the international commercial system commence at this time, in the vein of the Beast’s kingdom coming apart with revolt from the South and East.  Tyre is to be destroyed for 70 years (Ezek 26:1-21; 27:1-36; 28:1).  This might include more of the judgment and destruction of the Babylonian system, headed up by Satan (in the vein of the prince of Tyre).  The destruction of Tyre probably starts earlier in the form of the collapse of the dollar and the problem over Muslim oil embargoes which upset commercialism in the West.  Maybe, it takes some time for the collapse of Tyre (the world’s Babylonian commercial system) to materialize. 

 

                                                                                                Is this the judgment upon Zidon (is this in modern Lebanon?) at this time (Ezek 28:20-26).  Could this be a judgment upon the Phoenicians of Tyre (Edomites) and their control of the international commercial system? 

 

07/01/11J                                                                               (Ezek 30:20-23).  Arm of Pharaoh has been or will be broken and the Egyptians scattered. 

 

01/03/11J                                                                               (Ezek 31:1-18).  Pharaoh, Assyria and cedars of Lebanon. 

 

                                               17/04/11J                                Based on the wording of Ezekiel 40:1, in that there is to be fourteen years following the fall of Jerusalem to the Beast by Yehoyakhin’s 25th year, the case can be made that the final attack and conquest of Jerusalem by the Beast occurs in Yehoyakhin’s 11th year.  There is much Scriptural evidence indicating that this attack does take place (II Kg 25:2-7; Jer 1:3; Zech 14:2).  But logically and per Zechariah 14:2, it should come in Yehoyakhin’s 12th year rather than his 11th year.  Too, Yehoyakhin’s 12th to 25th years can be fourteen years by inclusive counting.  Accordingly, this chronology shows it in the 12th year--but some allowance must be made that it could occur in the 11th year. 

 

                                               ?/06/11J                                  Does the Beast army’s attack on the King of the South (the Arabs or Moslems) cause a break in relations with the Kings of the East?  Does this assault on the Arabs cause the Kings of the East to formally break from the UN government headed up essentially by the EU? 

 

                                               15/07/11J                                Could this be the seventh yearly period of the heptad suggested in the Midrashim “Aggadoth Mashiach” --the period of war to precede the return of The MESSIAH (“The Life and Times of Jesus The Messiah,” by Alfred Edersheim, p. 211-221)?

 

                                               15/07/11J                                Could this be the seventh yearly age ending period taught by the early “rabbis?”  If so, The SON OF DAVID appears in this seventh year (“Pesikta De-Rab Kahana,” p. 109-110).  This prediction conceivably could date to Aviv of Yechezkel’s 37th year.

 

                                                                                                More of the Jews in the Israeli state (including the Beast’s friends) revolt against the Beast forcing him to temporarily suspend his attack on the Muslims and turn to the Israelis (Zech 12:5-6). 

 

                                                                                                Thus, Yehudah is to be delivered first--later when YESHUA returns (Zech 12:7). 

 

                                                                                                Initially, people of Jerusalem repent and YAH protects them.  But soon, they perhaps slip back into sin and YHWH withdraws His protection (Zech 12:8-13:6).  

 

                                                                                                Is there famine in Jerusalem (II Kg 25:3)? 

 

 

Possibly Yechezkel’s 37th Year 

 

01/01/12J                                                                               Aviv 1 (Rishon Be’Aviv).  Is this Yehoyakhin’s 12th year (of captivity); Darius’ 9th year (Ezra 4:5-24; Jer 36:9; Ezek 1:1; Dan 9:1-2; Hag 1:1; Zech 1:1); and Antiochus Epiphanies/Maccabees’ 12th year (I Macc 1:20, 54: 2:1; 10:1-10)?  This year may be a regular year. 

 

                                               24/03/12J                                End of Satan’s presence in the Temple?  His presence there could have covered around 1150 days, depending upon when he first entered the Temple and when he leaves.  He could have left sometime before the Beast army invades Palestine or after.  If not, does he now leave the Temple to prepare the world’s armies to fight YESHUA when He returns (Dan 9:9-14)? 

 

                                               24/03/12J                                Does Satan launch his 150 days of demonic torment upon men to culminate just after YESHUA returns to Jerusalem in the 8th month?  Is this the start of the first woe as a part of the 5th trumpet?  While this presentation has suggested that the 150 days of demonic torment (Rev 9:5) probably occurs when Satan leaves the Temple in Yechezkel’s 37th year, it must be noted that it could come before he enters the Temple in Yechezkel’s 34th year.  If after, this 150 days of demonic torment precedes the final occupation of Jerusalem by YESHUA in the 8th month. 

 

                                                                                                After stomping out some part of the rebellion in Egypt and some of the other Arab states in the South (except the land of Edom, Moab and parts of Ammon or modern Jordan), the Beast is ready to use his UN army against Jerusalem and the state of Israel in Palestine to crush the uprising with the anticipated help of some of the friendly (Amalekite) Jews (Zech 12:1-3; Dan 11:41). 

 

                                               17/04/12J                                Because of the revolt among the Jews, does the Beast army enter Jerusalem at this time with wrath for the last time  (II Kg 25:4; Jer 39:2; 52:5-6; Zech 14:1-2)? 

 

                                               17/04/12J                                Jerusalem falls to the Beast?  Or because of the wording of the fourteen years in Ezekiel 40:1, does this attack and fall happen a year earlier in Yehoyakhin’s 11th year? The better year probably is the 12th year since the 12th to 25th years can be fourteen years by inclusive counting (II Kg 25:2-7; Jer 1:3; Zech 14:2). 

 

                                               10/05/12J                                With the departure of Satan from the Temple, is the Third Temple destroyed by the Beast power at this time or earlier? (Dan 9:26).  Does this fulfill the fast of the ninth day of the 5th month (II Kg 25:8-11; Jer 52:12)?  In the ante-type with the Babylonians, the Temple was set afire on the 9th day and the fire burned until the tenth day (“Soncino Books of Bible,” Jer 52:12). 

 

                                               ?/05/12J                                  Start of the second woe with the 6th trumpet, as the four angels at the Euphrates are loosed.  Revelation 9:12 says one woe (the first one) is past.  Does it mean that it has completely ended now or rather does it mean that it was pronounced and started and may still be continuing?  Probably, it is still continuing and will continue to run to total 150 days.  Thus, the four powers in Asia now revolt from the UN Beast government.  A 200 million man army of the Orient begins the slaughtering of people over Asia as it moves West and commences an approach toward Europe and the Middle East.  One-third of Adam is to die (Rev 9:12-19). 

 

                                                                                                Does Satan (per intervention from The ELOHIM) switch horses and proceeds to arouse the invading Eastern army and the ten regional governors of earth to now rise up and destroy the last remnants of Christianity and the Babylonian religious system as the Eastern army begins moving West into Europe? (Ps 137:8; Rev 17:15-17). 

 

                                                                                                This Eastern problem is compounded because the Chinese policy of limiting families to one child in the 1980s and 1990s has meant the murder of many girls.  This age group has produced a generation of Chinese where men outnumber women nine to one with an excess of 150 million men (Jun-Jul 1998 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 19).  No wonder this power will rape and plunder as it moves West. 

 

                                                                                                Is this Asian revolt the ultimate fulfillment of the earlier demonic invasion or does it just roughly correspond in time with the demonic torture of man? (Joel 2:1-13; Rev 9:1-12).  If so, it will also last about 150 days before subsiding (with the return of YESHUA to Jerusalem and the start of the seven years war against the Middle Eastern Muslims). 

 

                                                                                                The remaining election in captivity remembers and yearns for Jerusalem (Ps 137:5-6). 

 

                                                                                                Does the Beast power turn against some of the remaining Amalekite power structure in Judea and perhaps those still remaining in Europe.  Does the Beast man execute judgment upon some portion of the remaining Amalekite power structure at this time or does this happen earlier or later (Ps 137:7; Isa 10:5-6)? 

 

                                                                                                The world’s governor is concerned with the continuing Oriental rebellion (Dan 11:44). 

 

                                                                                                Beast army encamps at or near Jerusalem--between the Dead Sea and the Mediterranean to prepare to attack the very elect at Petra (Dan 11:45). 

 

                                                                                                Evil people will not repent (Rev 9:20-21). 

 

                                                                                                Heavenly scene of YHWH YESHUA and the elect (Pentecost virgins) preparing to come to earth (Rev 14:1-5). 

 

                                                                                                First angel message, last warning of repentance, judgment is coming (Rev 14:6-7). 

 

                                                                                                Second angel message, physical Babylon (UN or world government’s political capital in Iraq?) has fallen--possibly from the assault of the Eastern army moving West in the 2d woe? (Rev 14:8; Isa 13:19-21; 21:9).  This prophecy could also apply to the Babylonian Christian sun worship religion which has been likewise under attack from the Kings of the East, and maybe, even the Beast power (Rev 17-18). 

 

                                                                                                Third angel message, last warning to not accept the mark of the beast (Rev 14:9-11). 

 

                                                                                                Voice from heaven, blessed are those who die in YHWH (Rev 14:12-13). 

 

                                               25/06/12J                                Possibly the final two witnesses end their 1,260 days testimony at this time.  They are slain by the beast power to lie dead in Jerusalem without burial for three and one-half days and to be seen all over the world by television (Rev 11:7-10).  Depending upon exactly when the two final witnesses commenced their work, their 1,260 days of witness ends sometime after the Beast invades Jerusalem in its last oppression on Jerusalem (Zech 14:1-2).  The two witnesses will be killed as soon as YHWH allows it (Rev 11:5).  Will the Devil now deceive the world’s people about these two men (since these two witnesses will be taken by the world to be the Beast and False Prophet)? 

 

                                               25/06/12J                                Whenever the work of the final two witnesses ends (as covering 1,260 days), and when they are murdered, the world will have a world holiday and celebration for three and one half days (Rev 11:9-10). 

 

                                               29/06/12J                                The two witnesses are resurrected to heaven in the sight of all (Rev 11:11-12; Rev 10:1-11:10). 

 

                                               29/06/12J                                The same hour, a great earthquake occurs--1/10 of Jerusalem destroyed, 7,000 men slain (Rev 11:13; Zech 14:4). 

 

                                               ?/06/12J                                  The Beast army moves to Edom (Jordan) to attack the very elect at Petra. 

 

                                               01/07/12J                                Seventh Trumpet sounds (Rev 11:15-18; Lev 23:24). 

 

                                                                                                The end of the Second Woe of the Asian army rampage over Asia and Eastern Europe or does this actual woe terminate much later when the Asian army is assembled later at Armageddon to attack YESHUA at Jerusalem (Rev 11:14)?  Maybe, the remarks on the second woe being passed in Revelation 11:14 mean that it is passed in proclamation and commencement and not necessarily passed in ultimate completion.  This seems more logical--just as there is a delay in completion of the first woe.   

 

                                                                                                The Temple in heaven is opened and the Ark of the Covenant is seen (Rev 11:19). 

 

                                                                                                Lightnings, thunderings, voices, earthquake, great hail (Rev 11:19). 

 

                                               03/07/12J                                The Judean Governor (who had been appointed to rule the state of Israel by the Beast power) is killed (Jer 41:1-2).  Does this event fulfill the fast of the third day of the 7th month?  Does the final Jewish revolt against the Beast commence at this time? 

 

                                               09/07/12J                                By this date, YESHUA comes in secret to Bozrah (Phase 1 of His coming)--perhaps in one day (Rev 14:14-20). Probably, the Beast army will be in Bozrah at this time and will be preparing to attack the very elect at Petra. 

 

                                               10/07/12J                                YESHUA defeats Beast army approaching Petra on or near Yom Kippur (Zech 14:3; Isa 34:5-10; 49:13; 61:2-3; 62:11-12; 63:1-6; Rev 12:6; 14:14-20; Zeph 1:7; Matt 24:31,42-43; Lu 12:36-39; Ezek 35:1-9; Dan 12:1; I Macc 4:15-35).  Is this the first of YHWH’s judgments against the nations--like Ammon, Moab, Philistines, Edom, etc from the standpoint of the geography of those areas, now in Muslim hands or does this happen earlier or later (Ezek 25:1-16).  This ends 1,260 days of some point in time--likely the date Philadelphia fled Jerusalem for Petra.  This point is a mark-off of 75 days to the start of Hanukkah by progressive counting.

 

                                               10/07/12J                                The very elect await YESHUA at Petra. 

 

                                               15/07/12J                                Philadelphia is rescued and taken with any others of the election still alive to the Sea of Glass at the beginning of or during Sukkot.  Where is the Sea of Glass?  It surely is in the heavens in some way or perhaps in a space platform or spaceship in orbit around earth? (Rev 15:2-4; Ezek 34:11; Rev 12:1-17).  This should be the terminus of 1,260 days that Philadelphia was at Petra. 

 

                                               15/07/12J                                The first resurrection of the rest of the age end election dead possibly may take place now.  If so, they will go with the rest of the election to the Sea of Glass (Ezek 36:1-38; 37:1-28; Dan 12:1-3; I Thes 4:16-17; Rev 20:5-6). 

 

                                               15/07/12J                                Seven Angels with 7 last plagues (vials) come out of Heavenly Temple (Rev 15:1, 5; 16:1). 

 

                                                                                                First vial, sores come upon men with the mark of the beast (Rev 16:1-2).  Is the ante-type of this at Exodus 9:8? 

 

                                                                                                Second vial, sea becomes blood, all living souls in sea die (Rev 16:3).  Could the ante-type be at Exodus 7:17-21? 

 

                                                                                                Third vial, rivers and fountains of water (wells?) become blood (Rev 16:4-7).  Again, could the ante-type be at Exodus 7:17-21?

 

                                                                                                Fourth vial, Sun begins to nova, increases heat and light grows bright to scorch men seven days (Rev 16:8-9; Matt 24:29; Mk 13:24). 

 

                                                                                                Fifth vial, sun begins death as it cools down to red giant and fades out causing pain on people (Rev 16:10-11). Perhaps the ante-type is at Exodus 10:21.

 

                                                                                                In that day, there will be no light, and it will be cold, --Freezing!--per James Griffin translation, p. B, “The Last Warning to Man” (Zech 14:6). 

 

                                                                                                Sixth vial, Euphrates dried up (from the up-river dams?), three spirits of devils go forth to begin gathering the armies of the world to the assembly area at Armageddon (Rev 16:12-16).  The ante-type could be at Exodus 8:2.  While this vial probably comes in the 8th month, this movement across the Euphrates and assembly at Armageddon takes some time and probably won’t be complete until much later. 

 

                                                                                                Seventh vial, a voice from the Temple in heaven notes that it is finished (Rev 16:17). 

 

                                                                                                Voices, thunders, lightnings, greatest earthquake of all (Rev 16:18). 

 

                                                                                                Great city (Jerusalem?) divided into 3 parts, start of destruction of the Babylonian system (religion, culture, economy and civilization).  That system is to receive the cup of wine of YHWH’s fierceness (Rev 16:19; 17:1-18:24). 

 

                                                                                                The earth capsizes.  The islands vanish in the oceans (Rev 16:20).  There is a reference in Revelation (21:1) to “no more sea” in the context of the new heavens and earth (which may materialize after the millennium and not before).  In any case, this reference could suggest that at least the Mediterranean Sea (which is likely the first focus of this statement) and perhaps portions or all of the oceans are sucked back into the heavens to become bands of ice in orbit around the earth as was likely the situation in Genesis 1:2 and as is now true with the planet Saturn.  In any case, the capsizing of the earth would be an opportunity for this event to occur, although it could come later when the Gog-Magog army is miraculously destroyed after YESHUA returns or still at some other future time. 

 

                                                                                                Does the Mount of Olives split at the great earthquake or when the earth capsizes (Zech 14:4)? 

 

                                                                                                Great hail falls from heaven on men (Rev 16:21). 

 

                                                                                                Voice of angel from heaven--the Babylonian (sun worship) religious, commercial, economic, cultural and social systems and/or civilization have fallen (Rev 17:1-18; 18:1-24). 

 

                                                                                                Heavenly scene (Rev 19:1-8). 

 

                                                                                                Heavenly invitation to the marriage supper of YHWH YESHUA (Rev 19:9-10). 

 

                                               15/08/12J                                YESHUA with His elect probably come to the Mount of Olives in the clouds to be seen by all.  This event comes about 30 days after YESHUA returns to Bozrah or perhaps a few days later to coincide with the anniversary of the day that Yarovam set up his sun worship.  The Dragon will pep up all the nations of the world to fight YESHUA on the basis that YESHUA and His army are invading aliens (Matt 24:30-31; Mk 13:26; Lu 21:27; Rev 19:11-15; Isa 13:5). 

 

                                                                                                YESHUA and His army come in 20,000 chariots (Ps 67:17; Isa 66:15). 

 

                                                                                                If the elect dead are not already resurrected, it is likely that they will be resurrected at this point (Rev 20:5-6; Dan 12:1-3; I Thes 4:16-17; Ezek 36:1-38; 37:1-28)?  Thus, if here, will the resurrected dead elect arise to meet YESHUA in the atmosphere and return with Him to earth?  Possibly, they were resurrected earlier to go to the Sea of Glass with the rest of the election.  Thus, likely all of the election returns with YESHUA at this time. 

 

                                                                                                YESHUA and His election come to the Mount of Olives--Phase 2 (Zech 14:4-6; Rev 19:15). 

 

                                                                                                YESHUA and His army attack the Beast and his army in  the Jerusalem area (Rev 19:15-19; Zech 14:7-11). 

 

                                               15/08/12J                                Eliyahu leads YESHUA and the election into Jerusalem from the Mount of Olives across the brook Kidron and through the Golden (East) Gate (which by now has been opened, perhaps by an earthquake). 

 

                                               15/08/12J                                YESHUA and His army enter Jerusalem and take possession of the Temple Mount (Rev 19:11).  This should be about the terminus of 1,290 days from the time that the Temple was defiled with the set-up of the abomination of desolation and the termination of the Daily Sacrifice in Aviv of Yechezkel’s 34th year.  This then ends the 1,290 days of the abomination of desolation (Dan 12:11).  Possibly, this elapse of 30 days (with the pouring out of the seven last plagues) from YESHUA’s rescue of Philadelphia at Bozrah and His entrance into Jerusalem might link to the prophetic one hour of Revelation 18:8-10 in which the Babylonian system falls. 

 

                                               15/08/12J                                This date may represent the final recognition of Yarovam’s establishment of sun worship in Yisrael on the 15th day of the 8th month when he took power.  On this date, sun worship in Yisrael officially may end.  There will be no more of it.  Alternatively, the end of sun worship in the House of Yisrael may happen in the fall of Yechezkel’s 38th/39th years when the remaining fleshly House of Yisrael Israelites are at last recovered and brought to Palestine. 

 

                                               15/08/12J                                Possibly, the end of one of the early phases of Yakov’s Trouble, at least for the election as they have now returned to Palestine with YESHUA. 

 

                                                                                                YESHUA assumes the vacant throne of David and is crowned in Jerusalem on Mount Moriah (Ezek 21:27; 37:24; Zech 14:6-11). 

 

                                               26/08/12J                                Does Satan’s 150 days of torment upon man end at this time? 

 

                                               25/09/12J                                Start of Hanukkah.  Arrival of 1,335 days from the mid point of Yakov’s Trouble (Dan 12:12).  This event could slip another seven days and still occur during the festival of Hanukkah.  However, the best date is the 25th day of the 9th month which is about 75 days beyond the 10th day of the 7th month in Yechezkel’s 37th year, when YESHUA (following His return to Bozrah) likely defeats the Beast army and rescues Philadelphia at Petra. 

 

                                               25/09/12J                                Start of cleaning and clearing the altar on Moriah at Hanukkah (I Macc 4:52-59). 

 

                                               30/09/12J                                Altar finished.  The daily sacrifice resumes (I Macc 4:59).  This could happen from one to five days earlier or a couple of days later.  Maybe, this is the ultimate time that YESHUA will start to enter judgment upon the evil Amalekites for the hurt and harm that they have put upon Yisrael over the centuries--at least upon those Amalekite Jews still in the Jerusalem area.  

 

                                               02/10/12J                                Though YESHUA is securely in control of the Temple Mount, there may be some further mopping up actions on the Beast, Muslim and Amalekite Jewish powers in the Jerusalem area before the city is totally secured by YESHUA. 

 

05/10/12J                                                                               (Ezek 33:21).  Jerusalem falls to YESHUA and His army?  (Ezek 33:21).  Jerusalem is now in the hands of YESHUA. 

 

                                               05/10/12J                                In the ante-type, Jerusalem fell to the Babylonians in the fourth and fifth months of Yehoyakhin’s captivity (c554 BCE).  The news reached Yechezkel on the 5th day of the 10th month (Ezek 33:21; Zech 14:1-3).  In the type, this reference could have a couple of points of significance.  First, it is clear that Jerusalem was smitten the last time by the Beast power in the 4th-5th months of 554 BCE.  The earlier invasion was probably not the actual fulfillment of the fall in 554 BCE (it probably was Yechezkel’s first report in Ezekiel 21-24).  Thus, this final fall of Jerusalem is probably the real fulfillment of the fall of Jerusalem to the returning YESHUA in Yechezkel’s 37th year. 

 

01/12/12J                                                                               (Ezek 32:1-2).  Lamentation over Pharaoh (as Satan). 

 

                                               01/12/12J                                Judgment against Pharaoh (as a type of the water beast Satan) and Egypt (Ezek 32:1-16).  Is this in the form of a funeral dirge which is uttered in advance before the actual event takes place? 

 

                                               13/12/12J                                The remaining Amalek-Edomite power structure in Palestine is broken and judged (Ezek 35:1-15).  The remaining evil Amalekites perhaps in all of Palestine are at last judged by YHWH (maybe, this is the balance of the Amalekites posing as Jews in Palestine).  This should conclude on the Sabbath preceding Purim (to commemorate the Jewish remembrance of the Amalekites on this date) or more likely on the fast day of the 13th day of the 12th month.

 

15/?/12J                               15/12/12J                                (Ezek 32:17). The month is not given in the prophecy.  But it comes on the heels of the judgment upon Pharaoh and Egypt.  Thus, it probably is to be dated in the 12th month.  This means it falls on Purim on the 15th day. 

 

                                               15/12/12J                                This is a funeral dirge (Ezek 32:18, per “Soncino Books of the Bible” Ezekiel, p. 217) over Egypt and various other nations which have oppressed Yisrael (to include even those to come in the future with the Gog and Magog and other attacks).  It includes the rest of national Edom and possibly fallen angels as well? (Ezek 32:17-32).  At last, Yisrael has victory over the Dragon and his descendants, the Amalekites.  Likely, this dirge concerns both the battles over the last several years and still future ones, as suggested in the “Soncino Books of the Bible” in that the funeral dirge is rendered in advance before all the nations involved against Yisrael meet their final demise (ibid, p. 217).  Thus, the final defeat of these various nations may not occur until the end of the three years or so of conquest by YESHUA. 

 

                                               29/13/12J                                Is this perhaps the end of the primary phase of Yakov’s Trouble which started with Yechezkel’s 30th year 

 

 

Possibly Yechezkel’s 38th Year 

 

01/01/13J                                                                               Aviv 1 (Rishon Be’Aviv).  Is this Yehoyakhin’s 13th year (of captivity); Darius’ 10th year (Ezra 4:5-24; Jer 36:9; Ezek 1:1; Dan 9:1-2; Hag 1:1; Zech 1:1); and Antiochus Epiphanies/Maccabees’ 13th year (I Macc 1:20, 54: 2:1; 10:1-10)?  This year may be an intercalcary year. 

 

                                               15/07/13J                                YESHUA begins seeking out the people of Yisrael and separating them from the tares and goats (Ezek 34:12-23).  YESHUA is the One SHEPHERD over the now joined sticks of Yehudah and Ephraim. 

 

                                               15/07/13J                                Could this be the start date of the primary regathering of physical, fleshly Israelites from the Diaspora--as the bulk of lost Israelites are returned to Palestine--at least those alive and in the flesh at this time (Ezek 36:8; 37:1-23; Jer 3:14; I Macc 5:17-23).  Maybe, this regathering started in the fall of Yechezkel’s 37th year with the election.  Possibly, the return of physical Yisrael to Palestine starts at this time in the form of a second great Exodus, the ultimate typical fulfillment of the Exodus in Moshe’s day.  It may take a few days and maybe even months to complete (and possibly concludes as late as Sukkot in Yechezkel’s 39th year). 

 

                                                                                                Is this the dating of the New Covenant (Ezek 36:24-29; 37:26-27).  Or could it occur later? 

 

                                               10/10/13J                                Does the remnant of the Beast Army and/or the Muslim confederation under Babylonian leadership regroup in the Middle East for some reason at this time--perhaps in preparation to attack YESHUA at Jerusalem (Jer 39:1)? 

 

                                                                                                Once YESHUA is in Jerusalem, it is possible that the various remnants of the Beast army and the remaining armies in the nearby Muslim states all attack YESHUA in Jerusalem (Ezek 29-31; Rev 19:11-15-21).  Evidently, they are aroused and motivated and maybe even led by Satan.  YESHUA may have to fight these armies months before Jerusalem is finally secured in a peaceful environment.  Per the chronology of Joshua (Josh 14:10, per a note on p. 83 of Joshua of the “Soncino Books of Bible”), the conquest of Canaan took seven years (from the 41st year of a Jubilee to the 48th year).  Apparently, a Jewish uprising against the Beast power lasts for around three and one-half years (in the ante-type, Judas Maccabees fought the Greeks for three and one half years), and YESHUA’s conquest of Palestine lasts for another three and one-half years (after He returns).  This period of about seven years will fulfill Yehoshua’s seven years conquest of Canaan, following the Exodus. 

 

                                                                                                Probably, there will be two purposes in these military attacks in the Jerusalem area.  First, Satan will arouse the nations to attack YESHUA once He enters Jerusalem.  Second, YESHUA will do what Yehoshua, Judas Maccabees and the Israelites always failed to do.  Yisrael was supposed to invade and conquer the land grant in the promise to Yisrael and kill or expel all the mongrel peoples.  They failed to do this.  YESHUA will do it.  The mongrel peoples from the river of Egypt (probably the Nile, although some suggest the Wadi el Arish) to the Euphrates will be destroyed or expelled.  This area can include Palestine, Lebanon, Jordan, the Sinai, the Arabian peninsula, Asia Minor and Syria and parts of Egypt, Iraq, Turkey, etc.  YESHUA will surely kill all of these people or expel them from the land to make it ready for the grant to Yisrael who are now or will soon be coming home. 

 

                                                                                                Does YESHUA’s multi-year war to conquer the land grant and obtain peace occur now--in fulfillment with what happened with Yehoshua and the later Yehuda in Maccabees? 

 

 

Possibly Yechezkel’s 39th Year 

 

01/01/14J                                                                               Aviv 1 (Rishon Be’Aviv).  Is this Yehoyakhin’s 14th year (of captivity); Darius’ 11th year (Ezra 4:5-24; Jer 36:9; Ezek 1:1; Dan 9:1-2; Hag 1:1; Zech 1:1); and Antiochus Epiphanies/Maccabees’ 14th year (I Macc 1:20, 54: 2:1; 10:1-10)?  This year may be a regular year. 

 

                                                                                                Is there still some mopping up operations in Palestine by YESHUA and His army upon some of the remnants of His opponents in the area or for further attacks from the neighboring Muslims (I Macc 6:18-31)? 

 

                                               01/03/14J                                Do the remnants of the Beast army and the assembled Muslims now attack YESHUA and the returned election in Jerusalem? (I Macc 1:7-17). 

 

                                               22/07/14J                                Could this be the final date of the regathering of physical, fleshly Israelites from the Diaspora which started at Sukkot in Yechezkel’s 38th year (Ezek 36:8; 37:1-23; Jer 3:14; I Macc 5:17-23).  This might also be the date of the eventual New/Renewed Covenant. 

 

                                               15/08/14J                                Is this the official end of seven times or seven years of punishment for Yisrael (as dating from Yechezkel’s 32d year)?  Possibly the last of some scattered Israelites return to Palestine by this date.  This seven (prophetic) times of 2520 days or seven years may have started in the 8th-10th months of Yechezkel’s 30th year and intensified in his 31st and 32d years and now expires on the 15th day of the 8th moon of Yechezkel’s 39th year.  Thus, this might be the conclusion of the regathering of physical Yisrael from around the world (of possibly 2.4 million of them in the vein of the pomegranates, as discussed earlier).  They will be brought by YESHUA to Palestine (in a prophetic fulfillment of the Exodus from Egypt).

 

                                                                                                Final Judgment on false (Christian) preachers (Ezek 34:1-10). 

 

                                                                                                Ultimately, the Beast power is destroyed.  The Beast man and the False Prophet are cast into the lake of fire--volcanic Dead sea area? (Rev 19:20-21).  There will be some elapse of time when YESHUA returns until He defeats the Beast and the remnant of his army in the Jerusalem area. 

 

                                               10/10/14J                                The classic time for armies of the East to assemble at Armageddon to prepare to attack Jerusalem (I Macc 6:38; II Macc 13:1).  Will the Gog and Magog army now start or finish to assemble at this historic assembly area?  Maybe, some time will be required for this assemblage to be completed.  

 

 

Possibly Yechezkel’s 40th Year 

 

01/01/15J                                                                               Aviv 1 (Rishon Be’Aviv).  Is this Yehoyakhin’s 15th year (of captivity); Darius’ 12th year (Ezra 4:5-24; Jer 36:9; Ezek 1:1; Dan 9:1-2; Hag 1:1; Zech 1:1); and Antiochus Epiphanies/Maccabees’ 15th year (I Macc 1:20, 54: 2:1; 10:1-10)?  This year may be a regular year. 

 

                                                                                                Do the Kings of the East launch an attack on YESHUA in Jerusalem.  Maybe, this starts with a siege and then the army withdraws to Megiddo to reassemble (I Macc 6:38-59; II Mac 13:1-26). 

 

                                                                                                Since the armies have now been (re)assembled at Armageddon, does Satan induce the kings of the East) to again attack YHWH YESHUA and the elect in Jerusalem at this time (Rev 20:7-8; Ezek 38:1-17; Zech 14:12; I Macc 7:26-43; II Mac 15:1-37). 

 

                                               13/12/15AE/M                        Is the Nacanor of the time of the Maccabees a type of Satan (I Mac 7:42-43; II Mac 15:1)? 

 

                                               13/12/15AE/M                        Possibly, the final Gog and Magog attack upon YESHUA and the election in Jerusalem occurs at this time (Ezek 38; Rev 20:7-9; I Macc 7:42-43; II Macc 13:1-15:36).

 

                                               13/12/15AE/M                        Fire comes down from heaven to devour the attacking army (Rev 20:9; Zech 14:12-15; Ezek 38:18-39:8; I Macc 7:43).  This could be the final manifestations of the third woe in the form of the seven last vials which started to fall on man earlier in the 8th month of Yechezkel’s 37th year.  Alternatively, some other interpretation may apply.

 

                                                                                                Second mass death for many of those not written in book of life (Rev 20:14-15; 21:8). 

 

                                                                                                Satan is cast into the lake of fire--the volcanic Dead Sea? (Rev 20:10). 

 

                                                                                                Gog’s weapons to be fuel for Yisrael for 7 years (Ezek 39:9-10). 

 

                                                                                                Yisrael needs 7 months to bury the dead (Ezek 39:11-16). 

 

                                                                                                End of 40 years of trial by progressive counting on Yehudah and Jerusalem--which could start as early as 1974, following the last Arab-Israeli war that culminated the final period of 2,520 years of punishment on Yehudah (Ezek 4:6), or perhaps start as late as the years 1975-1980. 

 

 

Possibly Yechezkel’s 41st Year 

 

01/01/16J                                                                               Aviv 1 (Rishon Be’Aviv).  Is this Yehoyakhin’s 16th year (of captivity); Darius’ 13th year (Ezra 4:5-24; Jer 36:9; Ezek 1:1; Dan 9:1-2; Hag 1:1; Zech 1:1); and Antiochus Epiphanies/Maccabees’ 16th year (I Macc 1:20, 54: 2:1; 10:1-10)?  This year may be an intercalcary year. 

 

 

Possibly Yechezkel’s 42d to 47th Years

 

                                                                                                The 483 years prophecy may end by Ezekiel’s 42d to 45th years (and may have started in the period 1537-1540).  But it could have ended in prior years or end in later years.  Too, the completion of the (Re)newed Covenant may also take place during these years instead of earlier and especially if it involves a process over some years. 

 

                                                                                                The election assumes thrones (now? or is it just YESHUA with the election to take their thrones later?) to prepare for judgment of the rest of the dead--to be resurrected in the millennium (Rev 20:4-6). 

 

                                                                                                Start of YHWH YESHUA’s rule (Rev 20:11-13). 

 

                                               15/07/?                                    The first of the resurrections from the dead of non-elected Israelites may start as early as Sukkot of Yechezkel’s 37th year (Ezek 37).  Or it could commence at a later Sukkot? 

 

                                                                                                YHWH YESHUA and the elect to begin judging the resurrected people and/or the persons to be resurrected from the dead once the resurrection commences (Rev 20:11-15).  The resurrection of the dead seems to involve a process which will surely take many long centuries in time. 

 

15/07/?                                                                                   The world’s people will come to Jerusalem to worship YHWH YESHUA at Sukkot at this time (Zech 14:16-17). 

 

                                                                                                Egypt and other people unwilling to come to Jerusalem to worship at Sukkot are to have drought as a part of their punishment (Zech 14:18-19).  This drought on Egypt is to run 40 years.  This drought on Egypt may have started some years earlier when the punishment on Egypt started. 

 

                                                                                                Jerusalem to be kodesh.  Jerusalem begins functioning as capitol of the world (Zech 14:20-21). 

 

                                               13/12/47E                               Last of Gog’s weapons burned for fuel--End of 7 years (Ezek 39:9-10). 

 

 

Possibly Yechezkel’s 48th Year 

 

01/01/23J                                                                               Aviv 1 (Rishon Be’Aviv).  Is this Yehoyakhin’s 23d year (of captivity); Darius’ 20th year (Ezra 4:5-24; Jer 36:9; Ezek 1:1; Dan 9:1-2; Hag 1:1; Zech 1:1); and Antiochus Epiphanies/Maccabees’ 23d year (I Macc 1:20, 54: 2:1; 10:1-10)? 

 

 

Possibly Yechezkel’s 49th Year 

 

01/01/24J                                                                               Aviv 1 (Rishon Be’Aviv).  Is this Yehoyakhin’s 24th year (of captivity); Darius’ 21st year (Ezra 4:5-24; Jer 36:9; Ezek 1:1; Dan 9:1-2; Hag 1:1; Zech 1:1); and Antiochus Epiphanies/Maccabees’ 24th year (I Macc 1:20, 54: 2:1; 10:1-10)? 

 

                                                                                                Does the start of the construction or forming of New Jerusalem happen now, earlier or later? 

 

                                                                                                The Jews started rebuilding Jerusalem in about Darius’ 20th-21st years (Neh 2:1; 17-20; 3:1-6:15; Dan 9:25-27).  Nechemyah seems to date it very late in Darius’ 20th year.  But there are significant problems in the chronology of the Persian kings, or at least with Darius, which could translate the dating to the early part of the 21st year. 

 

                                               ?/?/24AE/M                             The Maccabees started rebuilding Jerusalem in about 153 BCE or in about their 16th year by inclusive counting (I Macc 10:1-10).  The dating on this event is not totally clear to this writer.  It could have happened in 152 BCE; and if so, it would have been in the Maccabees’ 17th year (which would have been 16 years by progressive counting). 

 

                                                                                                The enigma over dating the construction of New Jerusalem can be possibly understood in the context that the construction of the city and perhaps even the Fourth Temple can take more than one year.  Thus, it could start this year and run into the next year.  In fact, it could have started in Yehoyakhin’s 16th year or as late as his 23d year--in at least the sense that the order for construction could have been issued in one of those years. 

 

                                                                                                YHWH’s spirit poured out upon the House of Yisrael.  Is this some part of the New Covenant (Ezek 39:29)? 

 

                                                                                                Could the New (Renewed) Covenant happen this late and involve the marriage of YHWH YESHUA and/or Yisrael--New Jerusalem.  Is this the people or of the city--which could appear later (Rev 21:9-23; Ezek 39:17-29)?  Could the marriage supper of The LAMB occur now or earlier? 

 

 

Possibly Yechezkel’s 50th Year 

 

01/01/25J                                                                               Aviv 1 (Rishon Be’Aviv).  Is this Yehoyakhin’s 25th year (of captivity); Darius’ 22d year (Ezra 4:5-24; Jer 36:9; Ezek 1:1; Dan 9:1-2; Hag 1:1; Zech 1:1); and Antiochus Epiphanies/Maccabees’ 25th year (I Macc 1:20, 54: 2:1; 10:1-10)?  This year should be 14 years since the fall of Jerusalem to the Beast (Ezek 40:1).  As discussed earlier, the case can be made that this fall happens in Yehoyakhin’s 11th or 12th year.  This chronology shows it in Yehoyakhin’s 12th year on the basis that the 14 years is determined by inclusive counting.  But the 11th year must be on the table of possibilities. 

 

10/01/25J                                                                               (Ezek 40:1).  Is New Jerusalem and the Millennial Temple now finished or are they under construction on this date?  The construction could have commenced earlier and both the city and the Temple are finished later in Ezekiel 40-48.  However, both Ezekiel 45:7 and 48:30-35 mention the city in possibly the vein that New Jerusalem is already built.  Thus, probably Ezek 40:1 reflects the end of the rebuilding of Jerusalem which may have started seven or so years earlier.  So it is possible that New Jerusalem is now built or comes into being by this date. But the 25th year is a awful tempting date for some phase of the building effort because it would agree so perfectly with the construction predicted by both Darius and the Maccabees (as discussed above in Yehoyakhin’s 24th year). 

 

                                                                                                No more Canaanites will be allowed in this new Temple (Zech 14:21). 

 

                                                                                                Is this New Jerusalem or only the Temple being measured?  Either the building of New Jerusalem is now complete or it is still in progress at this time.  Does its construction start this year, some years earlier, or does it now come down from heaven?  Could the New Covenant/marriage be this late or could it at least be finalized this late? (Ezek 40-43). 

 

                                                                                                This is the Millennial Temple being constructed or is it being finished (Ezek 41:1-26; 42:1-44:31). 

 

                                                                                                Perhaps the end of the division of the land (Ezek 45:1).  Or does the division of the land commence at this time (as allowed in Ezekiel 45:1 to 47:13). 

 

 

Possibly Yechezkel’s 52d Year

 

01/01/27J                                                                               Aviv 1 (Rishon Be’Aviv).  Is this Yehoyakhin’s 27th year (of captivity); Darius’ 24th year (Ezra 4:5-24; Jer 36:9; Ezek 1:1; Dan 9:1-2; Hag 1:1; Zech 1:1); and Antiochus Epiphanies/Maccabees’ 27th year (I Macc 1:20, 54: 2:1; 10:1-10)? 

 

01/01/27J                                                                               Nebuchadnezzar was given Egypt as wages for judging Tyre (commercial system?).  The House of Yisrael is to know at this time, though it seems unclear prophetically.  Yechezkel’s lips were opened (Ezek 29:17-21). 

 

                                                                                                Yechezkel made an amazing prophecy for Yisrael which seems to have been dated in Yehoyakhin’s 27th year (Ezek 29:21).  It was that when Yisrael’s horn buds (becomes a state again), the words of Yechezkel are to be heard (“Bible Light on the News,” v. 9, no. 2, p. 3).  The Ronald Knox translation gives this as “When that day comes, new life shall spring forth from the stock of Israel” (“The Word The Bible From 26 Translations,” p. 1702).  Either something great happens to Yisrael at this time or this prophecy could relate, in some way, to the proclamation of Yechezkel’s prophecy when Yisrael does bud (which could have happened in 1948, 1967, 1973 or some later year; or conceivably, this whole prophecy deals with the re-establishment of Yisrael as a national state in the world to come). 

 

 

Possibly Yechezkel’s 62d Year 

 

01/01/37J                                                                               Aviv 1 (Rishon Be’Aviv).  Is this Yehoyakhin’s 37th year (of captivity); Darius’ 34th year (Ezra 4:5-24; Jer 36:9; Ezek 1:1; Dan 9:1-2; Hag 1:1; Zech 1:1); and Antiochus Epiphanies/Maccabees’ 37th year (I Macc 1:20, 54: 2:1; 10:1-10)? 

 

25/12/37J                                                                               Yehoyakhin released by Evil-Merodach.  What is its future significance?  Does his descendant YESHUA finally rule over the kings of the former Babylonian system? (II Kg 25:27; Jer 52:31-34). 

 

 

A Final Editorial Remark as of Kislew 2005

 

This possible chronology of age ending events was first prepared on the premise that Yechezkel’s 30th year was 2003, as indeed could conceivably prove to be the case.  But as of this date, things in 2005 did not develop as fast as this writer allowed could happen in 2003.  Hence, it is very likely that Yechezkel’s 30th and Darius’ 2d years must be slipped forward. 

 

In particular, these key dates could easily slip to 2007 or 2008, on the premise that 2007 or 2008 starts the last seven years of this age.  Yet, even a later year is not out of the question, as described in previous chapters herein.  The student of truth must be very watchful of world events as this climax and its related troubles could come on man very rapidly from here on out. 

 

In any case, this writer has edited this presentation to leave most of the future prophetic dates in an open venue without attempting to relate them to the present Julian-Gregory solar calendar years (as was originally undertaken).  In this sense, the events are outlined, but are not precisely dated as this writer hoped could be done. 

 

In terms of the move to world government, the European and African unions are now in place.  The Americas union is projected to be completed in 2005-2006.  Total world government is now expected to become reality by 2010.  Manifestly, this process will affect the overall chronology of events in the age end.  But as events start to unfold, the reader can use this chronology as a guide to events and the dating arrangement. 

 

While the previously described events may not progress precisely as outlined herein, most or many of them should take place under some arrangement.  Consequently, this appendix may not have it exactly right, but the message could have some general application and offer some perspective of what might develop.